JP2020058870A - System for game - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent inconsistency from occurring between updating of holding points and travel of pseudo balls.SOLUTION: In a system for a game including a card unit 3 capable of converting a game value carried by a player into holding points, and a game machine capable of playing a game by credit converted from holding points, and connected communicably with the card unit 3, when adding point by converting, into holding points, a credit point addition object portion generated in excess of an upper limit of credit, travel of pseudo balls is started in a pseudo ball unit 120 for addition, and holding point display is updated on condition that pseudo balls equivalent to an addition number of the holding points are detected.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

  The present invention includes a gaming device capable of converting a gaming value owned by a player into points, and a gaming machine capable of playing with points and being communicatively connected to the gaming device. Regarding the system.

  As a conventional game system, a virtual game ball display is provided in an enclosed game machine capable of digitally displaying the number of balls held, and by turning on / off an LCD that looks like a game ball on the virtual game ball display, or A system is devised so that the player can intuitively grasp the state of increase or decrease in the number of balls held by moving the six real balls enclosed in the virtual game ball display (Patent Reference 1).

JP, 2005-261571, A

  However, the virtual game ball display is only for making the player imagine the increase or decrease of the number of balls held, and the movement of the virtual ball in the virtual game ball display is detected, and the digital display is updated based on the detected movement. It is not something that will be done. Therefore, the movement of the virtual sphere was not strictly reflected in the digital display.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to use a form of a point-score game, but when a score-point updating condition is satisfied, It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming system in which the points are updated by artificially performing the operation corresponding to the discharge or collection of the value object.

(1) The present invention is a gaming device (cards in FIGS. 1 and 111) capable of converting a gaming value (card balance, medals, and medals) owned by a player into a first tie point (points and gambling balls). The unit 3) and the second holding point (credit) converted from the first holding point to be used for the game can be played and the winning determination means (FIGS. 7 and 116) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred. A gaming system having a main control board 116) and a gaming machine (slot machine 2S of FIG. 1, pachinko machine 2 of FIG. 111) communicatively connected to the gaming device,
Conversion means (main control unit 323 of CU3) for converting the first holding point into the second holding point;
First holding point display means (display 51, display 312 in FIGS. 7 and 116) for displaying the first holding point;
Second point storage means (credit number counter in FIGS. 7 and 116) for storing the second point up to the upper limit,
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second point above the predetermined point is stored in the second point storage means (FIG. 51; bet if the credit number counter becomes 0). Control to a state where several operations are disabled),
If the winning determination means determines that there is a winning, a second score adding means for adding points corresponding to the winning to the second score stored in the second score storing means (FIG. 7 and The payout control unit 31) of FIG. 116,
Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for moving a predetermined object (pseudo ball 124 in FIG. 8),
Movement detecting means (optical sensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the predetermined object,
The predetermined object is moved by the moving means when the number of points to be added due to the occurrence of the prize exceeds the difference between the upper limit point and the second holding point stored in the second holding point storage means. Movement control means (payout control unit 31 in FIG. 14, payout control unit 16 in FIG. 116, flowchart in FIG. 10),
On the basis of the movement of the predetermined object detected by the movement detecting means, a point corresponding to the excess is added to the first holding points (points, game balls) displayed by the first holding point display means. And a first holding point display updating means (main control unit 323 in FIGS. 7 and 116, see FIGS. 7 and 121),
The moving means stops the predetermined object at a predetermined initial position when supplied with electric power.

  According to such a configuration, when the point-added object that exceeds the upper limit of the second holding point is converted into the first holding point and the point is added, the movement of the predetermined object (the pseudo ball 124 in FIG. 8) does not occur. Since the display of the first holding point is updated on the condition that it is detected, the first holding point is updated by simulating the action corresponding to the discharge of the value object like the game which is not the holding point type. Can be done. Further, by starting the rotation of the predetermined object from the initial position when the power is turned on, the time from the start of rotation of the predetermined object to the detection after the power is turned on can be made constant.

(2) The present invention is capable of converting a game-owned game-owned value (card balance, saved medal, saved ball) into a first score (a score, a game ball) and a first score according to a point command. A first holding point display updating means (main control unit 323 in FIG. 14, main control in FIG. 116) for adding points to the first holding point displayed by the display means (display 312 in FIG. 7 and display 312 in FIG. 116) Section 323) provided with a connection section (connector 220 in FIG. 4 and connector 420 in FIG. 114) for communicatively connecting to a game device (card unit 3 in FIGS. 7 and 116), and the first holding point. It is a gaming machine (a slot machine 2S in FIG. 7, a pachinko machine 2 in FIG. 116, an example in which a pseudo ball unit is provided in the gaming machine) capable of playing with a second point (credit) converted from
Winning determination means (main control board 116 in FIGS. 7 and 116) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred;
Second point storage means (credit number counter in FIGS. 7 and 116) for storing the second point up to the upper limit,
Game control means (FIG. 51; bet number operation invalid state when the credit number counter becomes 0) for performing game control based on the fact that the second score points above a predetermined point are stored in the second score point storage means. Control)
When the winning determination means determines that there is a prize, the second score increasing means (in FIG. 7) adds points corresponding to the prize to the second points stored in the second score storing means. The payout control unit 31 and the payout control unit 17) in FIG. 116,
Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for moving a predetermined object (pseudo ball 124 in FIG. 8),
Movement detecting means (optical sensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the predetermined object,
The predetermined object is moved by the moving means when the number of points to be added due to the occurrence of the prize exceeds the difference between the upper limit point and the second holding point stored in the second holding point storage means. Movement control means (payout control unit 31 in FIG. 7 and payout control unit 17 in FIG. 116);
Based on that the movement of the predetermined object is detected by the movement detecting means, the point addition command is issued to add a score according to the excess to the first holding point displayed by the first holding point display means. A transmission means for transmitting (S-unit communication control unit 82 in FIG. 4, P-unit communication control unit 81 in FIG. 114),
The moving means stops the predetermined object at a predetermined initial position when supplied with electric power.

  According to such a configuration, when the point-added object generated by exceeding the upper limit of the second holding points is converted into the first holding points and the points are added, the movement of the predetermined object is detected as a condition. Since the display of the first holding point is updated, the first holding point can be updated by simulating the action corresponding to the discharge of the value object like the non-pointing type game. . Further, by starting the rotation of the predetermined object from the initial position when the power is turned on, the time from the start of rotation of the predetermined object to the detection after the power is turned on can be made constant.

(3) The present invention is a conversion means (main control unit 323 of CU3) for converting a game value (card balance, saved medal, saved ball) owned by a player into a first score (a score, game ball).
Moving means (motor 127 of FIG. 8) for moving a predetermined object (pseudo ball 124 of FIG. 8),
Movement detecting means (optical sensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the predetermined object,
Movement control means for moving the predetermined object by the movement means when receiving the holding point update information indicating the update of the first holding point (payout control section 31 in FIG. 14, payout control section 16 in FIG. 116, FIG. 10). Flow chart),
And a gaming device (card unit 3 in FIGS. 4 and 114) provided with a result transmission unit (CU communication control unit 80 in FIGS. 4 and 114) for transmitting the detection result of the movement detection unit so as to be communicatively connected. A gaming machine (slot machine) that includes a connection unit (S-unit communication control unit 82 in FIG. 4, P-unit communication control unit 81 in FIG. 114) and is capable of playing with a second holding point converted from the first holding point. 2S, a pachinko machine 2, and a modified example in which a pseudo ball unit is provided in the card unit 3,
A first holding point display means for displaying the first holding point (display 51 in FIG. 14, display 54 in FIG. 121);
Winning determination means (main control board 116 in FIGS. 14 and 121) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred;
A second holding point storage means (a credit number counter in FIGS. 14 and 121) for storing the second holding point up to an upper limit point;
Game control means (FIG. 51; bet number operation invalid state when the credit number counter becomes 0) for performing game control based on the fact that the second score points above a predetermined point are stored in the second score point storage means. Control)
When the winning determination means determines that there is a prize, the second score increasing means (in FIG. 14) adds points corresponding to the prize to the second score stored in the second score storing means. The payout control unit 31 and the payout control unit 17) in FIG. 121,
If the points to be added due to the occurrence of the prize exceeds the difference between the upper limit point and the second score stored in the second score storage means, the score update information is added to the gaming device. Point update information transmitting means (S-unit communication control unit 82 in FIG. 4, P-unit communication control unit 81 in FIG. 114),
A first holding point display update for adding a score corresponding to the excess to the first holding point displayed by the first holding point display means based on the detection result of the movement detection means transmitted from the gaming device. Means (dispensing control unit 31 in FIG. 14 and dispensing control unit 17 in FIG. 121),
The moving means stops the predetermined object at a predetermined initial position when supplied with electric power.

  According to such a configuration, when the point-added object generated by exceeding the upper limit of the second holding points is converted into the first holding points and the points are added, the movement of the predetermined object is detected as a condition. Since the display of the first holding point is updated, the first holding point can be updated by simulating the action corresponding to the discharge of the value object like the non-pointing type game. . Further, by starting the rotation of the predetermined object from the initial position when the power is turned on, the time from the start of rotation of the predetermined object to the detection after the power is turned on can be made constant.

(4) The present invention is a winning determination means (main control board 116 in FIG. 4) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred.
Of the first points (points, game balls) converted from the game value owned by the player and the second points (credits) used for the game converted from the first points, the above Second point storage means (credit number counter in FIGS. 7 and 116) for storing two points up to the upper limit,
Game control means (FIG. 51; bet number operation invalid state when the credit number counter becomes 0) for performing game control based on the fact that the second score points above a predetermined point are stored in the second score point storage means. Control),
If the winning determination means determines that there is a winning, a second score adding means for adding points corresponding to the winning to the second score stored in the second score storing means (FIG. 7 and The payout control unit 31) of FIG. 116,
Moving means (motor 127 of FIG. 8) for moving a predetermined object (pseudo ball 124 of FIG. 8),
Movement detecting means (optical sensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the predetermined object,
When the number of points to be added due to the occurrence of the prize exceeds the difference between the upper limit point and the second holding point stored in the second holding point storage means, the moving means causes the predetermined object (FIG. 8). Movement control means (payout control unit 31 in FIG. 14, payout control unit 16 in FIG. 116, flowchart in FIG. 10) for moving the pseudo ball 124) of FIG.
And, based on the movement of the predetermined object being detected by the movement detecting means, the number of points to be added to the first points (points, game balls) due to the occurrence of the prize exceeds the difference. A gaming machine (slot machine 2S of FIG. 1, FIG. 1) which includes a transmission unit (S-unit communication control unit 82 of FIG. 4, P-unit communication control unit 81 of FIG. 114) that transmits a point addition command for adding points based on the score. 111 pachinko machines 2)
And a connection unit (connector 330 of FIG. 4 and connector 380 of FIG. 114) for communicatively connecting to the game device capable of converting the game value into the first holding point (see FIGS. 1 and 111). In the example where the pseudo ball unit does not exist in the card unit 3 or CU,
A first holding point display means (display 312 in FIGS. 7 and 116) for displaying the first holding point;
Based on the point addition command transmitted from the gaming machine, a first point that adds points according to the excess to the first point (points, game balls) displayed by the first point display means Display update means (main control unit 323 in FIG. 14, main control unit 323 in FIG. 116),
The moving means stops the predetermined object at a predetermined initial position when supplied with electric power.

  According to such a configuration, when the point-added object generated by exceeding the upper limit of the second holding points is converted into the first holding points and the points are added, the movement of the predetermined object is detected as a condition. Since the display of the first holding point is updated, the first holding point can be updated by simulating the action corresponding to the discharge of the value object like the non-pointing type game. . Further, by starting the rotation of the predetermined object from the initial position when the power is turned on, the time from the start of rotation of the predetermined object to the detection after the power is turned on can be made constant.

(5) The present invention is a winning determination means (main control board 116 in FIGS. 14 and 121) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred,
Winning determination means (main control board 116 in FIGS. 14 and 121) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred,
First point display means (display 51 in FIG. 14 and display 54 in FIG. 121) for displaying first points (points, game balls) converted from the game value owned by the player,
First holding point display updating means (payout control section 31 in FIG. 14 and payout control section 17 in FIG. 121) that adds points to the first holding points displayed by the first holding point display means in response to a point addition command,
Second point storage means (credit number counter in FIG. 7 and FIG. 116) that stores up to the upper limit point the second point used for the game converted from the first point,
Game control means (FIG. 51; bet number operation invalid state when the credit number counter becomes 0) for performing game control based on the fact that the second score points above a predetermined point are stored in the second score point storage means. Control),
And a game including a second holding point adding means for adding points corresponding to the winning to the second holding points stored in the second holding point storage means when the winning determination means determines that there is a winning Machine (slot machine 2S in FIG. 1, pachinko machine 2 in FIG. 111)
And a connection unit (connector 330 of FIG. 4 and connector 380 of FIG. 114) for communicatively connecting to the game device capable of converting the game value into the first holding point (see FIGS. 1 and 111). An example in which a pseudo ball unit is provided in the card unit 3 or CU,
Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for moving a predetermined object (pseudo ball 124 in FIG. 8),
Movement detecting means (optical sensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the predetermined object,
The predetermined object is moved by the moving means when the number of points to be added due to the occurrence of the prize exceeds the difference between the upper limit point and the second holding point stored in the second holding point storage means. Movement control means (main control unit 323 in FIGS. 14 and 121),
Transmission means for transmitting the point addition command in order to add a point according to the excess to the first holding point based on the movement of the predetermined object detected by the movement detection means (see FIGS. 4 and 114). CU communication control unit 80),
The moving means stops the predetermined object at a predetermined initial position when supplied with electric power.

  According to such a configuration, when the point-added object generated by exceeding the upper limit of the second holding points is converted into the first holding points and the points are added, the movement of the predetermined object is detected as a condition. Since the display of the first holding point is updated, the first holding point can be updated by simulating the action corresponding to the discharge of the value object like the non-pointing type game. . Further, by starting the rotation of the predetermined object from the initial position when the power is turned on, the time from the start of rotation of the predetermined object to the detection after the power is turned on can be made constant.

(6) In the gaming system of (1), the gaming machine of (2) or (3), or the gaming device of (4) or (5),
Arrangement members (arms 125 and support members 126 in FIG. 8) for arranging the predetermined objects (pseudo balls 124 in FIG. 8) at predetermined intervals on the circumference around the rotation axis,
And a drive unit (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for rotating the arrangement member in which the predetermined object is arranged at predetermined intervals around the rotation axis.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to repeatedly rotate and move the predetermined object by rotationally driving the arrangement member and repeatedly use the predetermined number of predetermined objects, so that it is possible to reduce the cost.

(7) In the gaming system described in (1), the gaming machine described in (2) or (3), or the gaming device described in (4) or (5) above,
When a plurality of the predetermined objects are sequentially moved by the moving means, a time period for determining a time interval from when the movement of the predetermined object is detected by the movement detecting means to when the next movement of the predetermined object is detected. Interval determination means (S15 in FIG. 10, S25 in FIG. 11, S65 in FIG. 117),
When the time interval determination means determines that the time interval is outside the predetermined reference range, the abnormal time control means (S16 of FIG. 10, S26 of FIG. 11, S66 of FIG. 117) which executes predetermined abnormal time control. ) And further.

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined abnormality control is executed when the time interval in which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is outside the reference range. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent as much as possible an illegal act such as updating the holding point by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detecting means without using the regular moving means.

(8) In the gaming system of (1) above, the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above, or the gaming device of (4) or (5) above,
When the first condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied and the second condition for updating the second holding point is satisfied, the movement control means determines whether the first condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the movement of the predetermined object by the movement means is started after the predetermined rest period has elapsed after the movement of the predetermined object by the movement means based on the above is completed (FIGS. 13 and 120). .

  With such a configuration, even when both the first condition and the second condition for updating the first holding point are satisfied, the predetermined object is moved based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and then the predetermined object is moved. Since the movement of the predetermined object based on the establishment of the second condition is executed after the lapse of the rest period, the movement of the predetermined object corresponding to the first condition and the movement of the predetermined object corresponding to the second condition are distinguished. can do.

(9) In the gaming system of (1) above, the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above, or the gaming device of (4) or (5) above,
The movement control means moves the predetermined object depending on whether a first condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied and a second condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied. It is possible to perform control by changing the aspect of (FIG. 12 and FIG. 119).

  According to this structure, the movement control means controls the first holding point for updating the first holding point and the movement control based on the second holding point for updating the first holding point. It can be distinguished from the control of the means.

It is a front view showing a card unit and a slot machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which a front door of the slot machine is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol of a reel. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit used in the card unit and the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a winning combination and a symbol combination. It is an explanatory view for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and a transmission / reception mode thereof. It is a block diagram which shows the part related to addition and subtraction of a holding point among CU and S units. (A) is the sectional view seen from the front of the addition pseudo ball unit, and (b) is the sectional view seen from the front of the addition pseudo ball unit. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the payout control part at the time of turning on a power supply. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the payout control part when addition conditions are satisfied. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the payout control part when subtraction conditions are satisfied. (A) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor during the lending operation, and (b) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor during the winning. (A) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when the lending operation is performed during the winning addition, and (b) shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when the winning is done during the lending. It is a time chart. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of the part related to addition and subtraction of the holding point of CU and S units. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of CU side and S stand side. It is a figure which shows the control circuit of a main control part and a CU communication control part, and the content of the stored authentication information. It is an explanatory view for explaining a notice processing when abnormalities are detected as a result of mutual authentication. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a communication start request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the operation instruction. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the details of each bit of the operation request of the operation instruction command, and (b) is an explanatory view explaining the details of each bit of the CU state of the operation instruction command. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the operation response. It is a figure which shows the meaning and determination point of various data. (A) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of the game machine state 1, (b) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of the game machine state 2, (c) is each bit of the game machine error state 1 It is a figure which shows the detail of. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of a communication state response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a device information response. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a manner of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the card unit and the slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication interruption is detected by the card unit side. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a process when a communication failure is detected on the slot machine side. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of processing in the card unit and the slot machine at power-on. (A) (b) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 33, (a) is an authentication sequence at the time of CU power supply starting, (b) is at the time of game machine power supply starting Is an authentication sequence of. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of processing of a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. 34 (a). It is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 35. 36 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 35. 36 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 35. 36 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing storage setting of an authentication key in an EEPROM. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of normal, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of abnormal. It is a diagram showing an example of a process when the card unit and the slot machine are reconnected. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of processing in a standby state where the card unit and the slot machine are not operated. FIG. 31 shows an example of processing by the card unit and the slot machine when a card is inserted into the card unit. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the process at the time of insertion shown in FIG. 45. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine at the time of consuming the balance of a prepaid card. FIG. 38 shows an example of processing by the card unit and the slot machine during replay. FIG. 27 shows an example of processing by the card unit and the slot machine when the number of points is subtracted according to an instruction from the card unit side. It is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the occurrence of a small winning combination is detected during the big bonus. It is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the number of points in the slot machine runs out during the game. It is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when returning the card. It is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the game is interrupted. FIG. 38 shows an example of processing by the card unit and the slot machine when the front door of the slot machine is unlocked and opened. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine is not connected when the power supply is activated while the card unit is holding the card. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of processing by the card unit and the slot machine when an operation instruction (no requested operation) from the card unit does not reach the slot machine. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of processing by the card unit and the slot machine when an operation response (response to no request operation) from the slot machine does not reach the card unit. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when an operation instruction (addition request) from the card unit does not reach the slot machine. FIG. 31 shows an example of processing by the card unit and the slot machine when the operation response (response to the addition request) from the slot machine does not reach the card unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when an operation instruction (subtraction request) from the card unit does not reach the slot machine. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the operation response (response to the subtraction request) from the slot machine does not reach the card unit. FIG. 38 shows an example of processing by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a response of addition refusal to the addition request of the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when the addition request | requirement which exceeded the upper limit of the number of credits was made. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a clear refusal response to the clear instruction request of the card unit. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when a slot machine returns a response of permission refusal to a game permission request of a card unit. It is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a response of refusal of prohibition to the game prohibition request of the card unit. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a front door open refusal response to the front door open request of the card unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine when power is cut off in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding the addition / subtraction data. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine when power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the operation instruction. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine when power is cut off in the card unit before reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of power failure in the CU side shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power supply failure shown in FIG. 69 occurs. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where a communication partner does not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of power failure in the CU side shown in FIG. 70. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine when the power supply to the card unit is cut off before the addition request is reached. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine when power supply interruption occurs in the card unit before the operation response to the addition request arrives. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery at the time of the occurrence of power failure of the CU side shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where there is a communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of the occurrence of power failure in the CU shown in FIG. 75. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the subtraction request. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before the operation response to the subtraction request arrives. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where there is a communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of the occurrence of power failure in the CU side shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where there is a communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power supply failure shown in FIG. 79 occurs. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine when the power supply to the card unit is cut off before the clear request is reached. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the slot machine when power is cut off in the card unit before the operation response to the clear request is reached. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery at the time of the occurrence of power failure in the CU side shown in FIG. 82. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where there is a communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of occurrence of power failure in the CU side shown in FIG. 83. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of an operation state displayed in association with processing of the card unit and the slot machine when a card is inserted into the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process of a card unit and a slot machine in the case of performing a points sharing process which divides and transfers points (points sharing) during a game in which a membership card is inserted. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine in the case where a points sharing process of dividing and transferring points (sharing points) is executed during a game in which a visitor card is inserted. It is a diagram showing another example of the processing of the card unit and the slot machine in the case where a points sharing process for dividing and transferring points (point sharing) is executed during a game in which a membership card is inserted. FIG. 11 is a screen diagram of a display unit when a point sharing process is executed. FIG. 11 is a screen diagram of a display unit when a point sharing process is executed. FIG. 11 is a screen diagram of a display unit when a point sharing process is executed. FIG. 8 is a screen view of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. FIG. 8 is a screen view of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. FIG. 8 is a screen view of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. FIG. 8 is a screen view of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen diagram of an indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen diagram of an indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen diagram of an indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen diagram of an indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen diagram of an indicator when a wagon service is performed. FIG. 103 is a transition screen diagram in FIG. 101. It is a screen diagram of an indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen view of a display device during insertion of a membership card. It is a screen view of a display device during insertion of a membership card. It is a screen view of the display unit during the return of the card. It is a screen view of the display unit during the return of the card. It is a figure which shows the whole system for delivering the authentication information which consists of an authentication key for security ensuring, and a unique ID (also called SID). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and S stand side in a modification. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program in a modification of the insertion process shown in FIG. 36. It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the glass door and front frame of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the transmission / reception of various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side. It is a block diagram showing a portion related to addition and subtraction of game balls of CU and P units. It is a flowchart showing the operation of the payout control unit at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows operation of a payout control part at the time of a foul ball occurrence. (A) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor at the time of the lending operation, (b) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor at the time of winning, and (c) is the generation of foul balls. It is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of an optical sensor at time. (A) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when the lending operation is performed during the winning addition, and (b) shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when the winning is done during the lending. It is a time chart, (c) is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of an optical sensor when a foul ball occurs during lending. It is a block diagram showing a modification of a portion related to addition and subtraction of game balls of CU and P units.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, as a concept of terms used in the present embodiment, "gaming equipment" means gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.), card units, Z counters, card issuing devices, clearing devices, hall management devices, and prize exchanges. This is a concept including all devices such as devices installed in a game arcade, and the "gaming device" is a concept in which only the gaming machine is excluded from the above "gaming device".

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “S”) 2 is provided in parallel with each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. A card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3 which is an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 2S at a predetermined lateral position of the machine 2S.

  The card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a recording medium for games issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member at the game hall. By accepting a membership card, which is a recording medium for gaming, and converting the gaming value of the player specified by the recorded information of those cards into points, the bet number is exchanged for points in the corresponding slot machine 2S. It has a function to set and enable the game.

  Both the visitor card and the membership card have a function of recording the card balance and the points earned in the game so that they can be specified by the record information of the card. The difference in the handling of points between the membership card and the visitor card is that the membership card is a card that can be used to accumulate points earned in the game even after the day of the game. Is that the card cannot use the function. Visitor cards and membership cards are IC cards.

Hereinafter, both the membership card and the visitor card will be simply referred to as “card”.
On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting a bill, a projecting portion 305 projecting from the front of the device toward the front of the device, a card insertion port 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 309 is accepted by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 4), and the information recorded on the card is read. On the surface of the protruding portion 305 facing the player, the display 312 and the membership card ID recorded in the membership card and the number of medals specified by the membership ID when the membership card is received are displayed. An IR light receiving unit 315 (FIG. 1) which receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for carrying out the replay game used and a remote controller (not shown) possessed by an attendant at the game hall and converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal for output. (Not shown) is provided.

  Further, a lending button 321, a return button 322, a call button 798, a credit button 422, and a credit settlement button 421 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation for withdrawing the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card to secure a score for use in the game. The return button 322 is a button operated when returning the card inserted in the card insertion / ejection slot 309. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling an attendant at the game hall. The credit button 422 is a button for performing an operation for withdrawing a score and securing a score to be used for a game. The credit settlement button 421 is a button that is operated when converting to points and when returning the card inserted in the card insertion / ejection slot 309.

  The display device 312 displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance) recorded in the inserted game recording medium (card), but displays the points and various other information described later. In addition to being possible, the surface is configured by a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display unit 312 with a finger.

  When the player has operated the replay button 319 and the score acquired by the player is recorded in the inserted card, a predetermined number of score points are deducted from the score and the score is used for the game. If the inserted card is a membership card and the number of points is not recorded and the saved medal is recorded in the hall management computer 1 etc., a predetermined number of points from the saved medal are given. Will be deducted and points will be given for use in the game. A given number of points are deducted from the given points and converted into credits with an upper limit value set.

  Here, the concepts of “balance (remaining amount)”, “points”, “saving medal”, and “credit” will be summarized.

  The “balance” is an example of a value recorded on a card in exchange for cash, for example. By operating the lending button after inserting the card into the CU, a part of the “balance” recorded on the card is withdrawn and converted into “points”. For example, a "lending" equivalent to 500 yen is withdrawn by one lending operation, and this is converted into 25 "points".

  "Points" cannot be used directly for games, but can be used when seeking wagon service. By operating the credit button, a part of the points is withdrawn and converted into "credits". For example, 25 credit points are deducted by one credit operation, and the credit points are converted to the same credit.

  The "credit" can be used for the game, and the bet amount can be set by using the "credit". For example, 1 "credit" is consumed for 1 BET. Further, when a prize is generated, credits of points corresponding to the type of the prize are added. In this way, the data updated according to the bet number setting during the game and the occurrence of winning is the credit, not the score.

  However, since the credit has a predetermined upper limit (for example, the upper limit = 25 in the present embodiment), the credit is not updated beyond the upper limit. Therefore, for example, when a prize that exceeds the upper limit occurs, after the credit is updated to the upper limit, the credit amount exceeding the upper limit is converted into a score and the score is updated. .

  "Credits" cannot be used for wagon services. Therefore, there is no possibility that the "credit" that can be used for the game will run out by requesting the wagon service.

  At the end of the game, by operating the credit settlement button, "credits" are converted back into points. In the present embodiment, one credit is converted into one credit. However, a predetermined number of “credits” may be deducted as a commission when performing the reverse conversion.

  At the end of the game, by operating the card return button, the acquired points are written in a card so that the points can be specified. At this time, the points may be recorded directly on the card, or the points may be managed by the hall management computer using the ID of the card.

  When the returned card is inserted again into the card unit (which may be the same as or different from the CU at the end of the game), the "points" recorded on the card are read and read. “Points” are displayed on the CU. If the “score” read at this time is equal to or more than the minimum credit point deduction (for example, 25 points), the “score” can be calculated without deducting the “balance” from the card. The credit required for the game can be secured by performing the withdrawal operation of "" (credit button ON).

  However, the "score" is valid only on the day when the game is acquired, and on the next day, the "score" is managed as a "saving medal" at the game hall. Therefore, even if the player visits the game hall the next day and inserts the card into the card unit 3, the score is displayed as 0. In the case of playing a game using "savings medals", first, a saving medals replay operation (replay button ON) is required. When the replay button is operated, a part of the "stored medal" is converted into a score. For example, one replay operation causes 25 points of "saving medals" to be withdrawn and converted into 25 "points".

  That is, the "saving medal" is a point deposited in the game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 and other management computers installed in the game hall. On the other hand, the "score" is the number of points owned by the player as a result of the player playing a game with the gaming machine, and is a score not yet deposited in the game hall.

  The points may be managed by a management device for managing the number of points set in the game hall. In short, the difference between "savings medals" and "points" is the points earned at the amusement hall after the operation of saving medals for depositing at the amusement hall has been performed, or the points still being deposited at the amusement hall. It is a point that is a score of the stage that is not entered. Further, "credit" is common with "points" in that it is not deposited at the game hall, but "credit" is different in that it is used when playing a game.

  In addition, since "credit" is generated during the game and is converted into "point" when the game ends, "credit" is not recorded in the card. Of course, instead of this, the "credit" may not be converted into a point at the end of the game, but may be identifiable by the card (directly recorded on the card or managed by the management device by the card ID).

  In this embodiment, the saved medal data is not directly recorded in the membership card but is stored in a higher-level server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the membership card number so that the corresponding savings medal can be searched based on the membership card number. Is configured. On the other hand, the points are recorded directly on the card.

  As a method of recording the card balance or score with a membership card or visitor card in a identifiable manner, (a) record the card balance or score on the card itself, (b) record the card balance or score on the card itself. Instead, the card balance or score corresponding to the ID is stored in a computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID recorded in the card unit, (c) the card balance or score is recorded on the card itself. In addition, a method of storing a card balance or a score corresponding to the ID in a computer such as the hole management computer 1 in association with the ID of the card can be considered, and any method is adopted in the present embodiment. You may.

  The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344 and its authenticity or bill type is identified. Then, the player is given points according to the bill amount.

  In the following description, withdrawing the prepaid balance recorded on the card to give the player a score to be used for the game is referred to as “lending a score”.

  The points given by the operation of the replay button 319 or the lending button 321 and the points given by inserting the bill into the bill insertion slot 302 are stored together in the card unit 3. This score is displayed on the display 312. The card unit 3 may be provided with a dedicated indicator for displaying the points.

  In addition, a predetermined number of points are deducted from the points and converted into credits that can be used in the gaming machine. The card unit 3 subtracts and updates the stored credits for the bet number set in the slot machine 2S, and adds and updates the stored credits for the winning amount generated in the slot machine 2S.

  In the slot machine 2S, the number of bets is set by using credits, and the credits are added and updated according to winning. Therefore, it is not necessary to insert a medal when playing a game in the slot machine 2S. Therefore, the slot machine 2S is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout slot.

  Inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 2S, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 10 provided on the front door 2b.

  As shown in FIG. 3, "black 7", "net 7 (hatched 7 in the figure)", "white 7", "BAR", "replay" are provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. A plurality of kinds of mutually distinguishable patterns such as “watermelon”, “black cherry”, “white cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows in the see-through window 10.

  Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is rotated by a reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) provided correspondingly. As a result, the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed on the transparent window 10 while continuously changing. Further, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed as the display result on the see-through window 10.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R (see FIG. 4) that detect reference positions for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the rear side And a reel LED (not shown) for irradiating. The reel LED is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be independently irradiated.

  A display area 51a, whose display is controlled by the display 51, is arranged at the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2b. The display 51 is a liquid crystal display device. In the display area 51a, score points, the number of bets set in the game, and various other images (see FIG. 86 or FIGS. 90 to 107) are displayed.

  On the front surface side (front side in FIG. 1) of the display device 51, to detect an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player on the display surface and to specify the position (for example, a touch operation position). A touch panel (not shown) is installed.

  In addition, on the front door 2b, a one-sheet BET switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets using "credit = 1" corresponding to one medal, and a maximum bet determined according to the gaming state. It is operated when setting the number (for example, "credit = 3" in the normal game state before the occurrence of BB and RT (Replay Time) in which the winning probability of replay is high probability, "credit = 2" in bonus). MAXBET switch 6, a cancel button 9 that is operated when canceling the set bet number and when reducing the set bet number, a start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, and rotation of reels 2L, 2C, 2R Stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59, which are operated when stopping each of these, are provided. When the cancel button 9 is pressed and held, the set bet number set by the BET switches 5 and 6 is canceled. When the cancel button 9 is pressed for a short time, the bet number set by the BET switches 5 and 6 is decreased by 1.

  The jog dial 59 is used by the player to selectively specify various display items (icons) and the like in the display area 51a. When the player turns the jog dial 59, items to be selected among various display items on the display screen displayed in the display area 51a are sequentially displayed, and the player is turned by turning the jog dial 59. When the player presses the chance button 58 after designating a display item to be selected, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  Further, the front door 2b is provided with a game auxiliary display device 12 for displaying an error code and the like, and a payout display device 13 for displaying the number of points and the number of credits awarded by the occurrence of a prize.

  Further, on the front door 2b, a start valid LED 18 for notifying by lighting that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, a weight (reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game). A waiting LED 19 that lights up to indicate that it is in a waiting state (starting state) and a replaying LED 20 that lights up to indicate that a replay game is in progress are provided.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 2S, first, the number of points secured by using the card unit 3 is converted into credits, and the number of bets is set using the credits. To use the credit, the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the gaming state among the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game. Is ready to start.

  The winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the transparent window 10 of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R The winning line L2 set across, the winning line L3 set across the symbols arranged in the lower row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the upper row of the reel 2L, the middle row of the reel 2C, the lower row of the reel 2R, that is, the lower right direction. 5 types of winning line L4 set across the symbols lined up, the lower stage of reel 2L, the middle stage of reel 2C, the upper stage of reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set across the symbols lined up to the right It is defined as a line. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L5, and may be another line.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate, and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R continuously change. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped and the display result is derived and displayed on the see-through window 10.

  Then, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped to complete one game, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter, also referred to as a combination) on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a result of display, a prize is generated, and a player's score is determined according to the prize.

  Further, in the slot machine 2S according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate to start changing the symbols, one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R When operated, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  Of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel that stops first is called the first stop reel, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, and the reel that stops last is called the third stop reel. The reel stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and the symbols for 80 × 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames are changed, so a maximum of 4 symbols are drawn in 190 ms. It will be possible. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of the symbols, for a total of five symbols.

  Therefore, for example, when the symbols displayed in the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is used as a reference, from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols up to 6 frames ahead of the symbol can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed in the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. It is possible to pull in the arranged symbols on the pay line and stop them. Such reel control is called pull-in control.

  Further, two vertically long transparent windows W0 and W1 are formed on the front door 2b, and a part of the addition pseudo-ball unit 120 is visibly provided inside one of the transparent windows W0 and the other is transparent. Inside the transparent window, a part of the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 is provided so as to be visible. Pseudo balls are enclosed in these pseudo ball units 120 and 121 in a state in which the player cannot extract them. The pseudo ball units 120 and 121 will be described in detail later (FIGS. 8A and 8B, etc.).

  Next, referring to FIG. 2, in the slot machine 2S, the front door 2b is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 2a with the left edge thereof as the swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging projections 6a and 6b are provided near the edge of the front door 2b opposite to the swing center. The engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at the positions of the main body frame 2a facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b. By pressing the open front door 2b against the main body frame 2a, the engagement protrusions 6a, 6b move over the engagement receiving pieces 7a, 7b, and in the state of overcoming, the engagement protrusions 6a, 6b are moved downward by the biasing force of the spring. It moves and becomes locked.

  A front door opening solenoid 110 (see FIG. 4) is provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b, and when the front door opening solenoid 110 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engaging members resist the biasing force of the spring. The fitting protrusions 6a and 6b are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be in the unlocked state, and the front door 2b is opened.

  A front door closing detector 112 (see FIG. 4) is provided at a position in the upper portion of the main body frame 2a that comes into contact with the front door 2b, and the front door 2b is pressed against the main body frame 2a to be in a locked state. To be detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main controller 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 is a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (functioning as a work area of the CPU). Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal integrity with peripheral devices, etc.

  The main controller 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication controller 80 for communicating with the payout controller 31 of the slot machine 2S. Is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connector 330 for connecting to the slot machine 2S side, and the slot machine 2S is provided with a connector 220 for connecting to the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 31 are communicatively connected via the connectors 330 and 220 and the connection wiring.

  When the CPU 805 (see FIG. 16) of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, it sends an error display command to the display control unit 797 and displays it. A control for causing the device 312 to display an error and for turning on or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is executed.

  Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the S-unit communication control unit 82, the main control unit 323 sends an error display command to the display control unit 797 to cause an error to the display 312. The display is displayed, an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and control is performed to transmit a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  The currency discriminator 344 discriminates the authenticity and type of the bill, and the discrimination result signal is input to the main controller 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the infrared rays emitted from the remote controller possessed by the attendant of the game arcade, the received light signal is input to the main controller 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the record information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 writes the information on the inserted card to the card reader / writer 327. When the data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data in the inserted card.

  The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327, and when it determines that the card is an improper card (counterfeit card or the like), the display control unit 797 displays an error display command. Is executed to cause the display 312 to display an error, an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a control signal for notifying the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred is executed. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as balance, points, and credits is output from the main control unit 323 to the display device 312, and the output display data is output. Is displayed on the display 312. When the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main controller 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main controller 323. When the player operates the credit button 421, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the credit settlement button 422, the operation signal is input to the main controller 323.

  To the slot machine 2S, a main control board 116 that controls the progress of the game of the slot machine 2S (game control), and a payout controller 31 that transmits information about points and the like to the card unit 3 are electrically connected. It is provided in the state. Further, the slot machine 2S is provided with a display effect control board 90 electrically connected to the payout controller 31, and a display ROM board 92 electrically connected to the display effect control board 90. ing.

  The CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323 on the card unit 3 side, and the CU communication control unit 80 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 provided in the slot machine 2S connect to the connector 330 and It is electrically connected via the connector 220. Further, the S-unit communication control unit 82 and the payout control unit 31 are configured by a one-chip LSI 117.

  Then, from the CU communication control unit 80 to the S-unit communication control unit 82, “addition request c (credit), addition request number c (credit)” and “subtraction request c (credit), subtraction request” relating to the credit update request. "Number c (credit)", "addition request p (points), addition request number p (points)" related to request for updating points, and "subtraction request p (points)" and subtraction request number p (points ) ”, And further, various commands for the game permission / prohibition request are transmitted, and the various commands are transmitted from the S-unit communication control unit 82 to the payout control unit 31. The main control board 116 and the LSI 117 may be integrated into a single chip.

  As will be described later, the addition request p (points) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the points are loaned from the prepaid balance or the replay loan is made, and the payout control unit 31 receives the request. Add points and update. As will be described later, the subtraction request p (points) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when split transfer of points (point sharing process) or a wagon service is performed, and the payout control unit receiving the request. 31 updates by subtracting the number of points. However, the update of the score is conditional on the movement / detection of a pseudo ball which will be described later.

  As will be described later, the addition request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the credit from the holding point is deducted, and the payout control unit 31 receives and updates the credit amount. To do. As will be described later, the subtraction request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the credit settlement is performed, and the payout control unit 31 having received the command subtracts and updates the credit number.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command for requesting the payout control unit 31 to permit the game or a command for prohibiting the game. The number of addition requests is a command for designating the number of points or the number to be added to credits by the above-mentioned addition request p (points) command and addition request c (credit) command. The subtraction request number is a command that specifies the number of points to be subtracted or the number to be subtracted from credits by the above-described subtraction request command.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 116. The gaming machine control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (functioning as a work area of the CPU). Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal integrity with peripheral devices, etc.

  The main control board 116 includes a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers in a predetermined range, a sampling circuit that acquires random numbers from the random number generation circuit, and the like. The main control board 116 carries out an internal lottery for winning combinations by using the random numbers acquired from the random number generating circuit.

  On the main control board 116, one BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, cancel button 9, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, game auxiliary indicator 12, payout indicator 13, start valid LED 18, wait state. The LED 19, the LED 20 during replay, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensors 33L, 33C and 33R are connected.

  The main control board 116 detects the start operation after setting the bet number, starts variable the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and randomly selects the result of one game, and stops each reel in response to the stop operation. Let

  In the slot machine 2 of the present embodiment, the point addition rate changes depending on the set value. Specifically, the credit addition rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the internal lottery described later. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, and 6 has the highest addition rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the addition rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages.

  Inside the slot machine 2S, an operation unit (not shown) for the administrator to change the set value is provided.

  Here, the processing executed by the main control board 116 in the slot machine 2S will be described.

  In the slot machine 2S of the present embodiment, when a winning symbol is arranged on any of the winning lines of the variable display device constituted by the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the winning is won. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it is roughly classified into a special combination involving the transition to a big bonus (BB) and a regular bonus (RB), and a small combination involving the payout of medals. There is a replay role (replay) that enables the next game to be started without the need to set the bet number.

  In the following, the big bonus may be described as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be described as RB. In addition, the big bonus and the regular bonus may be simply referred to as a bonus. In order for the winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the combination.

  Of the winning flags of each of these winning combinations, the winning flags of the small winning combination and the re-playing winning combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flags of the special winning combination are , Is valid until the combination of the allowed combinations is set by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the allowed combinations is prepared. That is, once the winning flag of a special winning combination is won, even if the combination of winning combinations permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and carried over to the next game. Becomes

  As shown in FIG. 5, as a role in this slot machine 1, a big bonus (hereinafter, a big bonus is BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, a regular bonus is RB) are special roles, and a watermelon is a minor role. , Cherry, and Bell are defined as replay roles.

  Cherry is awarded when the "white cherry" symbol is derived on any of the winning lines on the right reel in any of the gaming states, and one point corresponding to one medal is given in any of the gaming states. To be Will be paid out. If the "white cherry" symbol is stopped at the upper or lower row of the right reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2, L5 or the winning lines L3, L4. Since he has won the cherry on the winning line, he will be awarded 2 points.

  Watermelons are awarded when there is a combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" or "watermelon-watermelon-BAR" on any of the winning lines in any game state, and 15 points are awarded in RB and BB. In the normal game state, 12 points are given. Bell wins when a combination of "bell-bell-bell" is available on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, 15 points are awarded in RB and BB, and 10 points are awarded in the normal gaming state. To be

  Replay is a combination of "replay-replay-replay" combination, "BAR-replay-replay" combination, or "black 7-replay-replay" combination in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. The prize will be awarded when When a replay wins, no credit is given, but you can start the next game without setting the bet number again, so you will be awarded 3 points corresponding to the bet number that has become unnecessary in the next game. The same thing.

  When the combination of "net 7-net 7-black 7" is aligned on any of the pay lines in the normal gaming state, the RB wins and the gaming state shifts to RB. The RB is a gaming state in which the winning role of the small role, especially the bell, is more advantageous to the player than the other gaming states due to an increase in the winning probability. When the RB is started, 12 games are exhausted, or 8 games are won ( Any type of role is acceptable), the end of whichever comes first.

  BB is a combination of "black 7-black 7-black 7", a combination of "net 7-net 7-net 7" or "white 7-white 7-white 7" in any of the winning lines in the normal game state. The prize will be awarded when the combination is complete.

  When BB wins, the game state shifts to BB and simultaneously shifts to RB. When RB ends, if BB is not finished, shifts to RB again and is repeatedly controlled to RB until BB ends. It That is, during BB, it is always controlled by RB. Then, the BB ends when the total number of points given to the player in the BB exceeds 465 points. When the BB ends, the RB also ends regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied.

  The internal lottery according to the present embodiment will be described below. In the internal lottery, it is decided whether or not to allow the winning of each of the above-mentioned winning combinations, before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, when the start switch 7 is detected, a random number value for the internal lottery (an integer of 0 to 65535) is acquired. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM of the main control unit 41 is set to the lottery work also assigned to the RAM of the main control unit 41. Then, for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not a special winning combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work and the determination of each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, the bet number, and the set value It is performed according to the number of values.

  The random number storage work is a storage area in which the numerical data latched in the random number register R1D is stored at the same time when the start switch 7 is operated, and is latched every time new numerical data is latched in the random number register R1D. The numerical data is read in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main), and the numerical data stored in the random number storage work is updated to the latest latched numerical data.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the winning combination of the internal lottery differs depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RB or BB. Furthermore, in the normal game state, the winning combination of the internal lottery differs depending on whether or not the special winning combination is carried over.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and none of the special roles has been carried over, BB, RB, replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read as the target roles in the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and one of the special roles has been carried over, replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read as the target roles in the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RB (including in BB), watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read as target winning combinations in the internal lottery.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which three types of symbol combinations corresponding to BB, three types of symbol combinations corresponding to replay, and two types of symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon are set, but the internal lottery is performed. Then, each symbol combination is read as a target combination. For example, for BB, a combination of "black 7-black 7-black 7", a combination of "net 7-net 7-net 7", and a combination of "white 7-white 7-white 7" are targets of internal lottery. Are read out in sequence. Also for replays and watermelons, the symbol combinations are sequentially read as target combinations. Further, the number of determination values used in the internal lottery is set for each symbol combination corresponding to the set values 1 to 6. That is, the winning rate is set for each symbol combination corresponding to the set values 1 to 6. Therefore, in the internal lottery, derivation (occurrence) of the symbol combination is allowed according to the winning rate determined for each symbol combination corresponding to the set value.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined corresponding to the winning combination of the internal lottery, the current game state and the set value are sequentially added to the random number value for the internal lottery (value of the lottery work) and added. When the result of (1) overflows, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Therefore, the winning combination is won with a probability (the number of judgment values / 65536) according to the size of the number of judgment values.

  Then, when it is determined that one of the winning combinations is won, the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storing work allocated to the RAM of the main control unit 41. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area. The upper byte of the internal winning flag storage work is assigned as the special combination storing work to which the special combination winning flag is set, and the lower byte is the general combination winning combination. It is assigned as a general role storing work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special winning combination is won, the winning flag of the special winning combination indicating that the special winning combination has been won is set in the special winning storage work, and the winning flag set in the general winning storage work is cleared. Further, when the general combination is won, the winning flag of the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If none of the winning combinations and winning combinations are won, only the general winning combination storing work is cleared.

  The "game" in the slot machine 2S is, in a narrow sense, from the time the start switch 7 is operated to the time when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped. Since the number of bets before the operation of 7 is set, the payout of medals and the transition of the game state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are broadly included in the "game". And

  The main control board 116 first sets the bet number by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and starts the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by detecting the operation of the start switch 7. .

  However, when a replay prize has been won in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game is automatically set by the in-replay game flag (the in-replay game flag is deleted at this stage).

  When the number of bets is set and the start switch 7 is operated, the main control board 116 extracts a random number for internal lottery, and based on the value of the extracted random number, each winning combination determined in accordance with the gaming state. A lottery process for deciding whether or not to win a prize is performed.

  The main control board 116 performs reel rotation processing after the lottery processing. In the reel rotation processing, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reeled on the condition that one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. The motors 32L, 32C and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, center and right reels 2L, 2C and 2R.

  The main control board 116 stops when a predetermined condition (detecting the reference position by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The operation of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is valid. Then, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player to stop driving the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When the driving of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the main control board 116 performs a winning determination process for determining whether or not any predetermined winning symbol has been derived and displayed on the winning line. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that a winning combination such as BB is won, a process for controlling a bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  When the winning determination process is completed, the main control board 116 performs a payout process. In the payout process, an addition number signal indicating the number of points to be given is output to the LSI 117. Further, in the payout process, as various processes not related to winning, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied during the bonus (BB or RB) is performed.

  Next, a configuration other than the main control board 116 mounted on the slot machine 2S will be described.

  The LSI 117 includes a payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (functioning as a work area of the CPU). Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal integrity with peripheral devices, etc. The game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 116 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 and the payout control unit 31 of the LSI 117 may be integrated into one chip.

  The payout control unit 31 is provided with a score counter for storing the total score of the player separately from the card unit 3. For example, the player performs an operation (a lending operation or a medal replay operation) to secure a score by deducting the valuable value owned by the player, or the player plays a card in which the score is recorded by the card unit 3 If it is inserted into the card, the data of the addition request p (points) is transmitted from the card unit 3. When the payout control unit 31 receives the data of the addition request, the payout control unit 31 cyclically moves the pseudo balls of the addition pseudo ball unit 120 according to the data, and updates the point count counter based on the detected number of pseudo balls. (See FIG. 7 to FIG. 13). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 31 requests the wagon service or receives the data of the subtraction request p (points) from the card unit 3, the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 according to the subtraction request number. The pseudo balls are moved cyclically, and the score counter is updated by subtraction based on the detected number of pseudo balls. That is, the payout controller 31 drives the addition pseudo-ball unit 120 when updating the holding point counter, and drives the subtracting pseudo-ball unit 121 when updating the holding point counter.

  The payout control unit 31 includes a credit number counter for storing the number of credits of the player, separately from the card unit 3. For example, when the player performs an operation to secure credits by deducting points, the data of the addition request c (credit) is transmitted from the card unit 3, and the payout control unit 31 makes the addition request c (credit). ), The credit number counter is added and updated. On the other hand, when the bet number is set or when the data of the subtraction request c (credit) is received from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 31 subtracts and updates the credit number counter according to the set bet number or the subtraction request number. . The updating of the credit number counter is not subject to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball. Therefore, for example, if the bet amount is set, the credit amount counter is decremented and updated without driving the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121. When a prize is generated, the credit counter is added and updated without driving the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 unless the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit value due to the generated prize.

  Further, a front door opening solenoid 110 and a front door closing detector 112 are provided in an electrically connected state with respect to the LSI 117.

  When the front door closing detector 112 detects that the front door 2b is closed, the detection signal is input to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 excites the front door opening solenoid 110 by transmitting a front door opening solenoid excitation signal to the front door opening solenoid 110 to unlock the front door 2b.

  The display effect control board 90 functions as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a work area of the CPU. A RAM (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The display production control board 90 is provided with a display 51, speakers 53 and 54, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59. The display effect control board 90 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. The display effect control board 90 reads the image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the display ROM board 92, transmits the display data to the display 51, and causes the display 51 to display. Control is performed to display a display screen such as score points, the number of bets, or a navigation effect regarding a small winning combination.

  Also, the button input signal of the chance button 58 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 59 are input to the display effect control board 90, and the display effect control board 90 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 51. The display screen is output and the display 51 displays a display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 59 and the operation of the chance button 58.

  Next, signals transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S and between the boards of the slot machine 2S will be described.

  From the card unit 3 to the payout controller 31 of the slot machine 2S, an addition request p (points +), an addition request c (credits +), a subtraction request p (points −), and a subtraction request c (credits −). ), A game permission request, a game prohibition request, an addition request number p (points), an addition request number c (credits), a subtraction request number p (points), and a subtraction request number c (credits). However, both are transmitted as "commands".

  The addition request p (points) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the points are lent out by deducting the prepaid balance or the points are lent out by operating the replay button 319. In response to this, the payout control unit 31 drives the addition pseudo ball unit 120, and based on the detection of the pseudo ball, increments and updates the score counter. The subtraction request p (points) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the points are dividedly transferred (points sharing processing) or a wagon service is performed. The payout control unit 31 having received the instruction drives the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121, and subtracts and updates the point count counter based on the detection of the pseudo ball.

  Further, the payout control unit 31 transmits the number of additions p (points), which is the number of points updated, to the CU based on the driving of the addition pseudo-ball unit 120, and based on the driving of the subtraction pseudo-ball unit 121. The subtraction number p (points) which is the update number of the point number counter is transmitted to the CU. Based on the arrival of the number of additions or the number of subtraction, the CU updates the display of the number of points by lending the points, replaying the saved medals, transferring the points separately, and further fixing the wagon service.

  The addition request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 together with the subtraction request p (points) command when the credit button is operated to deduct the points. In response to this, the payout control unit 31 drives the subtraction pseudo ball unit 120, subtracts and updates the score counter based on the detection of the pseudo ball, and in exchange for that, updates the credit number counter. Since updating the credit number does not require movement / detection of the pseudo ball, the credit may be updated before the pseudo ball is detected. Alternatively, the credit may be added and updated in conjunction with the subtraction and update of the points.

  The subtraction request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 together with the addition request p (points) command when the credit settlement button is operated to settle the credit. Receiving it, the payout control unit 31 drives the addition pseudo-ball unit 121, increments and updates the score counter based on the detection of the pseudo-ball, and in exchange for that, resets the credit number counter to 0. Subtract and update. Since updating the number of credits does not require movement / detection of the pseudo balls, the credits may be updated to 0 before the pseudo balls are detected. Alternatively, the credit number may be gradually subtracted and updated in conjunction with the addition and update of the points.

  Furthermore, when the payout control unit 31 updates the value of the point count counter, the payout control unit 31 transmits the number of points added or the number of points subtracted, which is the number of updates of the point counter, to the CU. Similarly, when updating the value of the credit number counter, the credit addition number or the credit subtraction number, which is the update number of the credit number counter, is transmitted to the CU.

  Based on the arrival of the number of points added / subtracted or the number of credits added / subtracted, the CU updates the display of points or credits and confirms the request for updating points and the request for updating credits (credit settlement). Let

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command for requesting the payout control unit 31 to permit the game or a command for prohibiting the game. The addition request number p (points) is a command that specifies the number of points to be added to the number of points by the addition request command. The subtraction request number p (points) is a command that specifies the number of points to be subtracted from the number of points by the subtraction request command. The addition request number c (credit) is a command for designating the credit number to be added to the credit number by the addition request command. The subtraction request number c (credit) is a command that specifies the credit number to be subtracted from the credit number by the subtraction request command.

  From the payout control unit 31 of the slot machine 2S to the card unit 3, the point count indicating the value of the point count counter stored in the payout control unit 31, the credit number indicating the value of the credit number counter, and the point addition are added. / Point subtraction / addition number indicating the value to be updated, credit addition / subtraction number indicating the value to be added / subtracted and updated, and external output information indicating various game states and the like are transmitted.

  The external output information includes bet number setting information (indicating the set bet number) transmitted when the bet number is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Reel start information transmitted at the time of starting, internal win status information (indicating the winning result) transmitted at the time of internal lottery executed by the start operation, time at which each of the first to third stop operations is executed The first to third stop operation information (indicating the type of the stop reel) transmitted in step S1 and the result information (indicating the type of winning or winning combination) transmitted when the display result is determined are included.

  From the payout control unit 31 to the main control board 116, a health check command, a prize payout number acceptance command, and a BET-disabled signal are transmitted. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 116 is operating normally. The prize payout amount acceptance command is a command indicating that the addition amount c (credit) transmitted from the main control board 116 has been accepted.

  The BET impossible signal is a signal indicating that the value of the credit number counter has become less than the minimum value required for setting the bet amount. When the main control board 116 receives the BET-disabled signal, the main control board 116 puts the game in a prohibited state where the game cannot be newly started thereafter. Specifically, the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 for setting the bet number is invalidated.

  A connection confirmation signal is returned from the main control board 116 to the payout controller 31. The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 116 and the payout control section 31 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 116 to the payout control section 31. The payout control unit 31 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 31 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  Further, a signal of "addition number + (credit)" is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31 at the time of winning detection, while "subtraction number + ( Credit) ”signal is transmitted. The “addition number + (credits)” indicates the number of credits to be added according to the winning, and the “subtraction number + (credits)” indicates the number of credits to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. The payout control unit 31 adds the value of the credit number counter in accordance with the signal of “addition number + (credit)” and also adds the “addition number c (credit)” for transmission to the card unit 3. Further, the payout control unit 31 subtracts the value of the credit number counter in accordance with the signal of “subtraction number + (credit)” and adds “subtraction number c (credit)” for transmission to the card unit 3. To do.

  Further, from the main control board 116 to the payout control section 31, various kinds of external output information indicating the bet number setting, reel start, etc., which have already been described, are transmitted. The payout control unit 31 transmits each piece of external output information to the card unit 3 at the timing of receiving this external output information. The external output information may be directly transmitted from the main control board 116 to the card unit 3.

  The display control command is transmitted from the payout controller 31 to the display effect control board 90. The display device control command includes a game machine information command, a card unit (CU) operation command, a test command, and an effect command. The display 51 displays the current player's points, the card balance, the number of credits, the number of medals, etc. based on the display control command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating a gaming state of a slot machine such as BB or RT, and the card unit operation command is a command transmitted in response to the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect control board 90 for a display. The effect command is a command for instructing switching to various effect screens according to the game state.

  A command is transmitted from the payout control unit 31 to the display effect control board 90 every 300 ms. The display effect control board 90 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received even though a fixed time exceeding 300 ms has elapsed after the command was received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though it has exceeded 300 ms since the last command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times in a row, The effect control board 90 detects the time-out, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 51 to display an error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, main ones of various data stored on the CU side and the S-unit side and their transmission / reception modes will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CU side manages the current points and credits by calculating the fluctuations in the points and credits on the S-side. The current number of points is also calculated and stored on the S side. However, especially on the S side, the number of credits is only to prevent a new game from starting as early as possible when the number of credits is less than the minimum required for bet number setting (for example, 0). The number of points is also a secondary, and for example, the number of points (point counter) may not be stored and managed on the S side. . In the present embodiment, since the CU side mainly manages the number of points and the number of credits, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points and the number of credits on the S-side, and it is not necessary to provide such a function. The cost of S units can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Especially, compared to the CU, the S unit has a shorter replacement cycle in the game hall, and the replacement is performed earlier. Due to this, by having the CU side have a main management function relating to the number of points and the number of credits on the S unit side to suppress the cost on the S unit side, it is possible to reduce the running cost of the game hall where the S unit is introduced. There is an advantage.

  FIG. 6 shows the storage data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and the storage data of the RAM mounted on the LSI 117 on the S side. First, when the power supply is started in a state where the S unit (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) are installed in the game hall and electrically connected for the first time, the LSI 117 on the S unit side performs the main control. The main board ID is transmitted from the board 116, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the LSI 117 itself is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU side stores the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID. Next, the data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU side and the S unit side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S unit side, and the S unit side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S unit side. When the power is turned on thereafter, these three pieces of information are transmitted from the S-unit side to the CU side, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data is collated with the already stored data, and it is determined whether or not the same S units as the previous one are connected. The connection time data is the new connection time data that is transmitted from the CU side to the S unit side when the connection between the CU side and the S unit side is started each time the power is turned on. Will be stored on the S side.

  Also, every time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the S unit side, the sequence number (SQN) is added and updated by "1" on the CU side and the S unit side, and the sequence number is updated by the CU side. And S side are stored. The SQN is a communication number for confirming whether the communication is properly performed by updating the number each time data is transmitted and received between the CU and the S unit. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication numbers.

  A specific mode of backing up the SQN between the CU and the S unit in this embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the S units in response to the operation instruction, and when the SQN from the S unit is received next, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Then, when the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the S units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in S units, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU, the SQN in the backed up storage is updated by 1 and transmitted. Store the transmitted SQN as a backup. Then, when the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated in S units.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 68 to FIG. 83 described later, when a communication disconnection occurs during communication, the SQN is backed up and stored until the communication is reconnected. Since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of the occurrence timing of the occurrence (see FIGS. 62 and 68 to 83), the SQN backed up and stored until communication reconnection is always the last SQN transmitted. Has become. On the other hand, since the CU side is in the state of transmitting the operation instruction or the state of receiving the operation instruction according to the timing of occurrence of the communication interruption (see FIGS. 62 and 68 to 83), until the reconnection of communication. The SQN stored in the interim backup storage is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, a certain operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the S unit side and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the S unit side stores the transmitted sequence number n. When the operation response is returned from the S-unit side to the CU side, the stored sequence number n plus 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. At the CU side, the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, so it is determined that the data communication has been normally performed, and when the operation instruction is sent next, the sequence number is incremented by +1. Then, the sequence number of n + 2 is sent to the S unit side.

  Next, the S-point side transmits the current point-related information (counting point-related information) to the CU side. This current score related information is stored by each counter in the current score related information storage area of the RAM.

  Also, the credit related information (credit related information being counted) is currently transmitted from the S side to the CU side. This current credit related information is stored by each counter in the current credit related information storage area of the RAM.

  The current point-related information and the current credit-related information are collectively referred to as current point-credit-related information.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the current point / credit related information storage area of the RAM has a point addition counter, a credit addition counter, a point subtraction counter, a credit subtraction counter, and an external output. A total of seven types of counters are provided: an information counter, a score counter, and a credit counter.

  The credit addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of credits to be added. For example, when a winning occurs in S units, the main control board 116 transmits an addition number signal that can specify the credit addition number to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 adds and updates the credit addition number counter based on the addition number signal. Note that the update of the credit addition number counter is not subject to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 121.

  The score addition counter is a counter for counting the score to be added. For example, when a prize is generated on S machines, the credit addition number counter is updated. However, when the number of credits to be added exceeds the upper limit value of the credit number counter due to the generation of the prize, the credit amount exceeding the upper limit is exceeded. The point addition counter is added and updated only for the points corresponding to. However, the point addition counter is added and updated based on the fact that the pseudo ball unit for addition 121 (see FIG. 4) detects a pseudo ball.

  The credit subtraction number counter is a counter for counting the number of credits to be subtracted. For example, when a bet number setting operation is detected, a bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 adds and updates the credit deduction number counter based on the bet number setting signal. The update of the credit deduction number counter is not subject to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 121.

  The score subtraction counter is a counter for counting the score to be subtracted. The point deduction counter is a point deduction request from the CU side (for example, a point deduction request according to a point division transfer, a point deduction request according to a wagon service request, and a point conversion to a credit). When a request for subtraction of the number of points is input, the count is incremented according to the number of requests for subtraction of the number of points.

  The point addition counter is used when a point addition request is input from the CU side (for example, a point addition request by inserting a card in which the points are recorded, a point addition according to a balance withdrawal operation). The request and the point addition request according to the operation of changing the credit to the point at the end of the game) are also counted up according to the number of points addition request.

  After transmitting the addition request p (points) or the subtraction request p (points), the CU waits for the update result of the points addition counter or the points subtraction counter from the S side. , The addition request p (points) or the subtraction request p (points) is confirmed. That is, at the time of transmitting the addition request p (points) or the subtraction request p (points), the CU adds the data such as the number of points, the total number of additions, and the total number of subtractions stored by itself to the addition request p ( It is not updated based on the score) or the subtraction request p (point).

  Further, the credit addition number counter indicates the credit addition request number even when a credit addition request (for example, a point subtraction request according to an operation for converting a point to credit) is input from the CU side. It is counted up accordingly. Similarly, the credit deduction number counter is also the credit deduction request number when a credit deduction request is input from the CU side (for example, a credit point addition request according to an operation that changes to a credit point at the end of a game). It is counted up according to.

  After transmitting the addition request c (credit) or the subtraction request c (credit), the CU waits for the update result of the credit addition number counter or the credit subtraction number counter from the S-side, and then adds the addition request c. (Credit) or subtraction request c (credit) is confirmed. That is, at the time of transmitting the addition request c (credit) or the subtraction request c (credit), the CU adds the data such as the number of credits, the total addition number, and the total subtraction number stored in itself to the addition request c (credit). Alternatively, it is not updated based on the subtraction request c (credit).

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times the game state has changed. As the external output information counter, a counter that counts the number of bets set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R start rotating, and a start operation A counter that counts the internal winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, by the winning combination, a counter that counts the operation by the first to third stopping operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is confirmed. It includes a counter that counts up at a time point, a counter that counts up by the game state when the game state changes, and a counter that counts up by the error type when an error occurs.

  It should be noted that the counter that counts up for each game state when the game state changes includes a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The LSI 117 adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on the various external output information transmitted from the main control board 116.

  The score counter is a counter for storing the player's current score (total score). The LSI 117 adds and updates the number-of-points counter by the addition of the number-of-additions counter when adding and updating the number-of-points addition counter, and adds and updates the number-of-points counter by Just subtract and update.

  The credit number counter is a counter for storing the player's current credit amount (total credit amount). The LSI 117 adds and updates the credit number counter by the addition amount of the credit addition number counter when adding and updating the credit addition number counter, and updates the credit number counter by the addition amount of the credit subtraction number counter when adding and updating the credit subtraction number counter. Just subtract and update.

  A command requesting data transmission is transmitted from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals. At the timing when the S command is received, the above seven types of counters (point addition counter, credit addition counter, point subtraction counter, credit subtraction counter, external output information counter, point counter, credit number) The value of the counter) is transmitted to the CU. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the S-units, as shown in FIG. 6, of the five types of counters out of the above seven types of counters except the point number counter and the credit number counter, set the counter value to “previous point number” each time data is transmitted.・ Back up to the storage area of "credit related information".

  That is, the value of the point addition counter is "addition number p (points)", the value of the credit addition number counter is "addition number c (credits)", and the value of the point subtraction number counter is "subtraction number p". (Points), the value of the credit subtraction number counter is "subtraction number c (credits)", the value of the external output information counter is "external output information", and the "previous points / credit related information" is stored. It is stored in the area. When the data is stored in the storage area, the data stored before that is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and saved (rewritten) in the storage area of "previous score / credit related information".

  After that, the point addition counter, the credit addition counter, the point subtraction counter, the credit subtraction counter, and the external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of the "previous point / credit related information" It is initialized (cleared to 0) and prepared for the next data count.

  As a result, the point addition counter, the credit addition counter, the point subtraction counter, the credit subtraction counter, and the external output information counter each receive the data (the points , Credit, external output information) change amount (untransmitted data to CU) is stored. Then, the next time the data transmission request is received from the CU, the amount of change in the data from when the data transmission request was received last time to the time when the data transmission request is received this time is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points and the total number of credits at the present stage are stored in the number-of-points counter and the number-of-credits counter which are not initialized each time data is transmitted. Then, each time a data transmission request is received from the CU, the total number of points and the total number of credits at this stage are transmitted to the CU. That is, each time the S units receive the command instructing the transmission of the data change amount, the S unit transmits the data change amount from the previous reception of the command to the current reception.

  In other words, in the storage area of the previous score / credit related information (the current score / credit related information transmitted immediately before), the added number p (holding number) which is the current score / credit related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before Points), the number of additions c (credits), the number of subtractions p (points), the number of subtractions c (credits), and data of external output information are stored as backup data. This backup data is not only the value of each counter this time at the time of the next transmission, but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted when the point related / credit related information is not transmitted from the S side to the CU side. This is so that the value can also be sent.

  On the CU side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the total number of points added (total addition), total number of credits added (total addition), total number of points subtracted (total subtraction), total number of credits subtracted (total subtraction) ), The total of external output information, the number of points, and the number of credits are stored.

  The CU updates the total number of points to be added and the number of points based on the value of the number of points addition counter transmitted from the S unit side, and the total number of credit additions based on the value of the number of credit addition counter, Update credits and. In addition, the CU updates the total number of points deducted and the number of points based on the value of the points deduction number counter transmitted from the S unit side, and the total number of credit deductions based on the value of the credit deduction number counter. And update the credit number.

  Further, the CU updates the cumulative total of external output information based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from S units. The cumulative total of external output information is updated for each type of external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to the "number of bets", "reel start", "internal winning according to winning combination", "first to third stop operation", "display result", and "change of gaming state", The number (number of times) is accumulated.

  In this way, the CU can manage the latest score by updating the score according to the current score / credit related information transmitted from S units one by one. Similarly, the CU shall update the total number of points added, total number of credits added, total number of subtractions, total number of credits subtracted, and total number of external output information based on the current points and credit related information transmitted from S units. It becomes possible to manage the latest information in.

  In addition to the values of the point addition counter, the credit addition counter, the point subtraction counter, and the credit subtraction counter from the S side, the CU also obtains the count values of the point counter and the credit counter. Although received, the number of points and the number of credits stored by itself are updated based on the values of the above points and credits addition counter and the above points and credits subtraction counter, and from the S side. The count values of the point count counter and credit count counter that are sent are not used. Therefore, even if the points and credits sent from the S side do not match the points and credits managed on the CU side, the points on the CU side are sent from the S side. It will not be updated with the points and credits you have received.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the score counter transmitted from the S unit side with the current score updated on the CU side to determine whether or not they match.

  Similarly, the CU collates the value of the credit number counter transmitted from the S unit side with the current credit number updated on the CU side to determine whether or not they match.

  On condition that it is determined that they match (match confirmation), the CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) to the S units and sends a normal (normal) operation response (command). (Response) continues to be received. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU controls to shift to the error state.

  As the control for shifting to the error state, for example, an error notification is performed by the display 312, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer 1). The error notification may be performed according to No. 1), or a predetermined notification for prompting an artificial response by a staff member can be considered.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU generates a command for instructing the correction of the score and credit to the score and credit managed by the CU, and then transmits the command to the S units. It is also possible to do so. In this case, the S unit is provided with a function of correcting the number of points and the number of credits stored by itself in accordance with the correction instruction command. The correction instruction command may be a command that specifies the number of points and the number of credits managed on the CU side, or the number of points and the number of credits managed on the CU side may be stored on the S side. It may be a command indicating the difference between the number of points and the number of credits.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of the various counters transmitted from the S side, and calculates and manages the number of points and the number of credits at the present time, particularly based on the values of the number of points and the number of credits addition / subtraction counters. It has the main management function of the number of points and the number of credits. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a main management function on the S unit. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. In this embodiment, the number of points and the number of credits are stored also on the S side for the purpose of immediately prohibiting the game when the number of credits becomes 0. However, it is possible not to provide a score counter or a credit counter for storing the score and the credit on the S side.

  The CU does not match the function for performing the score match determination process of collating the calculated score at the present time with the value of the score counter transmitted from the S side to determine whether or not they match. Sometimes, it has a function of performing control to shift to an error state (error control at the time of disagreement).

  In addition, the CU has a function of performing a credit number matching determination process of collating the calculated current credit number with the value of the credit number counter transmitted from the S unit side to determine whether or not they match. , And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when they do not match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of points and the number of credits are stored also on the S side, but the number of points and the number of credits match the number of points and credits managed and stored on the CU side. Whether or not it can be determined (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of points stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of points or credits stored and managed on the CU side due to misconduct or other circumstances, that fact can be checked. Although the determination function is provided on the CU side here, for example, by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU, the number of points and credits stored on the CU side and the number of credits stored on the S side are stored. It is also possible to receive the number of points and the number of credits that are present and determine whether or not they match.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the CU further has a storage area for storing the stored medals and a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU stores the stored medals in response to an input requesting the use of the stored medals (for example, pressing input of a replay button 319 (see FIG. 4) provided on the CU). A predetermined number of medals are subtracted from the storage area. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation of deducting the value from the gaming value owned by the player (for example, the prepaid balance or the number of accumulated medals), the player has a score for the debit. The addition request number p (points) to be added to the point counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S side. On the S side, in response to this, the pseudo ball is moved, and under the condition of the detection, the point count counter and the point addition counter are added and updated. The value of the point addition counter after the addition update is transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for the reception of the data, confirms the addition request p (points), and updates the point display.

  On the other hand, when an operation of ordering a so-called wagon service such as deducting the gaming value owned by the player and exchanging it for drinks etc. is executed, the request value p (pointing point) for subtracting the gaming value owned by the player is executed. ) Is transmitted from the CU side to the S side. On the S side, in response to this, the pseudo ball is moved, and under the condition of its detection, the point count counter is decremented and updated, and the point deduction counter is added and updated. The value of the score subtraction counter after addition and update is transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for the reception of the data, confirms the subtraction request p (points), and updates the point display.

  In addition, when the player performs an operation of deducting points and converting into credits, the subtraction request number p (points) for deducting the deducted points to the point counter, and the deduction. The addition request number c (credit) for adding the number of credits to the credit number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S side.

  On the S side, in response to this, the pseudo ball is moved, and under the condition of the detection, the point count counter and the point subtraction count counter are added and updated. Further, the credit number counter and the credit addition number counter are added and updated. The values of the score subtraction counter and the credit addition counter after the addition and subtraction update are transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for the reception of the data, confirms the subtraction request p (points) and the addition request c (credits), and updates the points display and the credit display.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a part of the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S that is related to the addition of points and the addition and subtraction of credits. In FIG. 7, the card unit 3 is provided with a display 312 and a main controller 323, and the slot machine 2S has a display 51, a payout controller 31, an addition pseudo ball unit 120, a subtraction pseudo ball unit 121, and A main control board 116 is provided.

  FIG. 8A is a cross-sectional view of the addition pseudo ball unit 120 as seen from the front, and FIG. 8B is a cross-sectional view as seen from the side. 8A is a sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 8B, and FIG. 8B is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 8A. In FIGS. 8A and 8B, the addition pseudo ball unit 120 includes a rectangular parallelepiped hollow casing 122. A rectangular window 122a larger than the transparent window W0 of the front door 2b (see FIG. 1) is opened on the front surface of the housing 122. The outer wall 122b on the front side of the housing 122 is fixed to the inner wall of the front door 2b so that the inside of the housing 122 can be seen through the transparent window W0.

  A rotator 123 is rotatably provided in the center of the housing 122. The rotating body 123 includes a plurality of (eight in the figure) pseudo balls 124, a plurality (eight in this case) of arms 125, and a cylindrical support member 126. The rotating body 123 is integrally formed of plastic or metal. Further, the pseudo ball 124 is formed to have substantially the same size and shape as a gaming medal used for a game in a so-called pachi-slot.

  It should be noted that the "ball" usually means a sphere, but in the present specification, the "pseudo ball" means not only a pachinko ball but also a game medal shape. And Further, the pseudo ball 124 shown in FIG. 8 may be a pachinko ball.

  The plurality of pseudo balls 124 are circularly arranged at equal angular intervals around the rotation centerline of the support member 126. The center line that vertically penetrates the center of each pseudo ball 124 is oriented in the same direction as the rotation center line of the support member 126. The end surface of each pseudo ball 124 is fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the support member 126 via an arm 125.

  A motor 127 is fixed to the central portion of the side surface on one side (left side in the figure) of the housing 122. As the motor 127, for example, a stepping motor that drives the rotary shaft 127a to rotate by a small predetermined angle each time the drive pulse φP is input is used. A bearing 128 is fixed to the central portion of the other side surface (right side in the figure) of the housing 123. The rotation shaft 127 a of the motor 127 penetrates through the holes of the housing 122 and the support member 126, and the tip end portion thereof is rotatably supported by the bearing 128.

  When the drive pulse φP is supplied to the motor 127, the rotary shaft 127a is rotationally driven, the rotary body 123 is rotationally driven, and the plurality of pseudo balls 124 circulate in the annular passage. When the supply of the drive pulse φP is stopped, the rotation of the rotary shaft 127a is immediately stopped.

  An optical sensor 130 is provided in the central hole at the upper end of the side surface of the housing 122 so as to face the passage of the pseudo ball 124. The optical sensor 130 emits light toward the passage of the pseudo ball 124, detects reflected light, and outputs a signal φS0 having a level corresponding to the intensity of reflected light. When the dummy ball 124 faces the optical sensor 130, the light emitted from the optical sensor 130 is reflected by the dummy ball 124 and enters the optical sensor 130, and the signal φS0 becomes, for example, “H” level. When the pseudo ball 124 does not face the optical sensor 130, the light emitted from the optical sensor 130 is not reflected by the pseudo ball 124, and the signal φS0 becomes, for example, “L” level. The optical sensor 130 output signal φS0 is used to reset the position of the pseudo ball 123 to the reference position when the power of the slot machine 2S is turned on.

  An optical sensor 131 is provided in the central hole at the lower end of the side surface of the housing 122 so as to face the passage of the pseudo ball 124. The optical sensor 131 irradiates the passage of the pseudo ball 124 with light, detects reflected light, and outputs a signal φS1 having a level corresponding to the intensity of reflected light. When the pseudo ball 124 faces the optical sensor 131, the light emitted from the optical sensor 131 is reflected by the pseudo ball 124 and enters the optical sensor 131, and the signal φS1 becomes, for example, “H” level. When the pseudo ball 124 does not face the optical sensor 131, the light emitted from the optical sensor 131 is not reflected by the pseudo ball 124, and the signal φS1 becomes, for example, “L” level. The output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 is used to count the number of pseudo balls 124 that have passed through the passage. The subtraction pseudo-ball unit 121 has the same configuration as the subtraction pseudo-ball unit 120.

  It should be noted that a mark having a light reflectance different from that of the surface of the pseudo ball 124 may be provided in the central portion of the surface of the pseudo ball 124 on the side of the optical sensors 130 and 131 to enhance the detection accuracy of the pseudo ball 124. A reflective film, a convex portion, a concave portion, or the like provided on the surface of the pseudo ball 124 can be used as the mark. Further, the mark is provided only on one of the plurality of pseudo balls 124, and when the power is turned on, the supply of the drive pulse φP is stopped when the mark is detected, so that the position of the pseudo ball 124 is set to the initial position. You may reset to. Further, only one of the optical sensors 130 and 131 is provided, and the output signal of one optical sensor is used to perform both the positioning of the pseudo balls 124 when the power is turned on and the counting of the number of the pseudo balls 124. May be. Further, by counting the number of the pseudo balls 124 using the plurality of optical sensors 130 and 131, the counting accuracy may be increased or fraudulent acts may be prevented. A magnetic sensor may be used instead of the optical sensors 130 and 131. When using the magnetic sensor, the pseudo ball 124 needs to be formed of a magnetic material. Further, the transparent windows W0 and W1 may be eliminated so that the player cannot see the pseudo ball 124.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the player debits the balance (remaining amount), inserts a card in which the points are recorded (with points), replays an operation to deduct the saved medals and add points (hereinafter referred to as "savings"). When a medal replay operation, a credit number adjustment operation, or the like is performed, a request for adding points is sent from the main control unit 323 on the CU side to the payout control unit 31 on the S-side. When the credit amount adjustment operation is performed, a credit subtraction request is also transmitted from the main control unit 323 on the CU side to the payout control unit 31 on the S-side.

  When the player performs a wagon service request, a request to divide and transfer the points, and an operation to add the number of credits by withdrawing the points, by operating the touch panel on the screen, the main control unit 323 on the CU side executes S. A request for subtracting points is sent to the payout control unit 31 on the table side. When an operation for adding points and deducting points is performed, a request for credit addition is transmitted from the main control unit 323 on the CU side to the payout control unit 31 on the S-side. It

  On the other hand, on the slot machine 2S side, when the bet number is set, when the set bet number is decreased, when bet is canceled (the bet number is temporarily set to 0), or a winning is detected. In that case, the fact is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout controller 31. When there is a credit addition request from the main control unit 323, when a winning is detected, when the bet number is reduced, or when bet cancellation is performed, an addition condition for adding credit is satisfied. When there is a credit subtraction request from the main control unit 323, and a bet number is set, a subtraction condition for credit deduction occurs.

  When the condition for adding points (reception of points addition request p from the CU side) is satisfied, the payout control unit 31 sets an addition target value according to the cause. The addition target value is the detection target number of the pseudo balls 124. In the present embodiment, the number of scheduled points to be updated and the addition target value have a one-to-one correspondence.

  For example, when the balance is withdrawn by the lending operation, the point is 25 points. Alternatively, if a credit is normally added when a winning occurs, but if the number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the current number of credits and the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, 25 points) is exceeded, the amount exceeding the upper limit is exceeded. Since the score is added to the current score, the excess score is set as the addition target value in this case.

  After setting the addition target value, the payout control unit 31 rotates the rotating body 123 of the addition pseudo ball unit 120, increments the point addition counter every time the pseudo ball 124 is detected, and sets the addition target. When the same number of pseudo balls 124 as the value is detected, the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped after incrementing the point addition counter.

  Further, when the holding point subtraction condition is satisfied, the payout control unit 31 sets a subtraction target value according to the cause. For example, when the value of the service is set to 300 points by the request of the wagon service, the subtraction target value is set to 300.

  The payout control unit 31 rotates the rotating body 123 of the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtracting the holding points, increments the holding point subtraction number counter each time the pseudo balls 124 are detected, and outputs the same number of the pseudo balls 124 as the subtraction target value. When detected, the point subtraction counter is incremented, and then the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped.

  In particular, in the subtraction condition of the score, when the request to add the credit by deducting the score is input (when the score subtraction request p and the credit addition request c are input), the payout control unit 31 The rotating body 123 of the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction is rotated, and the point subtraction number counter and the credit number addition number counter are incremented every time the pseudo ball 124 is detected, and the same number of pseudo balls 124 as the point subtraction target value is detected. In this case, the point subtraction counter and the credit addition counter are incremented, and then the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped.

  Further, the payout control unit 31 adds and updates only the added points of the point addition counter and the credit addition counter when adding and updating the point addition counter and the credit addition counter. When adding and updating the holding point subtraction number counter and the credit number subtracting counter, the holding point number counter and the credit number adding counter are subtracted and updated by the addition amount of the point subtraction number counter and the credit number adding counter. The count values of the score counter and the credit counter are displayed on the S display devices 51. As a result, the display of the number of points and the number of credits on the S display devices 51 is updated based on the detection of the same number of pseudo ball movements as the number of scheduled points update.

  In addition, the count values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter for each of the S points and the credit number are transmitted to the main control unit 323 of the CU at constant time intervals. In the main control unit 323, the total number of points and the number of credits at this stage are updated and calculated and stored based on the transmitted count value, and the total number of points and the number of credits are updated and displayed on the display unit 312 of the CU. It As a result, the score display on the display unit 312 on the CU side is also updated based on the fact that the same number of pseudo ball movements as the planned score update number has been detected.

  Next, the addition and subtraction operations of the payout controller 31 will be described in more detail. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the operation of the payout controller 31 when the power of the slot machine 2S is turned on. The payout control unit 31 waits until the power is turned on in step S1, and when the power is turned on, supplies the drive pulse φP to the motor φP of the addition pseudo ball unit 120 in a predetermined cycle in step S2, and the pseudo ball is added. 124 is moved.

  Next, in step S3, the payout control unit 31 detects whether or not the pseudo ball 123 is detected based on the signal φS0 from the optical sensor 130. If not detected, the process returns to step S2 to output the drive pulse φP. And the pseudo ball 124 is moved. When the pseudo ball 124 is detected in step S3, the output of the drive pulse φP is stopped and the pseudo ball 124 is stopped at the reference position in step S4. When the signal φS0 of the optical sensor 130 is raised from the “L” level to the “H” level and then the signal φS0 is lowered from the “H” level to the “L” level, for example, the payout control unit 31 First, it is determined that the pseudo ball 124 is detected, and the pseudo ball 124 is stopped. Therefore, even when the pseudo ball 124 moves to an arbitrary position while the power is off, the position of the pseudo ball 124 can be reset to the reference position, and the pseudo ball 124 passing in front of the optical sensor 131 can be moved. The number can be counted accurately.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the addition process of the payout control unit 31. In FIG. 10, the payout control unit 31 waits until the condition for adding points is satisfied in step S10. When the condition for adding points is satisfied, the addition target value is set in step S11 and the pseudo ball unit for addition is set. A drive pattern for rotationally driving the rotating body 123 (see FIG. 8) in 120 is set.

  In addition, the condition for adding points is that when the card with the points recorded is inserted into the CU, when the withdrawal operation of the balance is detected by the CU, when the operation of replaying stored medals is detected by the CU, It is established when an operation of converting credits into points (credit settlement operation) is detected, and credits are given in excess of the upper limit of the number of credits (at the time of winning).

  If the condition for adding points is not satisfied, it is determined in step S10A whether or not the condition for adding the number of credits is satisfied. The conditions determined here are the occurrence of a prize, the operation of canceling the set number of bets, and the operation of reducing a part of the set number of bets.

  If the condition for adding to the number of credits is not satisfied in step S10A, NO is determined and it is determined again whether the condition for adding points in step S10 is satisfied.

  On the other hand, if any of the credit addition conditions is satisfied, it is determined in step S10A that "the credit is added". In this case, in step S10B, it is determined whether the total of the current value of the credit number counter and the number of credits (value to be added) given by the establishment of the credit addition condition exceeds 25 which is the upper limit of the credit number counter. Determine. If it exceeds, the surplus is set as the addition target value in order to convert the surplus into points and add it to the score counter. For example, when the value of the credit number counter is 15, and the player is awarded with 15 points, the addition target value is set to 5.

  On the other hand, if the total of the current credit number counter and the value to be added does not exceed the upper limit of 25, only the addition of credits is sufficient, so the process returns to step S10 again and the point addition condition is satisfied. Determine whether or not When the credit addition condition is satisfied, the credit is updated by another credit addition process (not shown).

  In step S10C, the payout control unit 31 sets the addition target value to a value obtained by subtracting 25, which is the upper limit of the credit number, from the total of the credit number counter and the addition target value, and sets the credit addition number counter value from the upper limit of 25. The credit number counter value is set as a subtracted value, and the credit number counter is set to 25 which is the upper limit.

  The target value for addition is the content of the addition request (withdrawal from the card balance, insertion of a card with scored points, replay of saved medals, credit settlement), the type of winnings, and the number of bets decreased due to changes in the number of bets. Is set based on the relationship between the number of bets reduced due to bet cancellation and the credit number counter.

  The driving pattern varies depending on the addition conditions (winning, cancellation of bets, reduction of bets, etc.). The payout control unit 31 stores drive pattern data for each addition condition. For example, when the operation of converting the number of points to the number of credits is performed, the rotating body 123 is rotated at a constant speed until a predetermined unit number (for example, 5) of pseudo ball movements is detected, and then temporarily stopped. Then, the drive pattern data is selected such that the rotating body 123 is rotated until the predetermined number of pseudo balls move again after a predetermined period until the addition target value is reached.

  Next, the payout control unit 31 supplies the drive pulse φP to the addition pseudo ball unit 120 in a predetermined cycle in step S12 based on the set drive pattern to rotate the rotating body 123. In step S13, the payout control unit 31 determines whether or not the pseudo ball 124 is detected based on the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131. When the pseudo ball 124 is not detected in step S13, the process returns to step S12, and when the pseudo ball 124 is detected, it is determined in step S14 whether or not it is the second or subsequent detection.

  If it is determined in step S14 that the detection is the second or later detection, it is determined in step S15 whether the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range. If it is determined in step S15 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is not within the specified range, there is a possibility that the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 has failed or an illegal act has been performed. Therefore, an error occurs in step S16. Perform processing. The error processing includes stopping the game, displaying the occurrence of an abnormality, and reporting the occurrence of an abnormality.

  When it is determined in step S15 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range, the point addition counter and the point counter are incremented (+1) in step S17.

  Next, in step S171, it is determined whether or not the point addition condition determined to be established in S10 is credit settlement. If it is not the credit settlement, the process proceeds to step S18. In the case of credit settlement, in order to subtract credit in conjunction with the addition of points, in step S172, the credit subtraction counter is incremented (+1) and the credit counter is decremented (-1).

  If it is determined in step S14 that it is not the second or subsequent detection, it is the first detection, and thus step S15 is not executed and the point addition counter and the point count counter are incremented in step S17 (+1).

  In step S18, it is determined whether or not the addition target value has been detected, that is, whether or not the count value of the addition number counter has reached the addition target value. If the addition target value has not been detected, the process returns to step S12, When the addition target value is detected, the output of the drive pulse φP is stopped in step S19 to stop the rotation of the rotating body 123 of the addition pseudo ball unit 120.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the payout control unit 31. In FIG. 13, the payout control unit 31 waits until the subtraction condition is satisfied in step S20. If the subtraction condition is satisfied, the subtraction target value is set in step S21, and the rotating body 123 in the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction is set. A drive pattern for rotationally driving (see FIG. 8) is set.

  In addition, the point deduction condition is that if the request for the wagon service is detected in the CU, if the operation to withdraw the points and convert to credits is detected in the CU, the request to divide and transfer the points is detected in the CU. It is established when it is done.

  The subtraction target value is set based on the contents of the subtraction request (wagon service, transfer of divided points, conversion to credit by deduction of points), and the set number of bets.

  The driving pattern differs depending on the subtraction condition (wagon service, transfer of divided points, conversion to credit by deduction of points). The payout control unit 31 stores drive pattern data for each subtraction condition.

  Next, the payout control unit 31 supplies the drive pulse φP to the subtraction pseudo ball unit 120 at a predetermined cycle based on the set drive pattern to rotate the rotating body 123. In step S23, the payout control unit 31 determines whether or not the pseudo ball 124 is detected based on the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131. When the pseudo ball 124 is not detected in step S23, the process returns to step S22, and when the pseudo ball 124 is detected, it is determined in step S24 whether or not it is the second or subsequent detection.

  If it is determined in step S24 that the detection is the second or later detection, it is determined in step S25 whether the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range. If it is determined in step S25 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is not within the specified range, it is possible that the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 120 has malfunctioned or an illegal act has been performed, so an error occurs in step S26. Perform processing. The error processing includes stopping the game, displaying the occurrence of an abnormality, and reporting the occurrence of an abnormality.

  When it is determined in step S25 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range, in step S27A, the condition for subtracting the score is a conversion operation to credit by withdrawing the score. In step S27B, the points subtraction counter, the credit counter, and the credit addition counter are each incremented (+1) and the points counter is decremented (-1). On the other hand, if the condition for subtracting the score is not the conversion operation to credit by deducting the score, in step S27C, the score subtraction counter is incremented (+1) and the score counter is decremented (-). 1) Do.

  If it is determined in step S24 that it is not the second or subsequent detection, it is the first detection, and therefore, in step S27A described above without executing step S25, it is determined that the holding point subtraction condition is satisfied by crediting due to deduction of the holding point. It is determined whether it is a conversion operation to.

  In step S28, it is determined whether or not the subtraction target value is detected, that is, whether or not the count value of the holding point subtraction number counter reaches the subtraction target value. If the subtraction target value is not detected, the process proceeds to step S22. Returning, when the subtraction target value is detected, the output of the drive pulse φP is stopped in step S29 to stop the rotation of the rotating body 123 of the subtraction artificial ball unit 120.

  The value of the point addition counter, the point subtraction counter, the credit number addition counter, and the credit number subtraction counter updated by the processing shown in FIGS. Sent to. In response to this, the CU updates the number of points and the number of credits, and updates the display of points and the number of credits. On the other hand, the S units update the holding point display and the credit number counter based on the holding point counter and the credit number counter updated in the processing shown in FIGS. 10 and 11.

  The payout control unit 31 uses the count value of the point addition counter, the point subtraction counter, the credit addition counter, the credit subtraction counter, the point count counter, and the credit counter at 200 ms intervals as CU as operation response data. Is transmitted to the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 30). The value of each counter changes depending on the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124. For example, when the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are rotationally driving the pseudo ball 124, the timing of transmitting the operation response data is reached. If so, the values of the respective counters at that time are transmitted, and at the time of transmission, the values of the point addition number counter, the point subtraction number counter, the credit addition number counter, and the credit subtraction number counter are cleared to 0 (hold The value of the point counter is not cleared to 0).

  Next, a specific example of the drive pattern in the pseudo ball unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13.

  FIG. 12 (a) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 of the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 during the holding point withdrawing operation, and FIG. 12 (b) is the signal φS1 when the wagon service is requested. 2 is a time chart showing the waveform of FIG. In FIG. 12A, when the player performs a holding point withdrawal operation, the payout control unit 31 supplies a driving pulse φP to the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121, and the rotating body 123 is rotated. When the tip of the pseudo ball 124 reaches the front of the optical sensor 131, the signal φS1 is raised from the “L” level to the “H” level, and when the rear end of the pseudo ball 124 passes the front of the optical sensor 131, the signal φS1 becomes “ The level is lowered from the "H" level to the "L" level. The payout control unit 31 determines that one pseudo ball 124 has passed when the rising edge and the falling edge of the signal φS1 are detected.

  The drive pattern corresponding to the holding point withdrawal operation is such that the rotating body 123 is rotated at a constant speed until a predetermined unit number M (for example, 5) of pseudo ball movements is detected, and then the rotating body 123 is temporarily stopped for a predetermined period T1. The drive pattern is such that the rotating body 123 is rotated until the pseudo balls of the predetermined unit number M are moved again until the number of withdrawal points (for example, the upper limit of 25) is reached.

  With reference to FIG. 12A, the payout control unit 31 cyclically moves the pseudo ball 124 at a predetermined speed in accordance with the subtraction request, counts the number of positive pulses appearing in the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131, and outputs the positive pulse. When the count number of has reached M, the circulatory movement of the pseudo ball 124 is temporarily stopped and waits for a fixed time T1. After that, the operation of circulatingly moving the pseudo balls 124 is repeated until the count number reaches M. In the present embodiment, since the number of credits given by one point withdrawal operation is 25 points, the above operation is repeated 5 times in total.

  FIG. 12B shows a drive pattern when the request for the wagon service is detected. The payout control unit 31 sets the subtraction target value to N (where N is a positive integer) according to the type of wagon service.

  After that, the payout control unit 31 cyclically moves the pseudo ball 124 at a rotation speed different from that at the time of the holding point withdrawal operation of FIG. 12A, and counts the number of positive pulses appearing in the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131, When the count number of the positive pulses reaches N, the circulation movement of the pseudo ball 124 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the rotational speed of the rotating body 123 during the holding point withdrawing operation is set to be faster than when the wagon service is requested, and the pseudo ball movement processing during the holding point withdrawing operation is performed. I am trying to finish it promptly. In this case, the pulse width of the positive pulse of the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 during the holding point withdrawing operation is smaller than that at the time of requesting the wagon service. When the cycle of the drive pulse φP is shortened, the rotation speed of the rotator 123 is increased, and when the cycle of the drive pulse φP is increased, the rotation speed of the rotator 123 is decreased. Further, when one positive pulse is detected, two or more predetermined points may be subtracted.

  As described above, the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 is visually recognized by differentiating the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 when subtracting the points, depending on whether the point is deducted or the wagon service is requested. Only by doing, it is possible to identify the factors for which the points are updated. Here, as a comparative example of the subtraction conditions, the case where the point deduction operation is performed and the case where the wagon service request is generated are illustrated. However, if the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 is different under each of the other subtraction conditions. It is desirable to control so that

  Further, it is desirable to control the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 in the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 to be different for each addition condition. Thereby, for example, only by observing the movement of the pseudo ball 124 in the addition pseudo ball unit 120, whether the score is added based on the replay of the stored medals, or the score is calculated based on the balance withdrawal setting. It is possible to specify whether they are being added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a description will be given of desirable control in the case where the conditions for updating the holding points are satisfied and other conditions for updating the holding points are satisfied while the pseudo ball 124 is being moved.

  For example, if a point withdrawal operation is performed while moving the dummy ball 124 based on the request for the wagon service, as shown in FIG. 13A, N points based on the request for the wagon service. The subtraction process of is continued. Then, when all the movements of the pseudo balls 124 based on the request of the wagon service are completed, after waiting for a predetermined time T2, the subtraction processing based on the operation of withdrawing the holding points is performed by the method shown in FIG. 12 (a). That is, the processing based on the request of the wagon service is prioritized over the processing based on the operation of deducting the points. This priority order may be reversed. That is, if the pseudo ball movement based on the request for the wagon service is not completed at the time when the operation for withdrawing the score is detected, the pseudo ball based on the request for the wagon service is subtracted after the subtraction processing based on the ball rental operation. The movement of 124 may be executed continuously.

  Further, when the wagon service is requested during the withdrawal of the points, as shown in FIG. 13B, the subtraction process based on the withdrawal operation of the points is immediately interrupted, and after waiting for a predetermined time T2, the wagon service is withdrawn. The addition processing of N points based on the request is performed. That is, when the subtraction process of N points is completed for the operation of deducting the points, the interrupted deduction process of the points is restarted after waiting for a predetermined time T2. As a result, the processing based on the request of the wagon service is prioritized over the processing based on the operation of deducting points. FIG. 13B shows a state in which the M-m points are subtracted during the initial holding point withdrawing operation, and the m points are subtracted during the holding point withdrawing operation after the restart. However, m is a positive integer smaller than M.

  In any case, in the present embodiment, when the two subtraction conditions are both satisfied, whether the process based on the satisfaction of one subtraction condition is executed or the process based on the satisfaction of the other subtraction condition is executed. There is one feature in that it is possible to distinguish whether or not they are doing. That is, in the example of FIGS. 13A and 13B, when switching between the pseudo ball movement based on the operation of withdrawing the holding point and the pseudo ball movement based on the request of the wagon service, by providing the pause period T2, respectively, It is possible to distinguish the pseudo ball movement based on the establishment of another subtraction condition.

In addition, here, as a comparative example of the subtraction condition, the case based on the operation of withdrawing the score and the case based on the request of the wagon service are illustrated, but other subtraction conditions are similarly based on the satisfaction of one condition. It is desirable to provide a pause period between the end of the pseudo ball movement and the start of the pseudo ball movement based on the satisfaction of the other condition. Further, it is desirable to control not only the subtraction condition but also the addition condition such as the replay setting of the stored medals.
<When pseudo ball units are provided on both CU and S units>
FIG. 14 is an example in which the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are provided on both the CU and the S unit. In such a configuration, when the factor for updating the holding point occurs on the CU side, the pseudo ball 124 is moved by the pseudo ball unit on the CU side, while the factor for updating the holding point is on the S stand side. When it occurs, it is conceivable to move the dummy ball 124 by the dummy ball unit on the S side.

  In that case, as compared with the case where the pseudo ball unit is provided only on the S side as shown in FIG. 7, the CU side is used for withdrawing the balance, replaying the stored medals, inserting the card in which the points are recorded, and credit settlement. The pseudo-ball unit for addition 120 is operated, and the pseudo-ball unit for subtraction 121 on the CU side is operated at the time of wagon service, split transfer of points, and withdrawal of points. Then, in these cases, the CU side can update the holding point display in response to the pseudo ball detection on the local side without waiting for the operation response from the S unit indicating the holding point update. Communication control for can be simplified. On the other hand, the S unit is the CU side when deducting the balance, replaying the stored medals, inserting the card with the recorded points, paying the credit, transferring the wagon, dividing the points, and deducting the points. The point display is updated after receiving the addition request p (points) and the subtraction request p (points) transmitted from the CU side based on the pseudo ball detection of.

  It should be noted that, on the S side, the addition pseudo ball unit 120 is driven when a prize is awarded in which a score exceeding the upper limit value of the credit number counter is given.

In the case of FIG. 14, when a factor for updating the holding point occurs on the CU side, the holding point is updated on the condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected by the pseudo ball unit on the CU side, while on the S side. When the factor for updating the score is generated, the score is updated on condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected by the pseudo ball unit on the S side, so that the display of the score is performed as in the configuration of FIG. Will be performed based on the detection of the pseudo ball.
<When the pseudo ball unit is provided only on the CU>
Alternatively, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 and the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121 may be provided only on the CU side and not on the S side. In the case of such a configuration, the CU, when a factor for updating the score occurs on the CU side, that is, a lending operation for withdrawing the balance of the card, a replay operation for saving medals, a card insertion in which the score is recorded, When an operation for requesting a wagon service, a point withdrawal operation, or a credit settlement operation occurs, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 or the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121 is operated according to the type of addition or subtraction. Then, the CU updates the storage of the number of points according to the detection / movement of the pseudo ball 124 and updates the point display of the display 312. Further, the operation instruction command of the addition request p (points) or the subtraction request p (points) is transmitted to the S units.

  Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the S units add and update the score counter in response to the addition request p (points) and subtract and update the score counter in response to the subtraction request p (points). In addition, the score display on the display unit 51 is updated according to the updated score counter value. However, the point addition counter and the point subtraction counter are not updated. This is because, on the CU side, when the addition request p (points) and the subtraction request p (points) are transmitted, the points are already updated accordingly.

  On the other hand, in the S unit, addition or subtraction is performed when a factor for updating the score occurs on the S unit side, for example, when a winning occurs in which a score exceeding the upper limit of the value of the credit number counter is given as an addition requirement. Depending on the type, the point addition counter or the point subtraction counter is added and updated. However, at this point, the score counter related to the score display is not updated. Subsequently, the S-units transmit to the CU an operation response (addition number, subtraction number) including the value of the point addition number counter or the point subtraction number counter that has been added and updated.

  In response to the operation response, the CU uses the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 when the number of points added is included, and the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction when the number of points subtracted is included. Are operated, and the memory of the number of points is added or subtracted according to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124, and the updated result is reflected on the display 312. Further, the CU sets an addition request p (points) or a subtraction request p (points) according to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124, and adds the request p (points) or the subtraction request p (points) with an operation command. Point) to S units. Upon receiving this, the S-series finally update the score-holding counter and reflect the update result on the display 51.

  By controlling as described above, even when the pseudo ball unit is provided only on the CU side, both the CU and the S units can update the score display on the condition that the pseudo ball is moved and detected. Will be possible.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control mode in which game history data is stored on each of the CU side and the S unit side. Note that the game history data is data indicating a history of a game state generated by a player playing a game on the S table 2S. For example, the number of starts (the number of times the reels are started, that is, the number of games), The number of times the big bonus is generated, the number of times the RT is generated, the number of starts from the previous big bonus to the present big bonus, the base value, etc. The game history data includes game history data for the entire S machine throughout the day and game history data for each player on the S machine. Then, as will be described later in detail, the former game history data is stored in the S machine game history data storage section provided on both the S machine side and the CU side, and the latter game history data is the S machine side and CU side. Both are stored in the current player game history data storage section provided in both or the S storage side backup storage section. In other words, the game history data of the S unit throughout the day and the game history data of each player in the S unit are stored in both the CU 3 and the S unit 2S.

  Referring to FIG. 15, various game data such as a big bonus is generated by the player playing a game on S stand 2S, and the game data is input to game history data management unit 291. The normal game data generated as a result of the player playing a game on S units is totaled by, for example, the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 31, and the totaled game history. The data is input to the display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board 90, and the game history data thereof is cumulatively stored in the S unit game history data storage unit. The S history game history data storage unit can store 10 days of game history data including today's game history data. The player operates the jog dial 59 and the chance button 58 to select the game history data of the day to be displayed, and the game history data of the selected day is displayed on the display unit 51. The communication between the display device effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display device effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the aforementioned game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323 via the CU communication control unit 80 of the CU 3, The normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 totalizes the game data. The aggregated game history data is stored in the S-unit game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. The S unit game history data storage unit on the CU3 side is configured to be able to store only the game history data of the day. When the player performs a touch operation on the display unit 312 configured by the touch panel to display the S-unit game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is displayed. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the current day stored in the S history game history data storage unit is displayed by the display 312.

  On the other hand, the CU 3 is configured so that the game history data of the other S units 2S installed in the game hall can also be displayed by the display 312. Specifically, the player touches the operation button icon of the other S unit information display displayed on the display 312, and the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other S device information is displayed. Due to the function of the processing unit, another S unit game history data request notification is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other S unit 2S via the other CU 3, and returns the received other S unit game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the returned other S machine game history data by the other S machine information processing unit and processes the other S machine game history data on the other S machine game in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the history data storage unit. Then, the stored other S machine game history data is displayed on the display 312.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to collect the game history data for each player who has played a game on the S table 2S and display the game history data for each player on the display devices 51 and 312. In order to collect the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the players who are playing the game on the S table 2S. As the player identification information for distinguishing the player, the C-ID (card ID) stored in the member card possessed by the player who is a member is used. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in the cards and that identifies the cards. The membership card is issued to a player who has become a member at the game hall, and there is a one-to-one correspondence relationship between the membership card and the membership card. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the membership card can identify not only the membership card, but also the membership player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the membership card functions as player identification information for identifying the player.

  As will be described later in detail, when a player who is a member inserts a membership card into the CU 3, the C-ID stored in the inserted membership card is read and the C-ID is stored in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the S unit 2S, and in the S unit 2S, the received C-ID is transmitted from the game history data management unit 291 to the display production control unit 292 to display the display production. It is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the control unit 292.

  In this state, when the player plays the game on the S table 2S, the game history data from the time when the C-ID is stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed by the current player of the display effect control unit 292. It is cumulatively stored in the game history data storage unit. Then, if the player operates the jog dial 59 and the chance button 58 to display his / her game history data, the game history a stored in the current player's game history data storage unit is displayed. 51 is displayed. Also, in the game history data management unit 391, the normal mode processing unit totals the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the S table 2S, and C is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. The game history data accumulated by the normal mode processing unit from the stage of storing A as the ID is cumulatively stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, when the player performs a touch operation on the display unit 312 including a touch panel to display his or her own game history data, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391. Controls to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage section of the data storage section 392 on the display 312.

  As described above, the game history data on the S machine throughout the day and the game history data aggregated for each player on the S machine are displayed by the display switching operation on both the S machine side and the CU side. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  If the player playing the game on the S table 2S presses the return button 322 to return the inserted membership card, the membership card is ejected from the CU 3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 erases the C-ID and the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if the display 312 is operated to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit, the game history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, when the membership card is ejected from the CU 3, the CU sends a card return notification to the S stand 2S, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the card return notification returns the card to the display effect control unit 292. Send a notification. The display effect control unit 292 having received it stores the A as the C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a in the backup data storage unit, and the current player game. The C-ID and the game history data in the history data storage unit are deleted. As a result, even if the operation for displaying the game history data a on the display device 51 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display device 51.

  The return button 322 is normally operated when the game by the S table 2S is ended, but the player temporarily interrupts the game, finishes the small use, and returns to the S table 2S which was playing the game again to play the game. It may restart. In such a case, normally, after performing the game interruption operation described later, the card is ejected, the player brings the card, and the player finishes the small use, and returns to the same S stand 2S again and the card is sent to the CU 3. Although it is inserted, the player may push the return button 322 to remove the card and leave the S table 2S without performing such a game interruption operation.

  In such a case, if the same player who has left the S table 2S without another player playing the game returns to the S table 2S and inserts the membership card into the CU 3 again, he / she leaves the seat. It is desirable to take over the game history data of the previous player, add and update the game history data after the restart of the game to the game history data, and cumulatively store it. In order to realize this, the C-ID and the game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the above-mentioned display effect control unit 292. Then, when the player who returns to the S stand 2S inserts the membership card into the CU 3, the card information of the membership card is read and the insertion card information including the C-ID of the membership card is transferred from the CU 3 to the S stand 2S. Sent. On the S stand 2S, the game history data management unit 291 receives the C-ID included in the inserted card information, and transmits the received C-ID to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 compares the transmitted C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit to determine whether or not they match. If they match, it is determined that the same player as the player who left the seat has restarted the game again, and A as the C-ID and a as the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit are used as the current game. The player game history data storage unit is restored and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the stored data in the backup data storage unit is deleted. The game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and is taken over, and the game history data generated thereafter by the player playing the game on the S table 2S. Is cumulatively stored by adding and updating the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the C-ID included in the inserted card information transmitted from the CU 3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit do not match, the backup data A as the C-ID and a as the game history data stored in the storage unit are deleted.

  As a modified example, the following control may be performed after the communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the display effect control unit 292 is bidirectional communication.

  The comparison result of the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the display effect control unit 292 and the C-ID transmitted from the CU3, and the determination result of whether or not both match, the display effect control unit It is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 of CU3 via 292 and the game history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, when the transmitted C-ID determination result is a determination result indicating that the C-ID determination results are the same, the C-ID determined to be the same is used as the current player game history of the data storage unit 392. The data is stored in the data storage unit. When the C-ID determination results are the same, the C-ID determination result also includes the game history data a. The game history data management unit 391 having received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. After that, when the player plays a game on the S table 2S, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is collected by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the collected game history data is collected. Is cumulatively stored by being added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit. In this state, if the player performs a touch operation on the display 312 to display his or her own game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage section is displayed as described above. Displayed by the device 312.

  Note that the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 may be controlled so as to delete the stored backup data when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a trial hit mode (test mode) processing function is provided. The trial hit mode is a mode in which a game machine maker performs a shipping inspection at the time of manufacturing the game machine and an operation check at the time of installing the game machine at the game hall. If a staff member of the game arcade inserts a test card for the trial hit mode into the CU 3, the card information of the test card is read, and the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 performs processing for shifting to the trial hit mode. . Specifically, the trial hit mode notification is transmitted to the S stand 2S, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the trial hit mode notification transmits the trial hit mode notification to the display effect control unit 292 by the function of the trial hit mode processing unit. . In the display effect control unit 292 that has received it, the game history data based on the game data that occurs thereafter is stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit. The trial hitting game history data storage unit is configured in a storage area different from the above S game history data storage unit, the current player game history data storage unit and the backup data storage unit. The game history data in the trial hit mode is stored in the section.

  Then, the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage section is displayed by the display 51.

  In the CU 3 as well, by the operation of the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the S unit 2S is aggregated, and the aggregated game history data is in the trial hit mode. Is displayed by the display device 312 as the game history data.

  On the display 312, operation button icons such as a re-count button are also displayed. If you want to display the game history data in the trial hit mode again after totalizing the game history data in the trial hit mode, Touch the recount button icon. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data management unit 391 sends a re-counting notification to the game history data management unit 291 of the S unit 2S. Receiving it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recount command to the display device effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 that has received it once erases the game history data stored in the trial game history data storage unit, and then newly stores the game data based on the game data that has occurred thereafter. The control for storing in the section is performed. Then, the game data in the trial hit game history data storage section, which has been added up, is displayed by the display device 51. On the other hand, also on the CU3 side, the trial hit mode processing unit causes the game history to be based on the game data transmitted from the S stand 2S after the detection signal of the touch operation of the icon of the recount button is input to the game history data management unit 391. The trial hit mode game history data, which is obtained by collecting the data and re-counting the data, is displayed by the display device 312.

  It should be noted that the S-unit sends a re-counting command to the game history data management unit 391 based on the reception of the wireless signal (re-counting command signal) output from the remote controller, and notifies the re-counting from the game history data management unit 391. May be transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the S unit 2S. Alternatively, a recount command may be sent to the game history data management unit 391 based on the detection of the opening of the front doors of S units. In the case of such a modification, the icon of the recount button may be displayed together, and the icon of the recount button may be omitted.

  Then, by pressing the return button 322 and ejecting the test card received in the CU 3, a card return notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the S machine 2S, and the card return notice is received. The game history data management unit 291 transmits a card return notification to the display effect control unit 292, and the display effect control unit 292 that receives the notification deletes the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit.

  When there are no more points in the trial hit mode, the point addition command is sent from the CU side to the S units to add points to enable the game. It should be noted that when the points are exhausted during the trial hit mode, the points may be automatically added on the S side without sending the point addition command from the CU side to the S side to enable the game. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding points on the S side, it is allowed to continue setting the number of bets even if the points become 0, and control is performed so that the game can be continued. You may.

  Similarly, in the case of P units, which will be described later, when the number of game balls is exhausted during the trial hit mode, the game ball number addition command is sent from the CU side to the P units to add the number of game balls to enable the game.

  A RAM clear switch 293 is provided on the S stand 2S. When the RAM clear switch 293 is operated, the RAM clear switch 293 outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control board 116 and the payout controller 31 to clear the stored data in the RAM. If the RAM clear output signal is input to the game history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is While being erased, the oldest stored data of the stored data for 10 days in this S game history data storage unit is erased, and the stored data for the remaining 9 days is shifted one by one to the storage area of the old days. Remembered. As a result, the newest storage area (same-day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data will be stored in this empty area (current day storage area). In addition, according to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data of the newest day of the S machine game history data storage unit (game history data before shifting to the old day) is the display production control unit 292, game history. The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391, and the hall management computer 1 may be controlled so that the data is backed up and stored.

  Further, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear processing unit 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification causes the data storage unit 392 Control is performed to erase the game history data stored in the table game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the P unit game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared).

  While the card is held in the CU 3, the game history data is not cleared even if the RAM clear signal is output based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 293.

  Further, the S unit may output the RAM clear signal to the main control board 116 or the payout control unit 31 based on receiving the wireless signal (RAM clear command signal) output from the remote controller. Alternatively, a clear switch is provided on the CU side, and when the operation of the clear switch is detected by the CU, a RAM clear signal is transmitted from the CU to the S unit, and the S unit sends the RAM clear signal. The RAM clear signal may be output to the main control board 116 or the payout control unit 31 based on the reception. In these cases, the RAM clear switch 293 may or may not be additionally provided.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the control circuits of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 and the contents of the stored authentication information. Referring to FIG. 16, the main control unit 323 functions as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 805 as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 804 storing control programs and data, and a work area of the CPU 805. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 806, an I / O port 807, and an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable PROM) 808 are provided.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 is also provided with a CPU 810 serving as a control center, a ROM 809 storing programs and data for control, a RAM 811 functioning as a work area of the CPU 810, an I / O port 812, and an EEPROM 813. .

  The main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 communicate with each other through the I / O ports 807 and 812. Although not shown in FIG. 16, the I / O port 807 is also communicatively connected to the I / O port of the upper server 801. The I / O port 812 is also communicatively connected to the I / O port of the S-unit communication control unit 81.

  Then, in the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID (unique ID) of the CU communication control unit is stored. The SID of this CU communication control unit is also called an IC serial ID. There are two types of mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80: authentication using this SID and authentication using an authentication key (common key) described later. As will be described later in detail, in the authentication using the SID, mutual own SID and the other party's SID are stored, and it is determined by a challenge response method described later whether or not the other party stores the correct SID. It is a thing. The authentication using this SID includes BB serial ID authentication and CU communication control unit serial ID authentication, as will be described later, and these are collectively referred to as serial ID authentication. Further, as will be described later, in the authentication using the authentication key, the authentication keys which are the common keys are stored in advance, and it is verified whether or not the stored authentication keys match each other. Authentication.

  As described above, the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 at the chip manufacturing stage. Therefore, the main control unit 323 also needs to store both its own SID and the SID of the other party, that is, the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80.

  Then, in the manufacturing stage of the CU 3, the SID and the authentication key (common key) of the main control unit are written in the EEPROM 813 and the SID of the main control unit are written in the EEPROM 808 by the ROM writer or the like. The SID of this main control unit is also called a BB serial ID.

  In the case of mutual authentication by SID, it is necessary to store the SID of the other party and the SID of each other, and also in the case of mutual authentication using an authentication key consisting of a common key, the common authentication key is stored. I need to put it. However, when the CU is manufactured, the SID and the authentication key of the CU communication control unit are not stored in the main control unit 323. The SID and the authentication key of the CU communication control unit are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a notification process when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 17, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, S-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 31, or main control board 116, it is indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification will be given. The abnormality referred to here is that the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the S-unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 31, or the main control board 116 is replaced with another improperly manufactured one, noise, or the like. It includes a malfunction or a failure due to, or an offline state due to a disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 17 is a key management server that stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 116.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, as a result of the above-mentioned mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 detects the abnormality. Detect. In this mutual authentication, in addition to the serial ID authentication and device authentication described above, device authentication using a session key described later (see FIG. 34) is also included. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the upper server 801 of that fact and also transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. The display control unit 797 is caused to control the display 312 to indicate that an abnormality has occurred, and an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinks to notify the abnormality. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit 324 to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the S-unit communication control unit 81. When the S-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it notifies the payout control unit 31 of that fact, and the payout control unit 31 further notifies the main control board 116 of that fact. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 116 outputs a signal for turning on or blinking an abnormality notification lamp provided on the film plate or the like, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1. To send.

  When an abnormality occurs by the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and outputs a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that to the S unit communication control unit. Notify 81. In response to this, the S-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 31 that an abnormality has occurred. Upon receipt of this, the payout control unit 31 notifies the main control board 116 that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the above, the main control board 116 controls the operation of the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the S-unit communication control unit 81, it notifies the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 notifies the upper server 801 to that effect.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the S-unit communication control unit 81 of that fact. Is notified to the main control unit 323, and the notification destination of the abnormality occurrence by the CU communication control unit 80 is different. The reason is that even if the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred is notified that the abnormality has occurred, the control for notifying the abnormality is not performed at all, and it is not a measure for preventing the abnormality. Moreover, the CU communication control unit 80 has the function of communication control but does not have the function of abnormality notification control. Therefore, the control of the abnormality notification cannot be performed by itself, and accordingly, the notification that the abnormality has occurred is always made in the direction of the control unit on the side opposite to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred. Upon receiving the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80, the S-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 31 of that fact, and the payout control unit 31 notifies the main control board 116 that the abnormality has occurred. Notify to. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 116 performs the same abnormality notification control as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the S-unit communication control unit 81, the fact is detected by the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality, and the main control unit 323 notifies the abnormality notification described above. The control is performed and the upper server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. When an abnormality occurs in the S-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 31, the fact that the payout control unit 31 has occurred is detected, and the fact that the abnormality has occurred is detected. Notify the control board 116. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 116 performs the above-described control for reporting the abnormality occurrence.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 31, the main control board 116 detects the abnormality and performs the above-described abnormality occurrence notification control. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 31 and no abnormality occurs in the S-unit communication control unit 81, the S-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality, and CU communication that the abnormality has occurred is communicated. Notify the control unit 80. Upon receiving the notification, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the above-described control for notification of abnormality occurrence and notifies the upper-level server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both the S-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 31, the main control board 116 detects the abnormality occurrence and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects the abnormality.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 116, the payout control unit 31 detects the abnormality and notifies the S-unit communication control unit 81 of the occurrence of the abnormality. Upon receiving the notification, the S-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 of the occurrence of the abnormality, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the notification and notifies the main control unit 323 of the occurrence of the abnormality. . In response to this, the main control unit 323 controls the above-mentioned abnormality occurrence notification and notifies the upper-level server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, the LSI 117 detects when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 and notifies the main control board 116 of the abnormality, and detects when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 116. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the CU communication control unit 80 described above, this LSI 117 does not perform the control for the abnormality notification even if it notifies the control unit having the abnormality when it detects that the abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the control unit or control board on the side opposite to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred is notified. It should be noted that the CU communication control unit 80 and the LSI 117 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and do not have a function of controlling the abnormality notification by itself even if an abnormality is detected. .

  In the control of FIGS. 7 to 17 described above, the S machine is shown as an example of the game machine, but an example of the game machine may be a pachinko machine (P machine) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the slot machine will be described.

  FIG. 18 shows the transmission direction, the name of the transmission information, and its outline. The data in the transmission direction from CU to S units is a command, and the data in the transmission direction from S units to CU is a response.

  A recovery request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The recovery request command requests the S units to send the recovery information.

  The response of the recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to send the recovery information held in S units to the CU.

  A communication start request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This communication start request requests the S units to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time).

  A communication start response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This operation instruction is to instruct the S machine to perform a game operation and request transmission of game machine information such as points.

  An operation response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This operation response notifies the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and also notifies the gaming table information such as the score.

  A communication disconnection request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This communication disconnection request requests the S units to disconnect the communication connection.

  A communication disconnection response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This communication disconnection response notifies the CU that the communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A communication test request is sent from the CU to the S unit. This communication test request notifies the S stations of the communication data.

  A communication test response is sent from the S units to the CU. This communication test response is a response of communication data to the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, an outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. 19 and 20, the transmission direction, the name of the transmission information, and the outline thereof are shown. The transmission direction is a command from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the transmission direction is data from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of a BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request will be described later in detail. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is an exception rather than being transmitted up to S units.

  The CU communication control unit transmits a BB serial ID authentication response 1 notifying the BB serial ID authentication information to the main control unit. The details of the content of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  The second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting IC serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  The CU communication control unit transmits an IC serial ID authentication response 1 notifying the IC serial ID authentication information to the main control unit. The details of the content of this response will also be described later. It should be noted that this command is exceptional, not transmitted up to S units.

  A second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (device authentication request 1) requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication keys (common keys) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit are the same key, and will be described in detail later. It should be noted that this command is exceptional, not transmitted up to S units.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. It should be noted that this response is exceptional, not transmitted from the S units.

  A command (device authentication request 2) requesting the second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The device authentication requests 1 and 2 and the device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 described later.

  Counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A counter information notification response for notifying the counter information notification result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described based on FIG. 35 described later.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main controller to the CU communication controller.

  A writer management information response for notifying the writer management information is transmitted from the CU communication controller to the main controller.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described based on FIG. 35 described later. The data included in the writer management information response is a command code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, and the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but the authentication key update request is transmitted.

  The data included in the authentication key update request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping maker code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key that is an H-MAC key, and a MAC. include.

  An authentication key update response for notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  The CU communication control unit transmits to the main control unit a response (time response), which is a notification that the time notification command has been received.

  A command (S unit communication control unit authentication request) requesting authentication with the S unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the S-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the S-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit, which is the result of the mutual authentication. It should be noted that this command is exceptional, not transmitted up to S units.

  The CU communication control unit transmits a response (S unit communication control unit authentication response) notifying the result of authentication with the S unit communication control unit to the main control unit. It should be noted that this response is exceptional, not transmitted from the S units. The CU communication control unit 80 acquires information such as the chip ID of the main control board 116 and the LSI 117, and then returns the authentication result to the main control unit 323.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response for notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command that requests whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. It should be noted that this command is exceptional, not transmitted up to S units.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying the communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response in which the CU communication control unit determines whether or not the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and returns the determination result to the main control unit. It should be noted that this response is exceptional, not transmitted from the S units.

  A command (S unit communication control unit re-authentication request) requesting re-authentication with the S unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the S-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the S-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit, which is the result of the mutual authentication. It should be noted that this command is exceptional, not transmitted up to S units.

  A response (S-unit communication control unit re-authentication response) for notifying a response of the S-unit communication control unit re-authentication request message is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit performs the authentication between the S-unit communication control units again, and the main control unit receives the S-unit communication control unit re-authentication response to acquire the authentication result. It should be noted that this response is exceptional, not transmitted from the S units.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A that requests BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described later in detail. This command is an exception rather than being transmitted up to S units.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A that notifies the authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The details of the content of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B requesting authentication of a BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is an exception rather than being transmitted up to S units.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B and the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG. The device authentication requests A and B and the device authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A command (device authentication request A) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication keys (common keys) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit are the same key, and will be described in detail later. It should be noted that this command is exceptional, not transmitted up to S units.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. It should be noted that this response is exceptional, not transmitted from the S units.

  A command for requesting device authentication (device authentication request B) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication keys (common keys) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit are the same key, and will be described in detail later. It should be noted that this command is exceptional, not transmitted up to S units.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. It should be noted that this response is exceptional, not transmitted from the S units.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of the authentication key setting information, and the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) (the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 of FIG. 17). ) Is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping maker code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and an encryption key. The padding character (random number) and MAC. Except for the command code, the code information is encrypted using the ECB block cipher mode and encrypted using the BB serial ID as an encryption key and transmitted.

  An authentication key setting response that notifies the authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. The information included in the authentication key setting response includes the command code, the command size, the update result, the encryption padding character (random number), and the MAC. Except for the command code, the block cipher mode of the ECB is used to encrypt and transmit using the BB serial ID as an encryption key.

  Next, based on FIGS. 21 to 29, among the commands / responses shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, particularly the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, the operation response, the communication state response, and the device information response will be described. The contents will be described in detail.

  First, the recovery response will be described with reference to FIG. The response of this recovery response is to send the recovery information (recovery data) held in S units to the CU. This "recovery information" is the data stored in backup for the S unit to send as a recovery response to the CU when the CU sends a recovery request command to the S unit along with the execution of the recovery process. That is. As the recovery information transmitted from the S unit to the CU, as shown in FIG. 21, the connection time, the final sequence number, the C-ID, the previous holding point related information and the current holding point related information, the previous credit related information and the current credit. This is related information.

  The column of “encryption” shown in FIG. 21 and subsequent figures is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted, and the x mark indicates that it is not encrypted, and the o mark indicates that it is encrypted. The key used for this encryption is a session key (also called a message key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is the connection time backed up by S units (connection time data received from the CU at the start of communication). The final sequence number is the sequence number received from the CU and backed up by S units. The C-ID is the C-ID backed up by S units.

  The last-time point-related information is the previously-notified point-related information, which is the previous addition number p that is the previously notified addition number, the previous subtraction number p that is the previously notified subtraction number, and the previously notified external output information. It is each information of a certain external output information.

  The current point-related information is the latest point-related information, and is the current number of points, which is the number of points currently held in S units, and the current number of additions p, which is the number of additions currently held in S units. , The current subtraction number p, which is the subtraction number currently held in S units, and the external output information, which is currently held in S units.

  The previous credit related information is the credit related information notified last time, and is the previous addition number c which is the addition number notified last time, the previous subtraction number c which is the subtraction number notified last time, and the external output information notified last time. It is each information of the external output information.

  The current credit-related information is the latest credit-related information, and is the current credit number that is the number of credits currently held in S units, the current addition number c that is the number of additions currently held in S units, and the current credit number. The current subtraction number c, which is the number of subtractions held in S units, and the external output information currently held in S units.

  Information marked with * in FIG. 21 is data to be backed up by S units, and ALL0 is set at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite.

  FIG. 26 shows the meanings and confirmation points of various data in (Note 1) shown in FIG. The meanings of the various numbers and the contents of the fixed points are as shown in FIG. 26, but a supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The number of points is the number of points held by S units. Although it cannot be used directly for games, it can be used on gaming machines by deducting points from it into credits. It is also recorded so that it can be specified by a card at the time of payment. The points can be used for the above-mentioned credit conversion and wagon service. It should be noted that the CU checks whether the number of points on the S units and the number of points after the CU have been corrected match, and if they do not match, the CU sends a communication disconnection request command to the S units to disconnect the communication. Along with the state, the game of S units is stopped (see FIG. 62 and the like). Then, the CU executes the recovery process and transmits the communication start request to the S units (see FIG. 43), and then transmits the holding point correction request to the S units according to the data correction request included in the command of the communication start request. Transmission is performed, and processing for correcting the number of S points is corrected to the number of points after correction on the CU side.

  The addition number p indicates the number to be added to the points (including the “addition request number p” transmitted from the CU). Further, when the "addition request number p" is transmitted from the CU, the number of holding points corresponding to the "addition request number p" is added to the addition number p after the pseudo ball is moved and detected. After transmitting the “addition request number p” to the S units, when the CU receives the “addition number p” updated based on the “addition request number p” from the S units, the CU sets the “addition number p”. Add the corresponding points to the current points. However, the CU does not add points when it receives this data without holding the card.

  The subtraction number p indicates the number of points to be subtracted from the number of points. Further, when the "subtraction request number p" is transmitted from the CU, the number of holding points corresponding to the "subtraction request number p" is added to the subtraction number after the pseudo ball 124 is moved and detected. After transmitting the “subtraction request number p” to the S units, the CU sets the “subtraction number p” when receiving the “subtraction number p” updated based on the “subtraction request number p” from the S units. Subtract the corresponding points from the current points. However, the CU does not subtract the score when it receives this data without holding the card, and the CU does not subtract it when the score it holds is 0. .

  The number of credits is the number of credits held by S units. Credits are deducted from points and changed. It is used to set the number of bets on the gaming machine. On the other hand, it cannot be used for wagon services. When the number of credits becomes "0", the game of S units is prohibited.

  The CU corrects the credit number held by the CU by using the “addition number c” and “subtraction number c” described later, and then checks whether the credit numbers of S units and the CU credit number match. In the case of disagreement, the CU transmits a game stop to the S units.

  The addition number c indicates the number to be added to the credit (including the “addition request number c” transmitted from the CU). When the “addition request number c” is transmitted from the CU, the number of credits corresponding to the “addition request number c” is added to the addition number c. After transmitting the “addition request number c” to the S units, the CU sets the “addition number c” when receiving the “addition number c” updated based on the “addition request number c” from the S units. Add the corresponding points to your current credits. However, the CU does not add the number of credits when it receives this data without holding the card.

  The subtraction number c indicates the number of credits to be subtracted from the credits by setting the number of bets. The subtraction number c includes the “addition request number c” transmitted from the CU. That is, when the "subtraction request number c" is transmitted from the CU, the number of credits corresponding to the "subtraction request number c" is added to the subtraction number c. After transmitting the “subtraction request number c” to the S units, the CU sets the “subtraction number c” when receiving the “subtraction number c” updated based on the “subtraction request number c” from the S units. Subtract the corresponding points from the current credits. However, the CU does not subtract the credit number when receiving this data without holding the card, and does not subtract the credit number when the CU itself holds 0. .

  The external output information is information indicating various game states and the like. The S units back up all the external output information notified to the CU as the previous external output information and clear the current external output information to zero. There are a plurality of types of external output information shown in FIG.

  The bet number setting information is information indicating the bet number set in one game. The reel start information is information indicating that the reel has started to rotate. The start operation information is information indicating that a start operation for starting the rotation of the reel has been performed after the bet number has been set. The internal winning situation information is information indicating a winning result (including a miss) of a winning combination such as a big bonus, a bonus, a small winning combination (by type), and a replay. In this slot machine, for example, a random number value is extracted at the timing when the start operation is detected to determine whether or not to win, and at this timing, the internal win status information is transmitted from the S units to the CU.

  The first to third stop operation information are information indicating that the first stop operation has been performed, the second stop operation has been performed, and the third stop operation has been performed for the reel. It is output at the timing when the operation is detected. The first to third stop information is information indicating that the reel is in the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop, respectively. The result confirmation information is information indicating that all reels have stopped and the result thereof (missing or winning combination type). The CU receives these external output information from the S units and stores it.

  Next, referring to FIG. 22, the communication start request command requests the S units to correct the points and the sequence number and back up the new communication ID (communication start time).

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 22, specific data of the communication start request includes a connection time, a data correction request, a sequence number, score data, and credit data. The connection time is the time when the communication between the CU and the S units is started, is held by the CU, and is transmitted from the CU to the S units. Then, this connection time is used as a connection ID for communication.

  In the data correction request, the CU requests the S units to correct the data, and is composed of 3 bits of Bit0 to Bit2. Bit0 is a bit for designating the presence / absence of a clear request. When "0", no clear request is given, and when "1", a clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, hold it on the S side such as “Points”, “Sequence Number”, “Number of Points Added”, “Number of Points Added”, “Number of Credits Added”, “Number of Credits Reduced”, “External Output Information”, etc. A request to clear the existing backup data to 0 is issued to the S units.

  Bit1 is a bit that designates whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is "0", there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is "1", there is a sequence number correction request.

  Bit2 is a bit for designating the presence / absence of a point / credit correction request. When "0", a point / credit correction request is present, and when "1", no point / credit correction request is designated. Bits 3-7 are spares.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 30 and subsequent figures, when the bit designating the presence / absence of a request is “0”, it is expressed that there is no request, and when it is “1”, it is expressed that there is a request. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request exists” and when it is “0”, “clear request not exist”. Also, as shown in parentheses in the column of data correction request, “clear request” is “recovery clear”, “sequence number correction request” is “SQN correction”, and “score / credit correction request” is “hold”. "Point / credit correction".

  The sequence number (also called SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The score is the score stored in the CU. Credit is the number of credits stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and the "main chip ID" and the "payout chip ID" at the time of transmitting the command of the communication start request.

Upon receiving this communication start request, the S units perform the following processing.
When the clear request is ON, the number of points, the number of credits, the sequence number, the number of points added, the number of points subtracted, the number of credits added, the number of credits subtracted, the external output information, etc. Clear the backup data held by.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held in S units.

  When the score correction request is ON, the score and the credit held in S units are overwritten on the notified score and the credit.

Back up the connection time.
It should be noted that the respective processes performed on the above S units are sequentially executed from the top.

  Next, the operation instruction command shown in FIG. 23 is “addition of points”, “subtraction of points”, “addition of credits”, “subtraction of credits”, “game permission / prohibition” for the S units. , "Clear points / credits and sequence number" operation is instructed, and transmission of various game machine information is requested. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of S units.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the data included in the operation instruction command includes “operation request”, “CU status”, “point addition request number”, “point subtraction request number”, “credit addition request number”, It includes "number of credit deduction requests", "request type", and "card balance".

  As an operation request, 8-bit data of Bit0 to Bit7 is transmitted from the CU to the S units. Regarding Bit 0, the point addition request p is instructed when it is “1”, and the point addition request p is not instructed when it is “0”. Regarding Bit 1, when the score is “1”, the score reduction request p is instructed, and when it is “0”, the score subtraction request p is absent. Regarding Bit2, a game permission request is instructed when it is “1”, and a game permission request is not instructed when it is “0”.

  Regarding Bit3, when "1", a game prohibition request is instructed, and when "0", a game prohibition request is absent. Regarding Bit4, the request for clearing the score and the sequence number is instructed when it is “1”, and the request for clearing the score and the sequence number is not instructed when it is “0”.

  For the S machines, it is determined whether or not the game can be started by comprehensively looking at the "game permission / game prohibition" set by the CU, the remaining number of points held by the S machines, the error status of the S machines, and the like. The opportunity for the S machines to change the setting value of the game permission is when the game permission request is received from the CU. Moreover, the trigger for the S-unit to change the setting value of the game prohibition is when the game prohibition request is received from the CU, when the communication disconnection is detected, or when the S-unit power is activated.

Bit5 is used for a front door opening request (front door opening request).
Regarding Bit 6, when the value is “1”, the request for adding the credit number p is instructed, and when the value is “0”, the request for not adding the credit number p is instructed. Regarding Bit 7, when the value is “1”, the request for the credit number subtraction p is instructed, and when it is “0”, the request for the credit number subtraction p is not instructed.

  When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit7 are "1", the S units sequentially execute from Bit0.

  Also, the data of the addition request number p, which is valid only when Bit 0 of the operation request is “1”, is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The data of the addition request number p shows the value to be added to the score.

  Data of the subtraction request number p, which is valid only when Bit1 of the operation request is “1”, is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The data of the subtraction request number p indicates a value to be subtracted from the score.

  Further, the data of the addition request number c that is valid only when Bit 6 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The data of the addition request number c indicates a value to be added to the credit number.

  Data of the subtraction request number p, which is valid only when Bit 7 of the operation request is “1”, is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The data of the subtraction request number p indicates a value to be subtracted from the credit number.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 24A, with respect to each bit of the operation request of the operation instruction command, in particular, the trigger for the CU to transmit the data and the operation of the S units receiving the data will be described in detail. To do.

  First, the CU sends the “pointing point addition request” data of Bit0 when the prepaid balance is consumed (when the lending operation is detected), when the operation of replaying the stored medals is detected (when the replay operation is detected). ), When the card with the points recorded is inserted into the card unit. Receiving this, the S units add the value of the number of addition requests designated by the received data to the holding points that they themselves hold.

  The trigger for the CU to send the "Points deduction request" data of Bit1 is when the operation of subtracting points by the wagon service is detected, or the point division transfer to give the points to other players. It is when the operation is detected. Upon receiving this, the S unit subtracts the value of the subtraction request number indicated by the received data from the holding point it holds.

The addition and subtraction of the holding points are performed on condition that the pseudo balls 124 are moved and detected on the S side.
The trigger for the CU to transmit the "game permission request" data of Bit2 is the timing of switching from the game prohibition to the game permission. Upon receiving this, the S console permits the game by the player. Specifically, the betting operation is permitted.

  The trigger for the CU to transmit the “game prohibition request” data of Bit3 is the timing of switching from the game permit to the game prohibition. Upon receiving this, the S unit prohibits the game by the player. Specifically, the betting operation is prohibited.

  The timing at which the CU transmits the “Request to clear score and sequence number clear” data of Bit4 is the timing of returning the card. Upon receiving this, the S unit clears the holding points and sequence number it holds to zero.

  The CU transmits the "front door open request" data of Bit5 when the front door open request is detected. Upon receiving this, the S machines enter the game prohibited state by prohibiting the betting operation, and then release the locked state of the front door after a predetermined wait time has elapsed.

  First, the trigger for the CU to transmit the “credit amount addition request” data of Bit6 is when the points are consumed (when the credit button operation is detected). Upon receiving this, the S units add the value of the addition request number instructed by the received data to the credit held by themselves.

  The trigger for the CU to transmit the “credit amount subtraction request” data of Bit7 is when the credit is settled (credit settlement button operation). Receiving this, the S unit subtracts the value of the subtraction request number indicated by the received data from the credit held by itself.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the “CU state” of the operation instruction command will be described. The "CU status" data of the operation instruction command is composed of 8 Bits of Bit0 to Bit7. As shown in FIG. 23, Bit0 to Bit7 are, respectively, “holding card”, “during card insertion process”, “displaying points added”, “displaying points subtracted”, “displaying credits added”, Corresponds to "during credit subtraction display", "during clear display", and "during trial hit mode".

  Here, the data of these “CU states” will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, Bit0 indicates whether or not a card is held on the CU side. When 1 is 1, the card is being held, and when 0, the card is not being held. Bit1 indicates whether or not during the card insertion process (reading card information, verification, etc.) from the insertion of the card on the CU side until the balance is fixed, when 1 is during the card insertion process, when 0 Indicates that the card is not being inserted. Bit2 indicates whether or not the point addition display for adding and updating the point is being performed on the CU side, and when 1 is displayed, the point addition is displayed, and when it is 0, other than the point addition display. Bit3 indicates whether or not the point subtraction display for subtracting and updating the point on the CU side is in progress, and when 1 is displayed, the point subtraction is displayed, and when it is 0, it is other than the point subtraction display. Bit4 indicates whether or not the score and the sequence number are being clear-displayed on the CU side, and is 1 when clear display is being performed and when 0 is not clear display.

  Next, Bit5 indicates whether or not in the trial hit mode, and when Bit5 is "1", it indicates that the trial hit mode is in progress. The CU ignores the data of the number of additions and the number of subtractions notified from the S unit during the trial hit mode, and when it detects that the holding point on the S unit has become 0, the CU holds it. Add points automatically.

  Bit6 indicates whether or not the credit addition display for adding and updating the credit is being performed on the CU side. When 1 is displayed, the credit addition display is performed, and when 0, the credit addition display is not performed. Bit7 indicates whether or not the credit subtraction display for subtracting and updating the credit is being performed on the CU side, and indicates 1 when the credit subtraction display is on, and 0 indicates other than the credit subtraction display.

  The CU state is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7, but may be composed of 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15 so that the following information can be transmitted by each bit.

Bit0: 1 = during card insertion processing Bit1: 1 = draining cash processing Bit2: 1 = holding general card (visitor card) Bit3: 1 = holding membership card Bit4: 1 = holding test card Bit7 to 5: spare Bit8 : 1 = Prepaid loan is being displayed Bit9: 1 = Replay loan is being displayed Bit10: 1 = Saving medals divided display (Saving medals shared display)
Bit11: 1 = Wagon service is being displayed Bit12: 1 = Clear is being displayed Bit13: 1 = Breaking Bit15 to 14: Spare Note that these CU state data are provided for display control on the S side. Whether or not the display control is performed using the above data is left to the specifications on the S side. In the present embodiment, a slot machine that performs display control based on these data is assumed, but the display control is not essential.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the “number of points addition request” of the operation instruction command will be described. The “number of required points addition request” data indicates a value to be added to the number of points. This data is valid only when Bit 0 = 1 of the "operation request". Next, the “number of points subtraction request number” data of the operation instruction command indicates a value to be subtracted from the points. This data is valid only when Bit1 = 1 of the "operation request".

  The "credit addition request number" of the operation instruction command will be described. The “credit addition request number” data indicates a value to be added to the credit number. This data is valid only when Bit6 = 1 of the "operation request". Next, the “credit subtraction request number” data of the operation instruction command indicates a value to be subtracted from the credit number. This data is valid only when Bit7 = 1 of the "operation request".

  The "request type" data of the operation instruction command indicates the type of the addition request p and the subtraction request p of Bit0 to Bit4 of the "operation request".

  Bit0: 1 = rental operation (addition request p), Bit1: 1 = replay of stored medals (addition request p), Bit2: 1 = pointed card insertion (addition request p), and Bit3: 1. = Wagon service (subtraction request p) and Bit4: 1 = points split transfer (subtraction request p).

  For example, the S units specify that the factor of the addition request (addition condition) is “a lending operation for withdrawing the balance” by receiving data in which Bit 0 is 1. Note that in the flowcharts of FIG. 30 and subsequent figures, the illustration of the request type data transmitted together with the addition request or the subtraction request transmitted from the CU is omitted.

  Next, the "card balance" data of the operation instruction command indicates the prepaid balance of the card inserted in the CU. Further, the C-ID transmitted from the CU to the S units is set with the following data according to the state. When the card is not inserted, "ALL00h" is set. The C-ID of the card is set while the card is held. "ALLFFh" is set during the trial hit mode.

  It should be noted that the holding of the card may be set such that data can be distinguished between the case where the card inserted in the CU is a membership card and the case where the card is a visitor card. For example, "holding a card" is configured with 2 bits, and the 1st bit is held while the membership card is held and the 2nd bit is held while the visitor card is held. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, basically, the card is always held in the CU, so in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when there is a balance in the visitor card. The C-ID may be controlled to be transmitted as (as Bit is 1). Alternatively, the visitor card may not store the C-ID, and only the membership card may store the C-ID.

  Further, the error code being displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the S units. Note that "ALL00h" is transmitted as the data of the CU error code in which no error has occurred.

  Next, the operation response will be described with reference to FIG. The response of this operation response notifies the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and the gaming table information such as the number of points and the number of credits.

  As the sequence number, a value obtained by incrementing the sequence number received by the operation instruction by 1 is created, and this is included in the operation response.

The C-ID is a C-ID backed up by S units.
The execution result is transmitted from the S units to the CU as 8-bit data of Bit0 to Bit7.

  Note that, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 25, "rejection of the added points" and "rejection of the added credits" are simply called "rejection of addition", and "rejection of the subtracted points" and "rejection of the subtracted credits" It is also simply called "subtraction refusal", "game permission refusal" is also simply called "permission refusal", "game prohibition refusal" is also simply called "prohibition refusal", and "rejection of clearing points, credits and sequence numbers" It is also simply called "clear refusal" and "glass door open refusal" is simply called "glass open refusal".

  Regarding Bit 0, the execution result of the point addition refusal is shown when it is “1”, and the execution result of not refusing the addition of the point is shown when it is “0”. Regarding Bit1, the execution result of the score subtraction refusal is shown when it is "1", and the execution result that the subtraction of the score is not rejected is shown when it is "0". Regarding Bit2, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown when "1", and the execution result indicating that the game permission is not rejected is shown when "0".

  Regarding Bit3, when "1" is displayed, the execution result of the game prohibition refusal is shown, and when it is "0", the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is shown.

  Regarding Bit4, the execution result of the points, credits and sequence number clear rejection is shown when "1" and the execution result indicating that the points, credits and sequence number clear were not rejected when "0". Be done.

  For Bit 5, "1" indicates the execution result indicating that the opening of the front door is rejected, and "0" indicates the execution result indicating that the opening of the front door is not rejected.

  Regarding Bit6, the execution result of the credit number addition refusal is shown when "1", and the execution result of not refusing the addition of the credit number is shown when "0". Regarding Bit 7, the execution result of the credit number subtraction refusal is shown when "1", and the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the credit number is not rejected is shown when "0".

  The score related information (current score related information) transmitted from the S units to the CU includes the score, the number p of additions, the number p of subtractions, and external output information.

  The “number of points” is the current number of points on the S-side (the number of points as a result of addition / subtraction calculation). The "addition number p" is the number of points to be added.

  The “subtraction number p” is the number of points to be subtracted. The external output information is a plurality of types of information as described with reference to FIG.

  The CU that has received the addition number p adds the addition number p to the held points. In addition, the S units back up the value of the notified addition number p as the previous addition number and clear the current addition number to zero.

  Upon receiving the subtraction number p, the CU subtracts the received subtraction number p from the held points. In addition, the S-unit backs up the value of the notified subtraction number p as the previous subtraction number and clears the current subtraction number to zero.

  That is, the CU corrects the currently stored points (total points) by using the “addition number p” and “subtraction number p” transmitted from S units. Specifically, the number of points + the number of additions p−the number of subtractions p is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of points (total number of points). Then, it is checked whether or not the total number of held points information transmitted from the S units and the number of points after correction (total number of held points information) match, and if they do not match, recovery processing is performed to perform communication. The start request command is sent to the S units, and the number of points of the S units is determined by the data of the data correction request included in the command (the data of which Bit2 is "1") and the data of the number of points stored in the CU. A process of correcting (holding point total number information) to the corrected holding point number (point holding total number information) on the CU side is performed.

  As credit-related information (current credit-related information) transmitted from S units to the CU, there are a credit number, an addition number c, and a subtraction number c.

  The “credit count” is the current credit count on the S-side (the credit count resulting from the addition / subtraction calculation). The “addition number c” is the number of credits to be added. In addition, when a plurality of prizes are generated during one game, such as when a plurality of prizes are generated in one game, they are summed up.

The “subtraction number c” is the number of credits to be subtracted (for example, in the case of bet number setting or the like).
The CU which has received the addition number c adds the addition number c to the held credit number. In addition, the S units back up the value of the notified addition number c as the previous addition number and clear the current addition number to zero.

  The CU that has received the subtraction number c subtracts the received subtraction number c from the held credit number. In addition, the S units back up the value of the notified subtraction number c as the previous subtraction number and clear the current subtraction number to zero.

  That is, the CU corrects the currently stored credit number (credit total number) using the “addition number c” and “subtraction number c” transmitted from S units. Specifically, the number of credits + the number of additions c−the number of subtractions c is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of credits (total number of credits). Then, it is checked whether or not the credit total number information transmitted from the S units and the corrected credit number (credit total number information) match, and if they do not match, recovery processing is performed to make a communication start request. Is sent to the S units and the data of the data correction request included in the command (the data of which Bit2 is “1”) and the data of the credit amount stored in the CU are used for the credit amount of the S unit (credits). The total number information) is corrected to the corrected credit number on the CU side (credit total number information).

  Data on the gaming machine state for notifying the state of the gaming machine to the CU from the S machine is transmitted. The data of the game table state includes a game table state 1, a game state 2, a game table error state 1, and a game table error state 2.

  Among these, as the gaming machine error status 2, bits 0 to 3 are prepared, but this is provided as a spare, and the manufacturer-specific error information that is not used to specify the actual error status. It is for dealing with.

  FIG. 27 shows details of each bit of the gaming machine state 1 in (Note 2) shown in FIG. A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  With reference to FIG. 27A, the game permitting state / game prohibiting state in Bit 0 of the gaming machine state 1 indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and is instructed by a command from the CU. The S unit that has received the transition to the instructed state. Further, when a communication error occurs, the S machines themselves transit to the game prohibited state.

  The standby / playing state in Bit 1 is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (reel is rotating), and the state in which the fan (player) is not playing is on standby. A state where the (player) is playing is playing. The completion of the game of Bit3 represents whether or not the rotations of all reels in the S units are stopped. A state in which at least one of the three reels is rotating is a game incomplete (Bit3 = 0), and a state in which the rotation of all reels is stopped is a game complete (Bit3 = 1). Further, if the rotation of all reels does not stop even after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the rotation of the reels, the S units time out, notify (display or alarm) of the abnormality, and transmit to that effect to the CU.

  The game machine reset in Bit4 indicates an initial reset signal of the game machine (S machine), and "1" is set for 30 seconds after the S machine is activated. The presence of gaming machine history information in Bit 5 is data indicating whether or not gaming machine history information such as “start count (start count)” and “big bonus count” is held in S units, and when it is “0”, game play history information is stored. No machine history information is shown, and when it is "1", there is game machine history information. When the S machine clears the game machine history information by clearing the RAM, this data is turned off. Further, after the RAM is cleared, this data is turned ON at the timing when data such as “start count (start count)” and “big hit count” are added. In addition, in order to match the gaming machine history data with the S machines, the CU 3 also clears the gaming machine history data held in the CU 3 when detecting this data OFF.

  The credit “0” in Bit 6 indicates whether or not the remaining number of credits is 0. When the credit is “0”, the game is continued, but when the credit is “1”, the game is prohibited. It

  Details of each bit of the gaming machine state 2 shown in (Note 3) of FIG. 25 are shown in FIG. 27 (b). A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  For the Bit0 big bonus, "1" is set in the big bonus. For the regular bonus of Bit1, "1" is set in the regular bonus. For Bit2 RT, "1" is set in the RT.

  Details of each bit of the gaming machine error state 1 shown in (Note 4) of FIG. 25 are shown in FIG. 27 (c). A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The gaming machine error state 1 is composed of 3 bits of Bit0 to Bit2, and details of each bit are shown in Note 4 of FIG. 27 (c). Bit0 is a bit indicating whether or not the front door is open, and "1" is set when the front door is open. Bit1 is a bit indicating whether or not a reel rotation error is occurring, and is set to "1" when a reel rotation error is occurring. The reel rotation error is, for example, an error in which the reference position detection sensor provided on the reel does not detect the rotation reference position of the reel even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the rotation of the reel is started. Bit2 is an error indicating whether or not an illegal winning error is occurring, and is set to "1" when an illegal winning error is occurring. The fraudulent winning error is, for example, an error in which the reel stop result does not match the internal winning flag, or an error in which the reel stop result does not match the addition number.

  Bit0 to Bit2 are all set to "1" and then returned to "1" by turning ON / OFF the power of the S units.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and by 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3, a gaming machine error 1 is occurring, a gaming machine error 2 is occurring, a gaming machine error 3 is occurring, and a gaming machine error is occurring. 4 is occurring.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this communication status response is represented by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication status is OK (appropriate). In other cases, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, and 0x10, it is shown as abnormal as shown in FIG. In FIG. 28, CRC-NG means that the result of the parity check is NG, that is, abnormal. MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted and decrypted is not proper data and is abnormal. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is abnormal and is not a regular length. The disconnection detection means an abnormality that detects the occurrence of the disconnection between the S units and the CU.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a response of a device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The device information notified from the CU communication control unit to the CU includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, a payout control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, and a MAC. Is.

  Referring to FIG. 29, the CU communication control unit transmits a device information response to the CU. The response of the device information response is to send information on the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the CU. The command code specifies the code of the command. The code size specifies the data size of the command. Depending on the acquisition result, one of OK (with collected information), NG (without collected information), and uncollected is specified. The main control chip ID is a chip ID recorded on the S main control boards 116, and the payout control chip ID is an S payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 31. Is.

  30 to 89 show timing charts of processing executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the LSI 117.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the number of additions and the number of subtractions from the S unit to the CU depending on the operation response, the change of the game state of the S unit (BET operation detection, start operation detection, reel rotation start, reel Corresponding to each of the external output information is also transmitted in response to each of the rotation stop, shift to BB, shift to RB, shift to RT, shift to AT, etc.). However, in the following timing chart, the illustration of the transmission operation of the external output information as described with reference to FIG. 5 and the storage processing in both the S unit and the CU is omitted.

  In addition, in the following FIGS. 30 to 89, addition refusal (rejection of addition of points and refusal of addition of credit points), refusal of subtraction (rejection of deduction of points and refusal of credit subtraction), refusal of permission (permission of game) included in the operation response. For each of refusal, refusal refusal (game refusal refusal), clear refusal (points / credits and sequence number clear refusal), and front door open refusal, the state in which the bit is set (= 1) is described as "ON". On the other hand, the state where the bit is not set (= 0) is described as “OFF”.

  Further, the point addition request and the credit addition request are collectively referred to as an addition request (p, c), and the point subtraction request and the credit subtraction request are also referred to as a subtraction request (p, c).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo ball unit is based on the addition request (p, c) and the subtraction request (p, c) from the CU side, and the addition and subtraction conditions of the points on the S side. Although 120 and 121 operate and each counter is updated on the S side on the condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected, in the following communication sequence diagram, the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is excluded except for a part. The description is omitted. Also, in the following, the description thereof may be omitted. Furthermore, in the following flowcharts, the request type data transmitted together with the addition request or the subtraction request transmitted from the CU is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 30, an aspect of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and the S unit will be described. A command is sent from the CU to the S unit, and the S unit responds to the command and returns a response to the CU. After receiving the response, the CU sends the next command to the S units, and the S unit responds to the command and returns the response to the CU. As shown in FIG. 30, the period from the transmission of the first command from the CU to the S units until the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Also, the period from the transmission of the response from the S units to the CU until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  In this way, both the command and the response are transmitted between the CU and the S units at intervals of 200 ms. On the other hand, the S units cannot execute two games during the one-game restriction time of 4.1 seconds. As a result, in this embodiment, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received during one game.

  Therefore, the response of the motion response for notifying the amount of change in the number of points is sequentially transmitted from the S units to the CU at intervals shorter than one game period. As a matter of course, the number of bets is set once in one game period, and the number of winnings that can be made is one. That is, the number of points that can be subtracted and the number of points added can be once in one game period. Since the response of the motion response is transmitted one after another during this one game period, the S consoles can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the score. On the other hand, the CU is capable of holding point management in which changes in the holding points on the S side are carefully reflected.

  Although the transmission interval of the command and response is set to 200 ms here, the transmission interval may be set to a longer interval or a shorter interval. For example, the transmission interval may be one game regulation time of S units. It is also possible to match with. Alternatively, the transmission interval may be half of one game regulation time or may be shorter than that. Further, in this embodiment, the S-unit receives a command from the CU and sends back an operation response, but instead of this, when a BET operation is detected and when a winning occurs, The S units may transmit data for notifying the subtraction number or the addition number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a process when the communication interruption is detected on the CU side will be described. When the CU does not receive the response within 1 second after transmitting the command to the S units, the same command is transmitted to the S units again. Further, if the response is not received within 1 second after that, the same command is transmitted to the S units for the second retransmission. If no response is received from the S units within 1 second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that communication is abnormal at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused by disconnection of the connector 330 or 220 shown in FIG. 4, disconnection of connection wiring, or power-off of the S unit.

  The CU transmits a device information request command to the S units to restart the connection sequence 5 seconds after determining that the communication is abnormal. The specific content of the process of transmitting the device information request command to the S units and starting the connection sequence will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the S side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the S unit, and the S unit transmits a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, if the command from the CU is not sent to the S unit for 4 seconds, the S unit determines that the communication is disconnected, and the bet number is calculated even if the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 are operated. The game is prohibited as a "betting number operation invalid state (game prohibited state)" that is not set, and transitions to the unconnected state. The cause of the communication interruption may be the disconnection of the connector 330 or 220, the disconnection of the connection wiring, the power interruption of the CU, or the like, as in the case described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the processing of the connection sequence at power-on will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 33 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the S units is normally completed. More specifically, this is executed when communication is resumed after the power supply of the CU is turned off in the standby state (see FIG. 44) where the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where one day of business ends at a game arcade, the power is turned off, and the power is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, when the power is started, the game is stopped on the S units and then the communication is started. The CU first executes the processing of the authentication sequence. The specific control contents of the processing of this authentication sequence are shown in the flowcharts of the subroutine programs shown in FIGS. By the processing of this authentication sequence, the device information request command is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response to this, the S units respond with a device information response. The response of the device information response includes the main chip ID and the payout chip ID.

  The CU that has received the device information response stores the information included in the device information response, and requests the S units (the S units specified by the received main chip ID and the payout chip ID) that received the response to perform an authentication request. Data of S is transmitted to S units.

The S units that have received the authentication request return an authentication response to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the processing of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 33 will be described based on FIGS. 34 to 42.

  34A and 34B are flowcharts showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. The authentication sequence shown in FIG. 33 has two types: an authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power supply of S units (game machine) is activated. The authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated is shown in FIG. 34 (a). With reference to FIG. 34A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the upper server 801 (see FIG. 108). The CU communication control unit 80 authenticates with the S-unit communication control unit 81. After that, communication is started. Then, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is first executed, and then the chip ID authentication sequence is executed.

  FIG. 34B shows an authentication sequence when the power source of S units (game machine) is activated. Referring to FIG. 34 (b), after the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 detect communication disconnection with S units, the CU communication control unit 80 restores communication with S units, then Authenticate with the stand. After that, the chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. After that, communication with S units becomes possible.

  FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the upper server 801. Then, the BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. This BB serial ID authentication sequence authenticates the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence authenticates the CU communication control unit serial ID.

  Next, the writer management information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information about the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information into the EEPROMs 813 and 808 described with reference to FIG. For example, it is data such as the ID of the ROM writer, the manufacturer code of the ROM writer, and the version of the key stored in the ROM writer.

  The main control unit 323 compares the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, and whether the two match. Check whether or not. As a result of the collation check based on the writer management information, even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincidentally, a certain degree of security is secured and the security is improved.

  Next, a device authentication sequence using the authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, the main control unit 323 transmits a counter information notification command requesting transmission of counter information to the CU communication control unit 80. In response to this, the CU communication control unit transmits a response of a counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 to notify the CTR mode initial vector. When the ECB mode, which is a simple block cipher usage mode, is used, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, the same ciphertext is obtained, so that a certain part of the plaintext to be encrypted is different from the other part. There is an inconvenience that it can be judged by comparing ciphertexts whether or not it is the same as the part, and in order to eliminate it, the CU 323 is notified of the initial vector in the CTR mode. The encryption mode is set by the notification of the counter information. This encryption mode setting is reset every time the power is turned on every day in the game arcade, so that the security is improved. The ciphertext of the communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scramble processing is not performed, the same encrypted data will be exchanged every day even if it is encrypted, and the encryption will be easily broken. Such inconvenience can be eliminated by scrambling.

  Next, the authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 acquires the update information from the upper server 801. With this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (telegram key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 and the received time information, and sends it to the main control unit 323 as a time response. To do. Any method may be used to generate the session key (telegram key). For example, the received time information and the authentication key are combined according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The time information generated or received may be encrypted with an authentication key and the encryption result may be used as a session key (telegram key). This session key is cleared when the power is turned off, and regenerated when the power is turned on next time.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 39 is executed using the session key between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Then, if the authentication result is correct, the encrypted communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is thereafter encrypted and decrypted using the session key.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b). The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, the main control unit 323 transmits a payout control authentication result request command to the CU communication control unit 80. This payout control authentication result request command requests the authentication result obtained by the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the S unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 117 of the S unit 2S. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying the authentication result with the S-unit communication control unit 81 of the payout control chip (LSI) to the main control unit 323.

  Next, the device control request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This device information request command requests the chip ID of the CU communication control unit. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the chip ID of the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. The main control unit 323 having received the inquiry makes an inquiry to the higher-level server 801 to collate the device information (chip ID), and when it is NG (inappropriate), stops the subsequent communication. If it is not NG, the business electronic message can be transmitted to S units thereafter. Then, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the recovery request, the recovery response, the operation instruction, and the command response of the operation response are transmitted and received.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 35, and challenge-response authentication is performed. Challenge-response type authentication is generally an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping of an ID or the like during communication by performing special processing on a character string or the like. A random number string (this is called a "challenge code") is transmitted to the side to receive, and the side receiving the challenge code synthesizes the ID and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm and a response code. Generate and reply. On the side receiving the response code, the response code is generated in the same way from the transmitted challenge code and the ID stored in advance, and the response code transmitted is compared with the generated response code to determine whether they match. Authenticate to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, the command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving the request, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response requesting a challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication response 1. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17, and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request to the CU. It is transmitted to the communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 17, and outputs the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response 2 To the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 which has received this checks the response code to determine whether it is appropriate or not. When it is improper (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  Any algorithm may be used for the generation of the challenge code and the generation of the response code, and an example thereof will be described below. To generate the challenge code, a random number (binary number) of the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and the exclusive OR of the BB serial ID and the random number is calculated. The calculation result is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as the generation of the response code in the CU communication control unit 80, the exclusive OR of the BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 side and the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 side match, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID is calculated twice for the random number. The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number and the random number sent as the response code match. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be incorrect (NG). judge.

  38 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 generates the challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 generates the response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. The communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The communication control unit 80 having received it checks the response code A and determines whether it is appropriate or not. Then, CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and request for challenge code B is transmitted to main control unit 323. When the main control unit 323 receives the check result, if the check result is incorrect (NG), the main control unit 323 controls not to perform the subsequent communication.

  Any algorithm may be used for the challenge code generation and the response code generation shown in FIG. 38. For example, the algorithm using the exclusive OR described in FIG. 37 may be used. .

  The challenge-response-type authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be the following. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number R1 and encrypts the random number R1 using the SID (called SIMD) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key to generate the challenge code A. If expressed by a formula, the challenge code A = ESIDM (R1). This is transmitted to the main controller 323. The main control unit 323 decrypts the stored SIMD to generate the response code A. If expressed by a formula, the response code A = DSIDM (challenge code A) = DSIDM (ESIDM (R1)) = R1. This is returned to the communication control unit 80, and it is checked whether or not the random number R1 previously generated in the communication control unit 80 and the response code A (= R1) returned are matched, and the condition is that they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2, and the random number R2 is encrypted using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate the challenge code B. If expressed by a formula, the challenge code B = ESIDT (R2). This is transmitted to the communication control unit 80, decoded by the SIDT stored in the communication control unit 80, and the response code B is generated. If expressed by a formula, the response code B = DSIDT (challenge code B) = DSIDT (ESIDT (R2)) = R2. This is returned to the main control unit 323, and it is checked whether or not the random number R2 previously generated in the main control unit 323 and the response code B (= R2) returned are matched, and it is determined that they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. This device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and uses the ECB mode as the block encryption mode. First, the main controller 323 transmits the device authentication request 1 to the CU communication controller 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. It also creates a MAC. This MAC is a Message Authentication Code. For example, the value obtained by calculating the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function is set as MAC. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A becomes the MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and the MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  The main control unit 323 which received it decrypts the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17 to generate the original plaintext random number A, and the random number A is the predetermined number. MAC is calculated using the hash function of. Then, it is checked whether the calculated MAC matches the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80. If they match, it is judged to be proper, and if they do not match, it is judged to be improper (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B and encrypts the random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Further, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and the MAC and the authentication result based on the device authentication response 1 are transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a device authentication request 2. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the encrypted random number B received by using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 17 to obtain the original plaintext random number B. Then, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to calculate the MAC. It is checked whether or not the calculated MAC and the received MAC match. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be incorrect (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as the device authentication response 2. If the determination result is improper (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. When there is an authentication key update request from the host server 801, the main control unit 323 sends the authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80. The update request from the upper server 801 also includes new authentication key data. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17 with the new authentication key sent from the upper server 801, and sends the authentication key update request sent from the upper server 801. It is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 performs a process of updating the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 17 to the new authentication key that has been sent, and the result is used as the authentication key update response for main control. It is transmitted to the unit 323.

  The main control unit that has received the request executes the device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. Then, if the authentication result is proper, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  41 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM 808. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the authentication key to the main control unit 323, and the authentication key is stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323. .

  Referring to FIG. 41, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence when manufacturing the card unit (CU). First, the main control unit 323 waits for the transmission of the authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80, provided that the authentication key for the CU communication control unit 80 has not been written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits to the main control unit 323 an authentication request A for the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 transmits to the CU communication control unit 80 a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting a challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 17, and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. It is transmitted to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving it, the main control unit 323 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17, and sets the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response B. It is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the response code is proper, and only when it is proper (OK), the authentication key information shown below is transmitted. The challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 41 can also use the same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIGS. 37 and 38.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the CU communication control unit 80 outputs the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. The information is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 stores the transmitted authentication key in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17, and transmits to the CU communication control unit 80 an authentication key setting response indicating that the authentication key has been stored.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 uses the common authentication key to perform device authentication thereafter. This device authentication is similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. Then, when it is determined as appropriate as a result of the device authentication, the subsequent communication is not performed, and the reset waiting state is set.

  Next, returning to FIG. 33, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to the S units. In response to this, the S units return the recovery data backed up inside the S units (specifically, the payout control unit 31) to the CU as a response. The recovery data includes the connection time, the last SQN (sequence number), the C-ID, the previous holding point related information, and the current holding point related information. To be more precise, it is the various data shown in FIG. 21, and the “recovery data” in the following flowcharts are more precisely the various data shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the SQN transmitted last by the S units, as described above.

  The CU that receives this recovery response starts the recovery process from that point. The recovery process is a process for recovering the mutual data consistency between the CU and the S unit, and is not only executed at power-on, but also recovered as a trouble occurs as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) every time it transmits the "operation instruction". However, it does not count up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting the "operation request". The S unit stores the SQN received in the "operation instruction" and sends it back to the CU as it is in the "operation response". When receiving the operation instruction of the same SQN as the SQN received last time, the S-unit determines that the re-transmission statement has a communication failure and the CU retransmits the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from the S units, updates the SQN to “0”, and sets the communication start request (recovery clear ON). As commands, commands of SQN correction ON, holding point correction ON, SQN = 0, holding points = 0, and credit count = 0 are transmitted to S units. In response to this, the S unit receives the "sequence number", "points" and "credit number" that were backed up on the S unit and matches them to the information of the CU (SQN = 0, point = 0, credit = 0) . Also, the notified "connection time" is backed up. Then, the S-unit returns a communication start response to the CU. After that, the operation instruction command and the operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S unit.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by 1 each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request, SQN = 0, C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the S units. In the S-unit, in response, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, pre-addition number p (points) = 0, pre-subtraction number p (points) = 0, pre-addition number p (credits) = 0. , The data of the pre-subtraction number p (credit) = 0 is backed up. In addition, the S counter clears the value of each counter of the number of credits and the number of credits currently added, which is the current score-related information. Then, the S units, as operation responses, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, score = 0, credit count = 0, addition number p (points) = 0, subtraction number p (points) = 0, A response indicating that the addition number c (credit) = 0, the subtraction number c (credit) = 0, and the game prohibition (game stop state) is transmitted to the CU.

  The subscripts p and c are respectively related to points and credits. For example, the number of additions p is the number of points added and the number of additions c is the number of credits added. Further, (p, c) is a description combining the above subscripts p and c. For example, the addition number (p, c) indicates the addition number p and the addition number c.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 based on the operation response, and the current score is 0 + added number p received (point) (= 0) -subtracted number p received (point) (= 0) is calculated and the current score is 0 and the current credit number is 0 + the received addition number c (credits) (= 0) -the received subtraction number c (credits) (= 0) and is calculated. While backing up the number of credits 0, the cumulative number p is cumulative (points) = 0, the cumulative number p is cumulative (points) = 0, the cumulative number c is cumulative (credits) = 0, and the cumulative number c is cumulative (credits) = 0. Back up.

  Next, at the stage where the activation process is completed on the CU side, the CU transmits an operation instruction with a game permission request, SQN = n, C-ID = 00h to the S unit, and the S unit receiving the operation response As a game refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, score = 0, credit = 0, addition p (point) = 0, subtraction p (point) = 0, addition c (Credit) = 0, subtraction number c (credit) = 0, and a game permission response is returned to the CU.

  When a proper authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key in FIG. 35, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 42 is executed. 42A shows the case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 42B shows the case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 42 (a), after the operation control command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, a confirmation request of the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request) Is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status of the operation instruction message (MAC abnormality, CRC abnormality, decoding abnormality, data length abnormality, disconnection detection) as a communication state response (see FIG. 28).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication status based on the received communication status response, and if normal, determines that the communication status is normal.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the operation instruction command to the P units (specifically, the P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the operation instruction command described above. In the P units that received it, the operation response is returned to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the response and sends the response of the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, a case where the business message sequence is abnormal is shown in FIG. The difference from FIG. 42A is that the main control unit 323, which receives the communication state response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80, confirms the communication state based on the communication state response and determines that it is abnormal. That is the point. This is judged to be abnormal when the response of the transmitted communication status response is numerical data other than 0x00 shown in FIG. When the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes a retry to check the communication state. Specifically, after transmitting the operation instruction command to the CU communication control unit 80 again, the communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response returned from the CU communication control unit 80. Then, it is determined whether or not an abnormality in the communication state has occurred. When the main control unit 323 determines that the communication state is still abnormal as a result of executing the retry, the communication state abnormality notification control is performed. The communication status abnormality notification control includes, for example, transmitting an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 to notify the communication status of abnormality by the display 312, or turning on or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Alternatively, it is conceivable that a signal indicating that a communication state abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1. The number of executions of this retry is shown as one in FIG. 42 (b), but it may be executed twice or more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the processing of the connection sequence when the CU and the S unit are reconnected will be described. The term "at the time of reconnection" as used herein refers to when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the S units abnormally ends. This "abnormal termination" means that the power supply is activated while holding the card in FIG. 55, the CU itself disconnects communication when the S unit in FIG. 62 rejects addition, and the CU side in FIGS. This is when the power is cut off. As will be described later, when restarting the connection sequence, the CU disconnects the communication by sending a communication disconnection request by itself: a. Restarting the connection sequence in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 44). It is determined whether the connection sequence is restarted later (see FIG. 62), or the SQN backed up by c.CU and the SQN transmitted from the S unit are inconsistent. When it is determined to be any one of to c, it is determined that the normal communication is not terminated (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection of FIG. 43 is executed instead of FIG. 33.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at power-on described with reference to FIG. 33, and differences will be mainly described here.

  First, the time when the S machines start the communication after the game is prohibited as the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state) is immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the S unit can recognize that the S unit receives the device information request from the CU and is reconnected.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 33 is at the time of power-on, the CU transmits a communication start request command of recovery clear ON to the S units, and the S units receive the command to clear the recovery data. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 in accordance with SQN = 1 sent by the first operation instruction, and all the previous score related information and the current score related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 43, the recovery information backed up inside the S units and the information stored on the CU side may not match because of reconnection. Therefore, in the CU, after starting the recovery process, in accordance with the contents of the S-side recovery data (previous point / credit related information, current point / credit related information, etc.) included in the recovery response, A process for correcting points etc. is executed.

  Specifically, based on the number of additions p (points), the number of subtractions p (points), the number of additions c (credits), and the number of subtractions c (credits) included in the recovery data sent from S units. Then, the CU stores the number of points + the number of additions p-the number of subtractions p and the number of credits + the number of additions c-the number of subtractions c, and the stored number of points and the number of credits A process of correcting the points and credits is performed, and the corrected points and credits are compared with the points and credits transmitted as recovery data from the S units to determine whether or not they match.

  If they do not match, a point start correction ON, that is, a command in which Bit2 of the data correction request is set to "1" is transmitted to the S units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the S unit and the final SQN stored in the CU are compared to determine whether they match, and if they do not match, a communication start request is made. SQN correction ON, that is, a command in which Bit1 of the data correction request is set to "1" is transmitted to the S units. Also, the correct number of points to be corrected = 300, the number of credits = 0, and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the S units.

  The S units receive the command of the communication start request, and perform a correction process of matching the "sequence number", "points" and "credit number" backed up by the S units with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3, points = 300 and credit number = 0 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  Then, the CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the S units at the stage when the recovery process is completed, and also the connection time, which is the time at the time of reconnection. Regarding the sequence number, if the final SQN transmitted from S units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the recovery process is started, if it is determined that the S units that are communication partners do not match, or if the SQN is abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the S units The current number of points included in is recorded once in the game recording medium (card or the like) owned by the player. Then, after that, the replay button 319 is operated to use the medals of the recording medium, the medals are converted into points, and after the points are deducted into credits, the replay is enabled. At that time, similarly to the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 33, the recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the S units, and the S units receive the recovery data and receive the recovery data. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to "0", SQN = 1 is transmitted to the S unit in the first operation instruction, and the SQN = 1 is backed up in the S unit. Further, in S units, the pre-addition number p = 0, the pre-subtraction number p = 0, the pre-addition number c = 0, and the pre-subtraction number c = 0 are backed up, and the addition number p, the addition number c, the subtraction number p, Each counter value of the subtraction number c is cleared to 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the processing during standby will be described. The standby state is a state in which no game is being played in S units, a card is not inserted in the CU, and the lending button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, the CU transmits an operation instruction command of no addition request, no subtraction request, SQN = n, and C-ID = 00h to the S units. In the S units that received it, as the response of the operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, score = 0, credit = 0, addition p = 0, subtraction p = 0, addition c = 0, subtraction number c = 0, and game prohibition data are transmitted. The CU backs up SQN = n + 2, addition request number p = 0, subtraction request number p = 0, addition request number c = 0, and subtraction request number c = 0. In the next operation command command from the CU to the S units, data of SQN = n + 2 and C-ID = 00h is transmitted. In response to this, the S units back up SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 0, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 0, and The counter values of the number of additions p, the number of subtractions p, the number of additions c, the number of subtraction c, the number of points, and the number of credits are cleared to 0.

  And, as for the S units, SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, score = 0, credit = 0, addition p = 0, subtraction p = 0, addition c = 0, subtraction The response of c = 0 and the game prohibition is transmitted to the CU. In the CU, every time the response of the operation response from the S units is received, C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the number of credits = 0, the cumulative number p is 0, the cumulative number p is 0, and the cumulative number is c. Back up the cumulative total = 0 and the subtraction number c cumulative total = 0.

Referring to FIG. 45, the processing of the CU and the S unit when the card is inserted will be described.
In the CU, when a card is inserted, a command signal for loading the card is output to the card reader / writer 327, the card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded in the loaded card, and the read information is received. A card insertion process, such as, is executed.

  In this insertion process, the CU reads the C-ID recorded on the inserted card and sends a card insertion request command for sending the C-ID to the S unit. Upon receiving this, the S-unit responds to the CU with a card insertion response that notifies the CU that the reception of the C-ID has ended. Further, as the processing at the time of insertion, control as shown in FIG. 46 described later is executed.

  The CU remains in the card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the process of inquiring a higher-level server such as the hall management computer 1 for the propriety of the inserted card, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or the prepaid balance. It means that it is in the process of displaying the information on the display 312 and displaying it on the display 51 on the S side. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 and the like, the CU displays on the display 312 that the inserted card is inquiring, and gives operation instructions including ON for holding card, C-ID, and ON for card insertion process. Send to S units.

  In S, by receiving the command of the operation instruction, the LSI 117 transmits the display control command including the card holding ON and the card insertion processing ON to the display effect control board 90 to inquire about the inserted card. The display effect control board 90 controls the display 51 to display that it is in the middle (see FIG. 86).

  After that, the S units, as operation responses, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, score = 0, credit = 0, addition p = 0, subtraction p = 0, addition c = 0, subtraction c = 0 , Sends a response including the game prohibition to the CU.

  The CU determines the balance when the balance of the inserted card can be confirmed as a result of the inquiry about the balance of the card. The CU controls the display 312 to display the confirmed prepaid balance of the card (see FIG. 86). At this point in time, the movement of the pseudo ball 124 has not been detected, so the point display is not fixed.

  In addition, when a card having a score (a score> 0) is inserted, the score is displayed immediately without moving the pseudo ball 124 (without the condition of the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124). You may do it. With this configuration, when a card in which no points are recorded (points = 0) is inserted, the pseudo ball is used when the lending operation is performed and the process of converting the card balance into points is executed. 124 is moved, and the reduction display of the balance and the addition display of the score are enabled on the condition that the moved pseudo ball 124 is detected.

Then, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, and score = 0 (number of score before update) are backed up.
Next, as operation instructions, a command including addition request, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, addition request number p = 5000 and card balance = 7000 Send to S units. As described with reference to FIG. 23, the operation instruction during holding the card and during the card insertion process is divided into a membership card and a visitor card, and the operation instructions are transmitted separately for each type of card. The operation may be displayed separately for each type of card.

  In S units, the LSI 117 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the addition request number p = 5000. In response to this, the LSI 117 drives the addition pseudo-ball unit 120 and detects the predetermined number a1 of pseudo-balls 124, and then, as an operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 5, C-ID, and score = a1, A command including addition number p = a1, subtraction number = 0, and game prohibition is transmitted to the CU. Further, the LSI 117 transmits a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of additions p = a1 from the LSI 117 to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 displays on the display 51 that the point a1 is being added as the holding point (addition display) (see FIG. 86).

  The LSI 117 repeats such processing n times and sequentially transmits a1, a2, ..., An as the number of additions p, a1, a1 + a2, a1 + a2 + a3, ... As the score, to the main control unit 323 of the CU. Also in the n-th time, the number of points, that is, the sum of a1, a2, ... The main control unit 323 of the CU updates the display of the number of points every time the number of points is sent from the S units.

  FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the insertion process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, steps indicated by broken lines show the control contents of the modified example. Also, the solid line arrow indicates the flow of control, and the two-dot chain line arrow indicates the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 46, the CU executes the steps S31 to S37, and S units execute S38 to S40 and S42 to S45.

  First, the CU determines in step (hereinafter, simply referred to as S) 31 whether or not it is suspended. Whether or not this interruption is in progress is determined by whether or not the game interruption sequence shown in FIG. 53 described later has been performed and the game interruption sequence has been executed. If the C-ID of the inserted card and the C-ID of the interrupt-operated card match, it is determined in S32 if the card is suspended, and if not, the card is inserted in S35. The card is ejected and the process shifts to the standby state (see FIG. 44).

  On the other hand, when the C-ID of the inserted card and the C-ID of the interrupted card match, it is determined that the interrupted player has returned to the gaming machine and started the game. Therefore, the control advances to S34, the interrupted state is released, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S36.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S31 that the card is not suspended, a process of transmitting the C-ID of the inserted card to the S units is performed in S33. The S units receive the C-ID and compare the received C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 7) (S38). Then, in S39, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match, and if they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who left the seat has started the game, and the subroutine program of this insertion time process ends. .

  As the control contents of the modified example, the processes of S45 and S37 may be performed. By S45, the game history data and C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU and then deleted. The CU receives it and sends the received data to the upper server 801. The upper server 801 backs up and stores the received game history data and C-ID.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S39 that they match, the process proceeds to S42, in which the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player game history data storage section shown in FIG. 7) and the game history data is stored. The addition update of the game history data is newly started from.

  As the control contents of the modified example, the processes of S40, S43, and S44 may be performed. In the case of YES in S39, the control proceeds to S40, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the last card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data and the C-ID in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted in S43. Further, after S42, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU through S45. As a control content of the modified example, control may be performed such that all of the processes of S40, S43, S44 and S45, S47 are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a process of consuming the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted recording medium (card) will be described. In the processing of FIG. 47, the prepaid balance is "1000" and the current score is "10". In addition, at the time when the card is inserted into the CU, if the inserted card has a score = 10, the pseudo ball 124 is not moved (the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124 is a condition. Alternatively, the score may be immediately displayed as 10.

  First, the CU sends a command of no addition request, OFF during addition display, SQN = n, C-ID, addition request number p = 0, and subtraction request number p = 0 to the S units. In the S units that received it, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 10, number of credits = 0, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 0, number of additions c = 0, number of subtraction c = 0 A response that the game is allowed is returned.

  On the other hand, the CU lends 500 yen, that is, 25 points, by one lending operation. When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and balance = 1000 are backed up. At this stage, since the pseudo ball 124 is not detected, the balance consumption and the score are undetermined.

  Then, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, a command of addition request presence, addition display ON, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request number p = 25, and card balance = 500 to S units. In response to this, the LSI 117 drives the addition pseudo ball unit 120, detects the addition request number p = 25 of the pseudo balls 124, and then sends the display control command including the score 35 to the display effect control board 90. Send. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 causes the display 51 to display a screen in which the score 35 is being added.

  Next, the S units back up SQN = n + 2, C-ID, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 0, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 0, and create a response. After that, the counter values of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c are cleared to 0, and the addition request number p (= 25) is added to the current score 10 to obtain 35 values. Update your score.

  Then, as the operation response, the addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of points = 35, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, and a response indicating that the game is possible are returned.

  In the CU which received it, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, score = 10 (pre-update score) +25 (addition request number p) +0 (addition number p) -0 (subtraction number p) = 35 and credit number = 0 (credit count before update) +0 (addition request count c) +0 (addition count c) -0 (subtraction count c) = 0 is calculated and backed up, and addition count p total = 0, subtraction count p total = Back up 0, total number of additions c = 0, total number of subtractions c = 0.

  Eventually, when the display of point addition on the CU side ends, as shown in FIG. 79, an operation instruction command including OFF during addition display is transmitted from the CU side to the S unit side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a process at the time of replay for consuming a stored medal will be described. In FIG. 48, the stored medal specified by the inserted recording medium (card or the like) is "1000", and the initial score is "0". The replay process in FIG. 48 is similar to the process for consuming the balance shown in FIG.

  On the CU side, when the player's game recording medium (member's card or the like) is inserted, and the replay button 319 is pressed with the stored medals specified by the card, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of points = 0 (number of points before update), number of requests for addition p = 25, number of requests for subtraction p = 0, medals = 1000, number of credits = 0, number of requests for addition c = 0, request for subtraction Back up the number c = 0.

  At the time of inserting the card into the CU, if there is a stored medal corresponding to the inserted card (the number of stored medals> 0), the number of stored medals is displayed on the CU or S unit. Good.

  Then, the CU transmits to the S units a command including an addition request, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request number p = 25, and subtraction request number p = 0 as operation instructions. In response to this, the LSI 117 drives the addition pseudo ball unit 120, detects the addition request number = 25 pseudo balls 124, and then the LSI 117 issues a display control command including 25 points to the display effect control board 90. Send to. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 causes the display 51 to display a screen in which the score 25 is being added.

  The other processes are similar to those of FIG. 47. As described above, the consumption of the stored medals is determined by the CU alone when the replay button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the S units, and the score is from the S units. Confirm the action response of.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a process of subtracting the number of points (wagon service or the like) according to an instruction from the CU will be described. In a game arcade, a wagon service is provided in which points owned by the player are consumed and drinks and the like are provided to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 (see FIGS. 97 to 101) and places a wagon order, so that the order contents ordered by the player are the card units. An infrared signal is input from the IR photosensitive unit 320 of No. 3 to the remote controller carried by the clerk at the game arcade.

  The clerk at the amusement hall provides the wagon service according to the order contents input on the remote control. FIG. 49 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes the used score “300” occurs while the player owns the score “1000” and the number of credits is “10”. When a wagon order is generated, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of points used when a wagon order is generated, as SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request number p = 0, and subtraction request number p. . At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the score, but simply backs up "300" as the subtraction request number p. Then, from the CU to the S units, as an operation instruction, there is a subtraction request, ON during subtraction display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request number p = 0 and subtraction request number p = 300, credit number = 10, addition request The commands of the number c = 0 and the subtraction request number c = 0 are transmitted.

  Receiving it, the S units determine whether or not the value of the point count counter stored by themselves is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number p. Note that this determination is executed by the LSI 117. In FIG. 49, it is assumed that the value of the score-holding counter is equal to or larger than the subtraction request number p. In the case of S units, when the value of the holding point counter is equal to or larger than the subtraction request number p, the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 is driven to move the pseudo balls corresponding to the subtraction request number 300. After that, the display control command including ON during subtraction display and subtraction request number = 300 is transmitted from the LSI 117 to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display device effect control board 90 displays on the display device 51 that 300 is being subtracted as a holding point (during subtraction display). Also, the score is updated to "700" which is obtained by subtracting the subtraction number 300 from the current score 1000.

  Further, the S units, to the CU, as the operation response, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, current number of points = 700, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 300, number of credits = 10, number of additions c = 0, subtraction number c = 0, and a response that the game is available is returned. In addition, S units back up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 300, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 0, and addition number p, The value of each counter of the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c is cleared to 0.

  Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, C-ID, points = 1000 (points before update) +0 (number p to be added) -300 (number p to be subtracted) = 700, and the number of points is corrected to “700”. Then, this is backed up together with SQN = n + 3. In this way, the subtraction of the number of points is fixed only after waiting for the response of the operation response from the S units.

  Further, the CU backs up the C-ID, the addition number p cumulative total = 0, the subtraction number p cumulative total = 0, the addition number c cumulative total = 0, and the subtraction number cumulative c = 0.

  On the other hand, when the S units determine that the value of the score counter stored by the S units is less than the subtraction request number p, the S units do not perform the subtraction of the score points according to the subtraction request number p. . Further, in this case, the S-unit returns an operation response of subtraction rejection ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the points have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the S units rejected the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a process when the occurrence of a small winning combination is detected during the big bonus will be described. In this FIG. 50, the initial number of points is 1000, the number of credits is 14, and a big bonus is generated while the operation instruction and the operation response are being transmitted and received between the S unit and the CU in the game. The state is shown.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n and C-ID are backed up, and the CU transmits commands of addition request, no subtraction request, SQN = n, C-ID to the S units as operation instructions. In response to this, the 3 BET game has started on the S console. As a result, in S units, SQN = n + 1, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 3 are backed up, and credit number = 14 + 0 (addition number) −3 (subtraction number) = 11 is calculated, Update the number of credits to 11. Further, after creating the response, each counter value of the addition number c and the subtraction number c is cleared to 0.

  As described above, credits are consumed during the game, and points are consumed by conversion into credits.

  And, as for the S machines, as an operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 1000, the number of credits = 11, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of additions c = 0, the number of subtraction c = 3, and the game is allowed. , Send the response of big bonus OFF to CU. In this way, the S units transmit not only the number of additions p, the number of subtractions p, the number of additions c, and the number of subtraction c, but also the number of points and the number of credits to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of points and the number of credits stored in S units respectively match the number of points and the number of credits managed by the CU.

  The CU that has received the response of the operation response calculates the number of credits = 14 + 0−3 = 11 and backs up the number 11 as the number of credits, and also backs up the total number of additions c = 0 and the total number of subtraction c = 3. As for the points, the number of points = 1000, the total number of additions p = 0, and the total number of subtractions p = 0 are backed up.

  While repeatedly transmitting and receiving such operation command commands and operation response responses, a big bonus occurs in S units, and in time, credit-related information includes points = 1000, credits = 25, addition. The number c = 14 and the subtraction number c = 0. Then, a small winning a prize is generated during the big bonus on S units. By the winning of the small role in the big bonus, for example, 15 points are given to the player. Then, the S units back up SQN = n + N + 1, the number of pre-additions = 15, and the number of pre-subtractions = 0, and since the upper limit of the credit number is up to 25, the credits are added up to the upper limit of 25. Specifically, the addition number c is added to the credit number up to 14. The number of credits = 11 + 14 (number of additions) = 25 is calculated, and the number of credits is updated to 25. The surplus score (here, 1) is converted into a score by driving the addition pseudo ball unit 120.

  Further, after the response is created, each counter value of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c is cleared to 0. In addition, as for the S machine, as an operation response, SQN = n + N + 1, the number of points = 1001, the number of additions p = 1, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 25, the number of additions c = 14, the number of subtraction c = 0, and the game is allowed. , Send response of big bonus ON to CU.

  In response to this, the CU detects that a small winning a prize has been generated for the big bonus. Further, the CU calculates SQN = n + N + 1, credit number = 11 + 14 (addition number c) = 25, corrects the credit number to 25 and backs up, and also adds number c cumulative total = 14 and subtraction number c cumulative = 0. Back up. Since the credit value is 25, which is the upper limit, the CU calculates SQN = n + N + a, the number of points = 1000 + 1 (the number of additions p) −0 (the number of subtractions p) = 1001 for the conversion of the points for the extra points. Then, the number of points is corrected to 1001 and backed up, and the addition number p total = 1 and the subtraction number p total = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a process in the case where it is detected that the credit is exhausted while playing a game on S units will be described. Initially, the credit number = 6, and the CU first backs up SQN = n, C-ID, addition request number = 0, and subtraction request number = 0, and as operation instructions, no addition request, no subtraction request, and SQN. = N command is sent to S units. In S units, for example, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 3, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction based on that the bet number 3 is set. Back up the number c = 3. After creating the response, the counter values of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c are cleared to 0.

  Then, the S units, as operation responses, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 106, number of credits = 3, number of additions p = 0, number of subtraction p = 0, number of addition c = 0, number of subtraction c = 3. Send a response that the game is available to the CU. The CU calculates SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 6 + 0-3 = 3, and then corrects and backs up the number of credits. The number c cumulative total = 0 and the subtracted number c cumulative total = 3 are backed up.

After that, the exchange of commands and responses continues for a while.
After that, when the game in which the bet number 3 is set is started on the S units, the subtraction number = 3. As a result, the number of credits = 3-3 = 0. At the stage when the number of credits = 0, no credit is detected in S units. That is, the LSI 117 determines, based on the value of the credit number counter stored by itself, that the number of remaining credits is equal to or less than the number required for bet number setting. At this stage, the LSI 117 controls the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state) to prohibit the start of a new game. Specifically, the LSI 117 sends to the main control board 116 a BET-disabled signal for notifying that the bet number setting is prohibited. Receiving this, the main control board 116 invalidates the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6. If the game is being executed at the stage when no score is detected, that is, the variable display device is variably displaying, S machines continue the variable display game and prohibit the start of the next game.

  The CU backs up SQN = n + N, C-ID, addition request number p = 0, subtraction request number p = 0, addition request number c = 0, subtraction request number c = 0, and no addition request is issued as an operation instruction. The command of no subtraction request, C-ID, and SQN = n + N is transmitted to S units.

  In S units, C-ID and SQN = n + N + 1 are backed up, and the pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 0, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 3 are backed up, and the subtraction number c After creating a response including = 3, each counter value of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c is cleared to 0.

  Then, the S units, as operation responses, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, points = 106, credit number = 0, addition number p = 0, subtraction number p = 0, addition number c = 0, subtraction number c = 3. Send a game prohibition operation response to the CU. This motion response is “update information that can specify the amount of change that has been specified during the period from the transmission of the first motion response to the bet number operation invalid state”.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the credit number = 3 + 0-3 = 0, corrects the credit number to 0 and backs it up, backs up SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, and further adds up the total number p = 0 , Subtraction number p total = 0, addition number c total = 0, subtraction number c total = 6.

  In this way, the CU mainly manages the number of points and the credits, but the number of points and the credits on the S side are set only when it is determined whether to perform the game prohibition control (the bet number setting prohibition control). To use. As a result, as compared with the case where the game prohibition control is performed based on the score and credits managed and stored in the CU, the game prohibition control can be performed in real time in accordance with the fluctuations in the score and credits.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, processing when a card return operation is performed will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed when the operation instruction from the CU to the S unit and the operation response from the S unit to the CU in response to the operation instruction from the CU to the S unit in the state where the number of points is initially 500 and the number of credits is 5 Then, the CU transmits a command of prohibition request for prohibiting the game, no clear request, OFF during clear display, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID to the S units as the next operation instruction. In S units, according to the prohibition request presence instruction included in the command, the bet number operation in which the bet number cannot be set is controlled to the invalid state (game prohibited state). After that, a weight corresponding to a predetermined time of one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) or more is provided. The predetermined time is, for example, 10 seconds. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. By providing the wait time in this way, if the game has already started when the prohibition request command is received from the CU (when the variable display device is in the variable display), the game result is fixed. It prevents the card from being returned.

  During this polling, a sequence is adopted in which data indicating that preparation is being performed is repeatedly transmitted from the S units to the CU, while a prohibition request is repeatedly transmitted from the CU to the S units. May be.

  Alternatively, during this polling, the S unit transmits to the CU data indicating that it is preparing once, while the CU acknowledges that the S unit is preparing. A sequence may be adopted in which the data shown is transmitted once, and thereafter, until the game ends, the CU repeatedly sends an operation instruction that does not include any instruction.

  Alternatively, during this polling, a sequence may be adopted in which data indicating prohibition refusal is transmitted from the S units to the CU, while the prohibition request is repeatedly transmitted from the CU to the S units.

  Then, after the wait time has passed, the S-units have SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, the number of points = 500, the number of credits = 5, the number of additions p = 5, the number of subtractions p = 0, and the number of additions as operation responses. A response of c = 0, subtraction number c = 5, game prohibition, game completion ON is transmitted to the CU.

  At this time, conversion from credits to points is performed, and the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 is driven and converted to points until the number of credits is exhausted.

  The number of points transmitted at this time becomes the final number of points at the end of the game. Note that this sequence example shows a case in which no winning occurs during the wait time, and neither the addition number nor the subtraction number changes due to the winning. If a winning occurs during the wait time, the number of credits corresponding to the winning will be converted into points, and the converted points will be added and sent as "addition number p" to the CU. become.

  The CU that has received this operation response backs up SQN = n + N + 2 and the data with a clear request. Further, according to the "addition number p, subtraction number p, addition number c, subtraction number c" included in the operation response, the stored "point count, total addition number p, total subtraction number p, credit number," Each data of "total addition number c, total subtraction number c" is updated. As a result, the score at the end of the game is fixed on the CU side. As for the number of credits, since the final number of points is fixed on the CU side in this way, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the S side, and the cost of the S number is suppressed as much as possible. You can

  The CU that backs up SQN = n + N + 2 and the data with the clear request, then sends the command of clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID to the S units as operation instructions. . After that, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display indicating that the CU is being cleared (during clear display) (see FIGS. 106 and 107). This "clear request" is data for instructing the initialization of the number of S points.

  In S units, the LSI 117 transmits the display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 causes the display 51 to display the display screen that is being cleared (the screen that is being cleared).

  In this example, the CU determines the number of points at the end of the game in response to the input of the “signal requesting the end of the game” based on the operation of the return button 322. However, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is not limited to the signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates the player's fingerprint. At the time of starting the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential, and it is necessary that the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game and the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit match. A game is permitted as a condition. Furthermore, the authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is indispensable also at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the "signal for requesting the end of the game" is the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

Alternatively, a button corresponding to the return button 322 may be provided on the S side.
In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire game machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, a "game end request signal" is formed by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. Clear request is present, clear display is in progress, SQN = n + N + 2, S-units receiving the command of C-ID shift and store the game history data and C-ID updated and stored in the present storage area to the backup area. .

  Next, the S-units, as operation responses, clear rejection OFF indicating that the clear request is not rejected, SQN = 0, C-ID, number of points = 0, number of credits = 0, number of additions p = 0, number of subtraction c = A response of 0, addition number p = 0, subtraction number c = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON is transmitted to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, score points = 0, and card recording score points = 505. The card record score = 505 is a value based on the score score received immediately before the clear request.

  After that, the CU records the score = 505 on the inserted card, ejects it, and returns it to the player. Then, as an operation instruction, a command including no prohibition request, no clear request, OFF during clear display, SQN = m, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the S units. After that, as a motion response, the S-units SQN = m + 1, C-ID = 00h, score = 0, credit = 0, addition p = 0, subtraction p = 0, addition c = 0, subtraction The response of c = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. Instead of directly recording the card points on the card, the host server may store the card points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the score stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the host server, and the score stored in association with the card number received by the host server is stored. The search is performed and the score is updated to a value corresponding to the score stored in the CU. Then the CU ejects the card. In this way, both recording the card's points directly on the card and storing the points in the host server in association with the card number are collectively referred to as "associating" the points with the card. To do.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the game is interrupted.

  It is similar to the processing of the card unit and the slot machine when returning the card shown in FIG. 52. The difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for the player to temporarily suspend the game so as to finish the small use, and the player calls a clerk at the game hall to have the clerk perform a remote control operation for interrupting the game. Then, the IR light receiving unit 315 receives the infrared signal output from the remote controller, converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal, and inputs the electronic signal to the main control unit 323. In response to the prohibition request from the CU, the S console prohibits the BET operation and puts it in a state where the game cannot be played. If a prohibition request is received while the reels are spinning, a wait time (for example, 10 seconds) until the end of the game is provided as described above, and until the wait time elapses, the game is prohibited as a motion response, Game completion OFF is returned.

  Further, in the case of this game interruption processing, even if the CU detects the completion of the game, the clear request is not transmitted to the S units. As a result, in S units, data (C-ID, score, etc.) regarding the interrupted player is stored. Then, when the CU ejects the card, it ejects the card with the score 0 and returns it to the player. After that, the game of another player is prohibited during the interruption (see FIG. 46).

  Referring to FIG. 54, a process of unlocking and opening the front door 2b will be described. First, as the first operation instruction, a command including an instruction of no front door opening request and no front door opening request is transmitted from the CU to the S unit. In response to this, the S units return a normal response including the score = 500 to the CU as an operation response.

  At this stage, when the player calls a staff member in the game hall, for example, when a trouble occurs in the display of the display 51 after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R start rotating on the S unit and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R start rotating. First, the staff member at the game arcade transmits an infrared signal to the IR photosensitive unit 320 for unlocking and opening the front door 2b by operating the remote controller he / she has.

  In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs the front door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main controller 323. The CU, which has received the instruction input for opening the front door, sends a command of prohibition request, front door opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to S units as an operation instruction in order to prohibit the game and open the front door. To do.

  In response to this, the S units first control the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state) in which the bet number cannot be set. This prohibits BET operation. However, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may already be spinning at that time, and during such a game, the progress of the game itself is not stopped. Further, although the S unit prohibits the BET operation when receiving the above command, it does not immediately unlock the front door.

  For example, FIG. 54 shows a case where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are spinning at the stage when the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state) is controlled.

  Next, the S unit is provided with a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. By providing the wait time in this way, if the game has already started when the command with the prohibition request is received from the CU (when the variable display device is variably displaying), the game result is fixed. The front door 2b is prevented from being opened before the operation.

  Until the wait time elapses, the S-unit returns an operation response of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as a response until the wait time elapses. On the other hand, the CU continues to transmit the command with the prohibition request and the front door open request with respect to this.

  Eventually, it is assumed that the result of the game already in progress when the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state) is controlled is determined, and here, for example, 10 points are won. Then, as shown in FIG. 54, even in the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state), if there is a circumstance during which points or credits should be added, the number of additions from the S unit to the CU is increased. A motion response including (here, the addition number c = 10) is transmitted. That is, the S unit specifies the amount of change even when the number of points and credits changes while the game is prohibited, and transmits the amount of change to the CU. As a result, on the CU side, it becomes possible to manage the points and credits including the amount of changes in the points and credits from the game prohibited state until the game result is finalized.

  Eventually, when the wait time elapses, the S unit (LSI 117) excites the front door opening solenoid 110 to unlock the front door 2b and open the front door 2b. In addition, the bit of Bit6 in the front door development state in the game table state shown in FIG. 25 is turned on, that is, the process of turning it to "1" is performed, and thereafter, the front door 2b is closed (the detection signal from the front door closing detector 112). Keep ON until (is input). Then, the S unit returns to the CU, as an operation response, a response including a front door open refusal OFF, a C-ID, a game prohibition, and a response during development of the front door.

  If the CU does not reject the front door open request command, that is, if a response including a front door open refusal OFF response is returned, the front door 2b is determined to have been opened.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 54, according to the present embodiment, regarding the closed state of the front door 2b, which is a specific example of the front members of the S units, the command from the CU side without affecting the progress of the game. Can be canceled by.

  It should be noted that the S LSIs 117, when receiving a command with a front door opening request from the CU, determines whether the game is in progress, that is, one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating, If any one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is rotating, after all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, or if all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the winning occurs. The closed state of the front door 2b may be released after the calculation time of the points and the number of credits has elapsed.

  In this case, the S unit has information for instructing the unlocking by the lock means during the game in which the symbols are variably displayed on the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) (the front door opening request is issued). Command is received, the control for releasing the lock by the lock means is delayed until the game ends and the game is prohibited.

  Alternatively, the LSI 117 of S units determines whether or not the game is in progress when receiving a command for requesting opening of the front door from the CU, and if it is in the game, the LSI 117 does not open the front door to the CU. On the other hand, a front door open refusal ON response may be returned. That is, the S unit may accept the front door opening request only when the game is not in progress when the command with the front door opening request is received from the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a process when the power supply is activated while the CU is holding the card and an abnormality occurs in which the S units are not connected at that time will be described. The communication request between the CU and the S unit was interrupted while the card was inserted and the player was playing on the S unit, so when the CU power was restarted, the CU issued a recovery request command to the S unit. Sent to. However, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU because the S units are not connected.

  Then, as described in FIG. 31, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to the S units. If the response from S unit is not returned despite this, the second recovery request is retransmitted to S unit. If no response is returned from the S units for the second retransmission, the CU determines that there is a communication error at this stage, and the display unit 312 displays that an error has occurred due to disconnection. Control. Note that a device information request command may be transmitted instead of the recovery request.

  In this state, when the store clerk at the game arcade operates the CU by remote control to output an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced ejection signal is sent to the main controller 323. Is entered. In response to this, the CU receives the "score" of the card in which the "score" backed up by the CU is inserted (including automatically converting from the credit number to the score). In addition to clearing the “number of points”, “credit number”, and “connection time” of the CU to 0, a command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. The card reader / writer 327 that has received it ejects the card that has been taken in.

  Instead of directly recording the score on the card, the host server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the score stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the host server, and the score stored in association with the card number received by the host server is stored. The search is performed and the score is updated to a value corresponding to the score stored in the CU. Then the CU ejects the card.

  After that, the CU sends a recovery request command to the S units to restart the connection sequence (see FIG. 43). The CU determines that the connection sequence is restarted in the state where the card is inserted (state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at reconnection in FIG. 43 instead of the connection sequence at power-on in FIG. 33. To do. The number of additions p (for example, j) or the number of subtractions between the occurrence of the unconnected error in S units and the restart processing of the connection sequence (see FIG. 43) until the first operation response is transmitted by S units. The process when p (for example, r) has occurred is performed in the restart process of FIG. 43.

  Referring to FIG. 43, the CU receives the recovery response from the S units to calculate the number of points = 0 + j (the number of additions p) + r (the number of subtractions p), and the calculated result is the number of points = j + r. Back up. Then, as described in FIG. 43, the communication start request including the SQN correction ON, the score correction ON, and the SQN value and the score value is transmitted to the S units, and the SQN and the score number of the S units are transmitted. Correct the number of credits.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the processing when the operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached the S units will be described. Here, a sequence from the start of one game of 3BET to the occurrence of a prize and the addition of 15 points to the player will be exemplified.

  Upon receiving the operation instruction command from the CU, the S unit stores the current addition / subtraction number of the points and credits currently stored in the point / credit related information storage area in the previous points / credit related information storage. Backup clear processing to back up and store in the area as pre-addition and subtraction points of points and credits, and to clear the data of the current addition and subtraction points of points and credits currently stored in the points and credit related information storage area However, in the case of FIG. 56, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached S units. Therefore, the above-mentioned backup clear processing is not performed on the S units. As a result, each time a bet number is set, a subtraction number is generated, and each time an addition number is generated due to the occurrence of a prize, those data are added and stored in the current point / credit related information storage area as current point / credit related information. To do.

  First, it is assumed that, at a certain point of time, the number of points is 520 and the number of credits is 10, the S units return an action response (both the number of additions and the number of subtractions are 0) to the CU before the 3BET game is started. Then, the CU transmits a command of no request and SQN = n as an operation instruction to the S units. However, since the command does not reach the S unit, the response from the S unit is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described with reference to FIG. 31, the CU transmits the command of the same operation instruction to the S units again. When the second transmission also does not reach the S unit, the response from the S unit is not returned to the CU, and therefore the CU retransmits the same operation instruction for the second time. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and addition update of "1" is not performed. In the meantime, the 3BET game starts and then the game ends.

  When the command reaches the S number in the second retransmission, the 3BET game is started / finished on the S number, as described above, until the operation instruction is reached, depending on the bet number setting. The subtraction number c is 3 and the addition number c corresponding to the winning is 15. Therefore, the S units store the data of the subtraction number c = 3 as the current credit related information at the start of the game, and further store the data of the addition number c = 15 as the current credit related information at the end of the game. Then, using the stored addition number c = 15 and subtraction number c = 3, the current credit number = 10 + 15−3 = 22 is calculated, and SQN = n + 1, credit number = 500, addition as the operation response. The response of the operation response of the number c = 15 and the subtraction number c = 3 is transmitted to the CU. Since the credit number does not exceed the upper limit of 25, the number of points does not change, and the addition number p = 0 and the subtraction number p = 0.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of credits = 10 + 15 (the number of additions c) −3 (the number of subtractions c) = 22, and modifies the number of credits to 22 and stores it. On the other hand, the number of points = 520 + 0 (the number of additions p) −0 (the number of subtractions p) = 520 is calculated, and the number of points is corrected and stored in 520.

  As described above, the S-units have a number of points and points that accompany the progress of the game while the state in which the operation instruction for instructing the transmission of the operation response cannot be received even after the lapse of a predetermined period after the initial operation response is transmitted. The stored change amount is updated based on the change amount of the credit. Then, when the operation instruction is received, the updated amount of change in the points and credits is transmitted as the number of additions and the number of subtractions.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, processing when the operation response from the S units (response to no request operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 57, since the command from the CU is input to the S units, the above-described backup clear processing is executed, but the SQN value of the command transmitted from the CU to the S units next time. Is the same as the value of the previous SQN, the S unit judges that the response of the operation response sent to the CU is a retransmission due to the fact that it has not reached the CU, and it is the score / credit related information last time. The current addition / subtraction number of points and credits as current point / credit related information is added to the data of the previous addition / subtraction number of points and credits without clearing to 0.

  Note that in FIG. 57, a winning response occurs after the first game with 3 bets is started, 10 points are awarded to the player, and then the operation response from the S unit has not been received until the stage when the second game with 3 bets is started. An example of a sequence in the case of arrival is shown.

  Specifically, with the current number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 18, the CU transmits a command of no request and SQN = n to the S units as an operation instruction. On the S-side receiving this, a 3BET operation is detected, and at that stage, data of the addition number c = 0, the subtraction number c = 3, and the credit number = 15 is generated. In this case, the S units store the data of the addition number c = 0 and the subtraction number c = 3 in the pre-addition number c and the pre-subtraction number c as backup data and SQN = n + 1 as the backup storage command, and the operation response command including them. And sends a response of SQN = n + 1, credit number = 15, addition number c = 0, and subtraction number c = 3 to the CU. In addition, the S-series clears the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number of the points and the credits as the current points / credit related information. At this point, since the upper limit of the number of credits, 25, has not been exceeded, the number of points, the added number p, and the subtracted number p do not change.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as the previous time, that is, no request and a command of SQN = n to the S units.

  On the side of the S machines that received it, a prize equivalent to 10 points has occurred, and at that stage, data of the number of additions c = 10, the number of subtractions c = 0, and the number of credits = 25 are generated. For S units, since the SQN of the operation instruction command received this time and the SQN of the operation instruction command received the previous time have the same value of n, the response of the transmitted operation response does not reach the CU. It is judged that it is, and the points as the previous points and credit related information and the points as the current points and credit related information for those data without clearing the data of the number of previous additions and the number of previous subtractions of credits Also, the data of the current number of credits and the number of current credits are added and backed up. As a result, the pre-addition number c = 0 + 10 = 10 and the pre-subtraction number c = 3 + 0 = 3.

  After creating the response of the operation response composed of these data, the S units clear the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number of the points and credits to zero. Then, as an operation response, the S-units send a response of SQN = n + 1, credit number = 25, addition number c = 10, subtraction number = 3 to the CU. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU again transmits the same operation command (no request, SQN = n) command to the S units.

  In response to this, the S unit determines that both the previous SQN and the current SQN are n and has not changed, and detects that the response of the operation response is a retransmission because it has not reached the CU. To do. At this stage, on the S-side, the 3BET operation for starting the second game is detected, and the data of the addition number c = 0, the subtraction number c = 3, and the credit number = 22 are generated.

  In this case, the S-units have the current points and credits related information for the points and credits as the current points and credits related information without clearing the data of the points previously added and the credits subtracted as the points and credits related information. Add up and back up the data of the current addition and subtraction points and credits. As a result, the pre-addition number c = 10 + 0 = 10 and the pre-subtraction number c = 3 + 3 = 6.

  After creating the response of the operation response composed of these data, the S units clear the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number of the points and credits to zero. Then, as the operation response, the S units transmit a response of SQN = n + 1, credit number = 22, addition number c = 10, subtraction number c = 6 to the CU.

  Since the response of this operation response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the credit number = 18 + 10−6 = 22, and corrects and stores the credit number data in 22.

  As described above, when the operation response transmitted earlier does not reach the CU, the S units do not retransmit the operation response which has not yet been reached and then transmit the next operation response, but the information which has not been reached. The information after summing up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, in the gaming device, it becomes possible to collect information regarding the number of points and the number of credits reliably and efficiently. In the example of FIG. 57, the case where the operation response from the S units has not reached once has been described, but if the operation response does not reach twice, the operation response transmitted to the third time is Will include the summed value obtained by summing the information on the operation responses transmitted the second time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the processing when the operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached the S units will be described. At this point, the number of points is 520, the number of credits is 6, and the number of subtraction requests p = 6 and the number of addition requests c = 6 when there is a withdrawal operation from points to credits. First, the CU gives an operation instruction. A command including data of addition request present, SQN = n, subtraction request number p = 6 and addition request number c = 6 is transmitted to S units.

  However, since the command does not reach the S unit, the response from the S unit is not returned to the CU. As a result, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction as described above. Since the re-transmission command also did not reach the S units, the corresponding response from the S units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, similarly to the above, the CU retransmits the command of the same operation instruction for the second time. This second retransmission command reaches S units. In the period in which the command of the operation instruction from the CU has not arrived, in S units, addition / subtraction data is added to the current addition / subtraction number as the current score related information and stored without performing the above-mentioned backup clear processing.

  Then, the S units calculate the current number of points = 520-6 = 514, and also calculate the number of credits = 6 + 6 + 10 (current addition number) -3 (current subtraction number) = 19 to obtain the current point score data and Credit number data is set to 514 and 19, respectively, and a response of an operation response is created. Specifically, in the S units, there is a movement of the pseudo balls corresponding to the number of points = 6, and as the operation response, addition refusal is OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 514, the number of additions p = 0, and the number of subtraction p = 6. , The number of credits = 19, the number of additions c = 16, and the number of subtraction c = 3 are transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of points = 520-6 = 514 and the number of credits = 6 + 6 + 10-3 = 22, and stores the number of points data in 514 and the number of credits data in 22.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the processing when the operation response (response to the addition request) from the S units has not arrived will be described. Here, a case will be described in which with the initial number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 6, an operation for playing a game is performed by deducting from points to credits, and an addition request c of 10 points is generated. Further, here is a sequence in the case where a winning is not generated after the first game of 3BET is started on the S side, and subsequently a winning of 10 points is generated after the second game of 3BET is started. To illustrate.

  First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands of addition request existence, SQN = n, subtraction request number p = 10, and addition request number c = 10 to S units. On the S-side receiving this, a subtraction number c = 3 occurs in order to start the first game with a bet number of 3. Therefore, on the S-side, as the stored current score / credit related information, the addition number is added. Data of p = 0, subtraction number p = 10, addition number c = 10, subtraction number c = 3, and SQN = n + 1 are backed up and stored in the previous points / credit related information storage area, and points = 520- 10 = 510, the number of credits = 6 + 10−3 = 13 are calculated, and the number of points = 510 and the number of credits = 13 are stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the action response, the S units clear the storage data of the current point / credit related information storage area to 0, and as the action response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 510, addition The response of the number p = 0, the subtraction number p = 10, the credit number = 13, the addition number c = 10, and the subtraction number c = 3 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the command of the same operation instruction as the previous one to the S units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the S units without adding and updating the SQN by “1”.

  In S units, since the SQN has received the command and has the same value of n as the previous time, it is detected that the response sent was a resend because it did not reach the CU, and subtracted to the received command. Although the request number p = 10 and the addition request number c = 10 are included, the point addition and update based on the command is not performed. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  Also, on the S-side, a subtraction number c = 3 occurs at that stage in order to start the second game with a bet number of 3. Therefore, on the S-side, the previous score / credit related information storage area is stored. The data currently stored in the point / credit related information storage area, that is, the addition number c = 0 and the subtraction number c = 3 are added to the previously stored previous point / credit related information and stored. Then, the number of points = 510 + 0-0 = 510 and the number of credits = 13 + 0-3 = 10 are calculated, and the number of points is corrected to 510 and the number of credits is corrected to 10 and then stored.

  After that, the S unit creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal is OFF, SQN = n + 1, points = 510, additions p = 0, subtraction p = 10, credits = 10, additions c = 10, subtraction c = 6. Is sent to the CU as a response.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the command of the same operation instruction for the second time.

  In S units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the subtraction request number p = 10 and the addition request number c = 10 are received, the addition update is not performed accordingly, and the addition update is double-executed according to the addition request. Do not do. Further, at this stage, the number of additions c = 10 is generated because the second game is won on the S-side. Therefore, on the S side, similarly to the above, storage in the previous points / credits related information storage area, calculation of points and credits, generation of a response, and zero clearing of the current points / credits related information storage area were performed. After that, as the operation response, the response of addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, score = 510, addition p = 0, subtraction p = 10, credit = 20, addition c = 10, subtraction c = 6 Send to CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of points = 520 + 0−10 = 510, the number of credits =, corrects the number of points to 549, and stores it.

  As described above, in S units, even if the command including the addition request number data transmitted from the CU is received, if the SQN value included in the command is the same as the SQN value of the previous command, Judges that it is a retransmission, does not judge that it is an additional addition request, does not update the addition of the points, and does not double-execute the addition update according to the addition request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the processing when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU does not reach the S units will be described. The case where the credit settlement button operation is performed with the initial score = 520 and credit = 8 will be described. First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, a command with subtraction request, SQN = n, addition request number p = 8, and subtraction request number c = 8 to S units. However, since the command did not reach the S unit, the response from the S unit is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU again sends the same operation command command to the S units. This resend command also did not reach the S unit, so the response from the S unit is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU retransmits the command of the same operation instruction for the second time. This second retransmission command reaches S units.

  In the S units, the current / credit credit point related information storage area is generated every time the number of points and the number of credits to be added and the number of credits to be subtracted are generated during the period in which the command of the operation instruction from the CU has not arrived, as in the process of FIG. Store those data in. For example, in FIG. 60, it is assumed that the addition number c = 10 and the subtraction number c = 0. Then, at the stage when the command of the third operation instruction is finally input to the S units, the score = 520-0 + 8 = 528 and the credit number = 8-8 + 10 = 10 are calculated, and the score = 528 and the credit number. = 10 is stored. Then, as the operation response, the response of subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 528, number of additions p = 8, number of subtractions p = 0, number of credits = 10, number of additions c = 10, number of subtraction c = 8 To the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates points = 520-10 + 0 = 510 and the number of credits = 8-8 + 10 = 10, and the points are corrected to 510 and the credits are corrected and stored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a process when the operation response (response to the subtraction request) from S units does not reach the CU will be described. Here, an example of a sequence in the case where a prize with 10 points is generated after the game with 3 bets starts on the S side is illustrated.

  The case where the credit settlement button operation occurs assuming that the initial score is 520 and the credit is 8 will be described. First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, a command with a subtraction request, SQN = n, an addition request number p = 8, and a subtraction request number c = 8 to S units. Therefore, on the S side, the data of the number of additions c = 0, the number of subtractions c = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as the current score / credit related information is backed up and stored in the score / credit related information storage area last time. At the same time, the number of points = 520-0 + 8 = 528 and the number of credits = 8-8 = 0 are calculated to store the number of points = 528 and the number of credits = 0, respectively.

  Then, after creating the response of the action response, the S units clear the storage data of the current points / credit related information storage area to 0, and as the action response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, points = 528, addition The response of the number p = 8, the subtraction number p = 0, the credit number = 0, the addition number c = 0, and the subtraction number c = 8 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the command of the same operation instruction as the previous one to the S units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the S units without adding and updating the SQN by “1”.

  In S units, since the SQN has received the command and has the same value of n as the previous time, it is detected that the response sent was a resend because it did not reach the CU, and subtracted to the received command. Although the requested number c = 8 is included, the credit subtraction update based on the command is not performed. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  Further, in S, since the command resend is detected, similarly to the processing of FIG. 57, the current holding point / credit related information already stored in the previous holding point / credit related information storage area is currently held. The data stored in the point / credit related information storage area, that is, the addition number p = 8, the subtraction number p = 0, the addition number c = 0, and the subtraction number c = 8 are added and stored. The number of points = 520 + 8 = 528 and the number of credits = 8-8 = 0 are calculated, and the number of points is corrected to 528 and the number of credits is corrected to 0, and then stored.

  After that, the S unit creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition refusal is OFF, SQN = n + 1, points = 528, additions p = 8, subtractions p = 0, credits = 0, additions c = 0, subtractions c = 8 , Is sent to the CU as a response.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the command of the same operation instruction for the second time.

  In S units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, while receiving the subtraction request number c = 8, the subtraction update accompanying it is not performed, and the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not double-executed. Then, in the same manner as described above, the operation response is performed after the previous point storage / credit related information storage area is stored, the number of points and credits are calculated, a response is generated, and the current point / credit related information storage area is cleared to zero. As a result, the response of addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 528, number of additions p = 8, number of subtractions p = 0, number of credits = 0, number of additions c = 0, number of subtractions = 8 is transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of points = 520-0 + 8 = 528 and the number of credits = 8-8 = 0, and the number of points is corrected to 528 and the number of credits is corrected to 0 and stored.

  As described above, in S units, even if the command including the addition request number data transmitted from the CU is received, if the SQN value included in the command is the same as the SQN value of the previous command, Judges that it is a retransmission, does not judge that it is an additional subtraction request, does not perform subtraction update of the holding points, and does not perform double execution of subtraction update according to the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a process in the case where the S units return a response of addition rejection in response to the CU addition request will be described. Here, an example of a sequence in which a credit conversion operation from the points is generated on the CU side and a new game is not started after that is illustrated. Further, here, it is assumed that the initial score is 520 and the credit is 5.

  First, as an operation instruction from the CU, a command of no request, SQN = n, and C-ID is transmitted to the S units. On the S-side receiving the request, since there is no request for addition or subtraction of points and credits, the number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 5 are calculated, and the number of points, the number of credits, the number of additions p, and the number of subtraction p are calculated. , The addition number c, the data of the subtraction number c, SQN = n + 1, and an operation response including C-ID are returned to the CU. The CU calculates a score based on the action response and corrects the score to 520 and the number of credits = 5.

  Next, the credit button 421 is pressed, and the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, a subtraction request number p = 10, and an addition request number c = 10 to the S units. . On S machines, addition refusal is ON for some reason, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, score = 520, addition number p = 0, subtraction number p = 0, credit number = 5, addition number c = The response of the operation response including 0 and the subtraction number c = 0 is returned to the CU. In this case, the point deduction processing by the credit button operation is interrupted by the addition refusal. On the CU side, the number of points is updated to 520, and the balance remains 1,000 yen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, processing in the case where an addition request exceeding the upper limit of the number of credits is made will be described. Here, an example of a sequence in which a prize is generated on the S-side and a prize is subsequently generated is illustrated.

  First, assuming that the number of points is 500 and the number of credits is 20 at the beginning, the number c of requests for addition c = 5 is generated due to the generation of a prize. Therefore, the S units calculate the number of points = 500, the number of credits = 20 + 5 = 25, and the number of points = 500, the number of credits = 25, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of additions c = 5, An operation response including the data of the subtraction number c = 0, SQN = 1, and C-ID is returned to the CU.

  In the CU, the number of points = 500 and the number of credits = 20 + 5 = 25 are calculated, and the number of points is corrected to 500 and the number of credits is corrected to 25 and stored. Further, since the number of credits has reached the upper limit of 25 for the next winning, the number p of requests to add points to the score p = 10 is generated here.

  Therefore, S machines calculate the number of points = 500 + 10 = 510, the number of credits = 25, and the number of points = 510, the number of credits = 25, the number of additions p = 10, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of additions c = 0, An operation response including the data of the subtraction number c = 0, SQN = 1, and C-ID is returned to the CU. In the CU, the number of points = 500 + 10 = 510 and the number of credits = 25 are calculated, and the number of points is corrected to 510 and the number of credits is corrected to 25 and stored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, description will be given of processing in the case where S units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request. An example of a sequence in the case where 10 points are won immediately after the return button is pressed will be described.

  When the return button 322 is pressed with the initial number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 10, the CU instructs the S units as an operation instruction, with a prohibition request and without a clearing request, as in the process of FIG. The command including the data of is transmitted to S units. In response to this, the S machines control the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state) in which the bet number cannot be set, and also return the operation response of prohibition refusal OFF, game prohibition, game completion OFF to the S machines. . After that, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. Then, when the wait time has elapsed, the S-units transmit a response of game prohibition and game completion ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU determines that the S machines are in the game prohibited state.

  After that, the CU updates the score and the credit, and then transmits the command for the operation request of the clear request and ON during the clear display to the S units. Upon receiving this, the S-units transmit to the CU a response indicating that clear rejection is ON indicating that the clear cannot be performed for some reason. The CU detects clear rejection by this response. Then, the CU transmits a command including a clear request not issued to the S units as an operation instruction, and performs a clear cancel process. The clear cancellation process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation has been performed but cannot be cleared and canceled” on the display 312.

  In response to this operation instruction, the S unit determines that the clear processing corresponding to the return operation has been canceled. Then, the S unit transmits an operation response including clear rejection OFF to the CU. After that, the normal polling of the operation instruction and the operation response is performed between the CU and the S unit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a description will be given of the processing in the case where the S units return a response of permission rejection in response to the game permission request of the CU. Initially, the number of points is 520, the number of credits is 10, and in a trouble state in which some game prohibition factor has occurred, the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are CU and S when the game of the S machines is prohibited. It is assumed that the game prohibition factor has been resolved at the stage of "game prohibition factor elimination" in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a command of game permission request and SQN = n + 2 to the S units as operation instructions. However, for some reason, the S unit returns to the CU an operation response command including a state in which the game cannot be continued, that is, permission rejection ON for rejecting the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request as an operation instruction to the S units until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a process will be described in the case where the S machines return a response of refusal of prohibition to the game prohibition request of the CU. Initially, the number of points is 520 and the number of credits is 10, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and the "game prohibition factor occurrence" in FIG. 66 is displayed. It is assumed that a game prohibition factor such as operation of the return button 322 occurs at the stage. At this stage, the CU transmits a command of game prohibition request and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the S units as operation instructions. In S units, the response of the operation response including the prohibition refusal ON for refusing the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the S units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a process will be described in the case where the S-unit returns a front door open refusal response to the CU front door open request. Here, an example of a sequence in the case where a winning with 10 points is generated is illustrated.

  When the input of the opening instruction of the front door 2b is detected with the initial score = 520 and credit = 10, although not shown in FIG. 67, like the process of FIG. While the command of prohibition request and front door open request is transmitted to the S machines, the S machines receive the command and set the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state), and as the operation response, prohibition refusal OFF and A response including a game prohibition is transmitted to the CU. Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 54, the S-series machine is provided with a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time. During this period, the number of additions = 10 is generated due to the occurrence of winning on the S side, and an operation response including the number of additions = 10 is transmitted from the S number to the CU. After that, even during the wait time, the CU sends a command with a prohibition request and a front door open request to the S units.

  However, in response to this, the S unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a front door open refusal ON which refuses to unlock and open the front door 2b for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects the refusal of opening the front door, sends a command including the front door open request not issued to the S units as an operation instruction, and executes the normal polling after performing the process of canceling the front door opening. . The process of canceling the opening of the front door is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as "The front door cannot be opened" on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a recovery process at the time of power failure on the CU side after reaching the operation response regarding the addition / subtraction data will be described. Here, a sequence will be exemplified in the case where the game ends without generating a prize after a new game of 3BET has started after a prize of 10 points has been generated.

  The CU transmits an operation instruction command to the S units with the initial score = 520, credit = 1, and SQN = n. On the side of the S machines that received it, the number of additions c = 10 has occurred due to the occurrence of the winning, and therefore, as for the operation of the S machines, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of points = 520, and the number of additions p = An operation response including addition / subtraction data of 0, subtraction number p = 0, credit number = 11, addition number c = 10, subtraction number c = 0 is transmitted to the CU. When the motion response reaches the CU, the CU modifies the points and credits to 520 and 11, respectively. If the power supply to the CU is cut off at that stage, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the S units thereafter.

  In this case, as described with reference to FIG. 32, the S-unit determines that the communication is disconnected when it cannot receive the command for 4 seconds or more, and transits to the unconnected state and the game prohibited state (“play stop in the drawing”). "). However, as shown in FIG. 68, the subtraction number c = 3 has already been set when the power is cut off, and a new game is started. In this case, the progress itself of the newly started game is not stopped. As a result, the subtraction data is stored in the current score / credit related information storage area based on the subtraction number c = 3, and accordingly, the score = 52 + 0-0 = 520 and the credit = 11 + 0-3 = 8 are calculated. Then, the score = 520 and the credit = 8 are stored.

  Next, when the power supply to the CU is restored and activated, the communication control IC sequence is first performed as in the case of the process of FIG. Next, after chip ID authentication is performed between the CU and the S unit, a recovery request command and a recovery response response are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-mentioned recovery data stored on the S side is transmitted to the CU side.

  In S units, the recovery data is SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of previous additions p = 0, the number of previous subtractions p = 0, the number of previous additions c = 10, the number of previous subtractions c = 0, and the current number. The number of points currently owned = 520, the number of current additions p = 0, the number of current deductions p = 0, the number of credits = 8, the number of current additions = 0, the number of current deductions = 3 are stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response. To do.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, it is determined that the SQN included in the recovery data on the S side and the SQN stored on the CU side match, and the recovery data sent in the recovery response is used as the basis. Perform processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of points = 520 (number of points of CU) +0 (current addition number p) -0 (current subtraction number p) = 520, addition number p total = 0, subtraction number p total = 0. On the other hand, the number of credits = 11 (the number of credits of CU) +0 (current addition number c) −3 (current subtraction number c) = 8, the addition number c total + = 10, and the subtraction number c total + = 3.

  It should be noted that in FIG. 68, the case where the game ends without a prize is generated after a new game with 3BET is started after the prize of 10 points is generated has been described as an example. However, immediately after the start of a new game with 3BET, "disconnection detection (play stop)" in FIG. 68 may occur, the bet number cannot be operated, and then the winning may occur.

  In such a case, the recovery data is generated including the points added by the winning that occurs after the "cutting detection (play stop)". For example, if the prize is 10 points, the “current number” of the “recovery data” in FIG. 68 is “current addition number c = 10” and “current credit number = 8 + 10”.

  Hereinafter, the recovery will be further described. In any case, the external output information (the bet number setting information, the reel start information, the internal winning situation information, the first winning situation information, the first winning situation information, the first winning situation information, the first winning situation information, the first winning situation information, and the like shown in FIG. -Third stop operation information, first to third stop information, result confirmation information), the recovery data is generated including the external output information according to the change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a recovery process when a power failure occurs on the CU side before arrival of an operation instruction will be described. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 points are won after one game of 3BET is started will be exemplified.

  With the initial score = 520 and credit = 4, the S units that have received the command of the operation instruction have SQN = n + 1, C-ID, score = 520, addition p = 0, subtraction p as the operation response. = 0, the number of credits = 1, the number of additions c = 0, and the number of subtractions c = 3 are transmitted to the CU. Along with that, the CU corrects the number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 1. After that, the CU transmits a command of no request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID as an operation instruction to the S units. When the command does not reach the S unit and the power is cut off in the CU immediately after that, the S unit cannot receive the command for 4 seconds or more after transmitting the last response, as in the process of FIG. 32. In this case, it is determined that the communication is disconnected and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the game is prohibited. However, as shown in FIG. 69, if the game has already started when the power is cut off, the progress of the already started game is not stopped. As a result, in the example of FIG. 69, 10 points are won as a result of the game that has already started, and the added number c = 10. The memory based on the added number is currently stored in the score / credit related information storage area, and accordingly, the score = 520 + 0-0 = 520, the credit = 4 + 10-3 = 11 is calculated, and the score = 520, The number of credits = 11 is stored.

  Next, when the power supply is restored in the CU and the CU is activated, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received by the CU in the same manner as the process of FIG. The platform will do it.

  In S units, the recovery data is SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of additions c = 0, the number of previous subtractions c = 3, the current number of credits = 11, the number of current additions c. = 10 and the current subtraction number c = 0 are stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being sent, and the SQN on the CU side is one step ahead of the S side, so the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Perform processing. Specifically, the number of credits = 1 (the number of credits of CU) +10 (current addition number c) -0 (current subtraction number c) = 11, the addition number c total = 10, and the subtraction number c total = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a recovery process when the power supply is cut off on the CU side before the operation response regarding the addition / subtraction data is reached will be described. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 points are won after one game of 3BET is started will be exemplified.

  In FIG. 70, with the initial number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 4, the first operation instruction and the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and then the second operation instruction is transmitted to the S units. , SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of points = 520, addition number p = 0, subtraction number p = 0, credit number = 1, addition number c = 0, subtraction number c = 0 Have been sent to.

  However, the second operation response does not reach the CU, and the power is cut off in the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the operation response. In this case, the S unit detects the communication disconnection and puts it in the game prohibited state unless a command is transmitted 4 seconds after the second operation response is transmitted.

  Next, when the power is cut off in the CU and the system is activated, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S similarly to the process of FIG. The platform will do it.

  In S units, the recovery data is SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of previous additions p = 0, the number of previous subtractions p = 0, the number of previous additions c = 0, the number of previous subtractions c = 0, the current number. As a number, the current number of points = 520, the current number of additions p = 0, the current number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 11, the current number of additions c = 10, the current number of subtractions c = 0 are stored, and CU is stored as a recovery response. Send to.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is one behind the S side, the process of correcting the backup value is performed based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of points = 520 (number of points of CU) +0 (current addition number p) +0 (current addition number p) -0 (current subtraction number p) -0 (current subtraction number p) = 520, addition number It is corrected to p cumulative total = 0 (current addition number p) +0 (current addition number p) and subtraction number p cumulative value = 0 (current subtraction number p) +0 (current subtraction number p).

  On the other hand, the number of credits = 1 (the number of credits of the CU) +0 (the number of previous additions c) +10 (the number of current additions c) -0 (the number of previous subtractions c) -0 (the number of current subtractions c) = 11, the total of the addition c + = It is corrected to 0 (pre-addition number c) +10 (current addition number c) and cumulative subtraction c + = 0 (pre-subtraction number c) +0 (current subtraction number c).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the control contents when the communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of the power failure of the CU side shown in FIG. 68. (A) shows the case where the CU has been replaced with a new CU and has become inconsistent, and (b) shows the case where S units have been replaced with new S units and have become inconsistent.

  For example, a CU breaks down and power is cut off, and a defective CU is often replaced with a new CU in a game arcade. In a game arcade, multiple CUs are aged in a unit stocker. This aging is a standby state in which a higher-level server is connected. FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which a defective CU is replaced with a CU that is aged in the unit stocker, the S unit is connected to the CU, and the unit is restarted. In this case, based on the device information response sent from the S units, it is determined that the connected party (S units) is different, and the recovery data of the S units is not used for the point correction. In this case, since the S console displays the untransmitted data when the CU is not connected, if there is untransmitted data, the clerk at the game hall manually corrects the number of points of the card with the POS. Specifically, by displaying a maintenance screen on the S side on the display unit 51, it is possible to confirm the untransmitted data to the CU, and if the untransmitted data is displayed, it is artificially performed by a clerk at the game hall. Perform hand correction. This prevents the player from suffering a loss.

  Instead of this manual correction, automatic correction may be performed under certain conditions as indicated by a broken line. A modified example of this automatic correction will be described below.

  First, the CU receives the recovery response including the C-ID and temporarily stores the C-ID. In that state, wait for the card to be inserted, and at the stage when the card is inserted, read the C-ID recorded in the card and send it as the C-ID of the inserted card and the recovery response. It is determined whether the C-ID and the C-ID match, and if they match, the following correction processing is performed.

Number of credits = 8, total number of additions c = 0, total number of subtractions c = 3
When the C-ID determination results do not match, a process of transmitting the current score included in the recovery response to the upper server 801 is performed. At that time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. The upper server 801 that has received this backup-stores the received current score in association with the C-ID. When the determination result of this C-ID becomes inconsistent, the player is playing the game while the player is playing the game while the CU is broken and replaced with a new CU that is aged. This is a case where the player gives up on continuing and another player inserts a card to start a game after the replacement work is completed. In such a case, it is necessary to make up for some loss for the player who has given up on continuing the game during the replacement work. A player who gives up the continuation of such a game causes the upper-level server 801 to read the C-ID of the membership card owned by the player and discharges the current backed-up points as a savings medal in association with the membership card. However, it will be possible to exchange prizes. In addition, after the player who has given up on the continuation of the game leaves the game hall once and then the leaving player returns to the game hall again, the current server 801 can be used for several days in order to compensate for the loss. The player backs up the number of points, and the player who returns to the store causes the higher-level server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the player and discharges the current number of points backed up in association with the member card. Alternatively, it may be possible to exchange prizes.

  The condition for automatically correcting the backup value may be a condition that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed in addition to the C-ID matching determination. In other words, since the work of replacing the defective CU with a new CU and connecting it is completed in about 10 minutes, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) when the replacement work can be sufficiently executed, the card is Even if the C-ID is inserted and it is determined that the C-IDs match, the backup data may be controlled not to be automatically corrected.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and can be communicated with, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, the unit stocker sends the stocker ID, the score, and the C-ID to the upper server 801, and The new CU connected to the S units transmits the data such as the number of points corrected based on the recovery data from the S units to the upper server 801, and the upper server 801 collates the data of the both points and the like. You may control so that it may be confirmed whether it corresponds. If they do not match, abnormality determination is performed and predetermined abnormality processing such as abnormality notification is performed.

  Further, instead of the CU performing the data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from the S units, the recovery data may be downloaded from the upper server 801 and the CU may perform the data correction. Specifically, the CU regularly transmits data such as the number of points and the C-ID to the upper server 801, backup-stores it in the upper server 801, exchanges it with a new CU, and connects to the S unit. When the C-ID included in the later recovery response matches the C-ID recorded in the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C-ID is transmitted. You may make it download the recovery data, such as the number of points, backed up and stored corresponding to the ID, and store it in the CU.

  FIG. 71 (b) shows a case where the S unit is replaced with a new one and connected after the power is turned off. In that case, a start-up process is first performed, and a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, an authentication response, a recovery request, and a recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the S units of the connection partner are different based on the device information response, and does not use the recovery data of the S units for point correction. The recovery data of the original S unit, which was installed before being replaced with the new S unit, is manually corrected by the POS with the help of the clerk at the game hall.

  FIG. 72 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of power failure in the CU shown in FIG. 69. In the control of FIG. 72 as well, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 71 is executed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 73 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the power supply to the CU side shown in FIG. 70 is lost. In the control of FIG. 73 as well, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 71 is executed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a recovery process when the power is cut off on the CU side before the addition request arrives will be described. Here, a sequence from the start of one game with 3 BETs to the occurrence of a prize and the award of 10 points to the player is illustrated.

  Initially, the number of points = 0, the number of credits = 3, the prepaid balance is 1000 yen, and a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and the S units, and the added number c = 0 generated during that time. The lending button 321 is pressed when the credit number becomes 0 based on the subtraction number c = 3.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of addition requests p = 25, and transmits a command including an addition request present, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and the number of addition requests p = 25 as operation instructions to S units. When this command does not reach the S unit, the S unit detects disconnection and puts it in the game prohibited state at a stage where the command is not received after the last response is transmitted for 4 seconds. Therefore, the lending request is eventually canceled without moving or detecting the pseudo balls. Also on the CU side, since the pseudo balls are not moved and detected, the holding points do not change.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 31, when there is no response from the S units due to the non-arrival of the command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is made even after the second retransmission. Is not returned, a communication error (communication interruption) is detected, and 5 seconds after that, the reconnection sequence is started.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the S unit execute the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and transmit / receive the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG. 43.

  In S units, SQN = n + 1, C-ID as recovery data, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 0, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 3, current As a number, the number of points currently held = 0, the number of current additions p = 0, the number of current subtractions p = 0, the number of current credits = 10, the number of current additions c = 10, the number of current subtractions c = 0 are stored, and as a recovery response Send to CU.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is ahead of the SQN on the CU by one, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of points = 0 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (current addition number) −0 (current subtraction number) = 0, the addition number p cumulative total = 0, and the subtraction number p cumulative total = 0. On the other hand, the number of credits = 0 (the number of credits of CU) +10 (current addition number c) −0 (current subtraction number c) = 10, the addition number c total = 10, and the subtraction number c total = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a recovery process when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request will be described. It should be noted that, here, an example of a sequence in the case where a winning of 10 points is generated after the game of 3BET is started in the middle is illustrated.

  Initially, the number of points = 0, the number of credits = 3, the prepaid balance = 1000 yen, and after the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S unit, the lending button 321 is pressed. There is. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and the number of addition requests p = 25, and as an operation instruction, sends a command of addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and number of addition requests p = 25 to S units. Send.

  In response to this, on the S unit side, a subtraction number c = 3 is generated in order to start a game with a bet number of 3. Therefore, on the S unit side, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, and score points as an operation response. = 25, the number of additions p = 25, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 0, the number of additions c = 0, and the number of subtraction c = 3 are transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the CU performs the operation response process according to the response, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 32, in S units, when the command cannot be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the game prohibited state is set. In addition, on the S side, the number of additions = 10 has occurred due to the occurrence of a prize in the meantime, the memory of the current point related information storage area is updated, and the number of credits = 0 + 10 = 10 is calculated and the number of credits = 10 is stored. At this time, the score is still 25.

  Next, when the power is cut off in the CU and the system is activated, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S similarly to the process of FIG. The platform will do it.

  In S units, the recovery data is SQN = n + 3, C-ID, and the previous count is the pre-addition number p = 0, the pre-subtraction number p = 0, the pre-addition number c = 0, the pre-subtraction number c = 3, and the present The current number of points = 25, current credit number = 10, current addition number p = 25, current subtraction number p = 0, current addition number c = 10, current subtraction number c = 0 are stored, and as a recovery response Send to CU.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is one behind the S unit, a process of correcting the backup value is performed based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of points = 0 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (the number of previous additions p) +25 (the number of current additions p) -0 (the number of previous subtractions p) -0 (the number of current subtractions p) = 25, the number of additions It is corrected to p cumulative total = 0 (pre-addition number p) +25 (current addition number p) and subtraction number p cumulative total = 0 (pre-subtraction number p) +0 (current subtraction number p).

  On the other hand, the number of credits = 3 (the number of credits of CU) +0 (the number of previous additions c) +10 (the number of current additions c) -3 (the number of previous subtractions c) -0 (the number of current subtractions c) = 10, the cumulative number of additions c = It is corrected to 0 (pre-addition number c) +10 (current addition number c), subtraction number c cumulative = 3 (pre-subtraction number c) +0 (current subtraction number c).

  FIG. 76 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of the occurrence of power failure in the CU shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 76, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 71 is executed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of power failure in the CU side shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 77, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 71 is executed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a recovery process when the power is cut off on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached will be described. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 points are won after one game of 3BET is started will be exemplified.

  With the initial number of points = 520 and credit = 10, a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and the number of credits = When a subtraction request p of 300 is generated due to a wagon service request or the like at the stage of 7, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the subtraction request number p = 300, and there is a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID. , The command of the subtraction request number p = 300 is transmitted to S units.

  If this command does not reach the S unit, the S unit detects disconnection and puts it in the game prohibited state at a stage where the command has not been received since the last response was transmitted for 4 seconds.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 31, when there is no response from the S units due to the non-arrival of the command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is made even after the second retransmission. Is not returned, a communication error (communication interruption) is detected, and 5 seconds after that, the reconnection sequence is started.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and the S unit execute the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit / receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the device information request, the device information response, the authentication request, the authentication response, the recovery request, the recovery response ...

  In S units, SQN = n + 1, C-ID as recovery data, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 0, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 3, current As a number, the present number of points = 520, the current addition number p = 0, the current subtraction number p = 0, the credit number = 17, the current addition number c = 10, the current subtraction number c = 0 are stored, and the CU is stored as a recovery response. Send to.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is one step ahead of the SQN on the S side, so it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed on the S side, and it has been sent in the recovery response. Perform processing to correct the backup value based on the recovery data. Specifically, the number of points = 520 (number of points of CU) +0 (current number of additions) -0 (current number of subtractions) = 520, the total number of additions p = 0, and the total number of subtractions p = 0.

  On the other hand, the number of credits = 7 (the number of credits of the CU) +10 (current addition number) −0 (current subtraction number) = 17, the addition number c cumulative total = 10, and the subtraction number c cumulative total = 0.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the S units based on the value of SQN, so that the subtraction request p of 300 is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery processing. Also, the subtraction request number p = 300 is not subtracted from the score.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a recovery process when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the subtraction request arrives will be described. Here, an example of a sequence in which a game with 3 BETs starts after a prize with 10 points is awarded on the S side and a prize with 10 points is subsequently generated is illustrated.

  Initially, the number of points is 520, the number of credits is 10, and the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and the number of credits is 20 according to the added number c generated during that time. When a wagon service request of 300 occurs at the stage, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the subtraction request number p = 300, and the operation instruction includes subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, subtraction request. The command of several p = 300 is transmitted to S units.

  In response to this, on the S unit side, a subtraction number c = 3 occurs in order to start a game with a bet number of 3, where S SQN = n + 3, C-ID, score points = 220, addition number A response of p = 0, subtraction number p = 300, credit number = 17, addition number c = 0, and subtraction number c = 3 is transmitted to the CU. However, if the response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the processing of the operation response according to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter.

  As described with reference to FIG. 32, in S units, when the command cannot be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the game prohibited state is set. Also, during that time, 5 points have been won, and along with this, the data in the current points / credit related information storage area is updated, and accordingly points = 220 and credits = 17 + 5 = 22 are calculated. The number of points = 220 and the number of credits = 22 are stored.

  Next, when the power is cut off in the CU and the system is activated, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S similarly to the process of FIG. The platform will do it.

  In S units, the recovery data is SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of previous additions p = 0, the number of previous subtractions p = 300, the number of previous additions c = 0, the number of previous subtractions c = 3, the current number. As a number, the number of points currently owned = 220, the number of current additions p = 0, the number of current subtractions p = 0, the number of current credits = 22, the number of current additions c = 5, the number of current subtractions c = 0 are stored, and as a recovery response Send to CU.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is one behind the S unit, it is determined that the S unit has received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery data sent in the recovery response The backup value is corrected based on. Specifically, the number of points = 520 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (the number of previous additions p) +0 (the number of current additions p) -0 (the number of previous subtractions p) -0 (the number of current subtractions p) = 520, the number of additions The total p is changed to 0 (pre-addition number p) +0 (current addition number p), and the subtraction number p is changed to 0 (pre-subtraction number p) +0 (current subtraction number p).

  On the other hand, the number of credits = 20 (the number of credits of CU) +0 (the number of previous additions c) +5 (the number of current additions c) -3 (the number of previous subtractions c) -0 (the number of current subtractions c) = 22, the total number of additions c = It is corrected to 0 (pre-addition number c) +5 (current addition number c), subtraction number c cumulative + = 3 (pre-subtraction number c) +0 (current subtraction number c).

  Further, the CU transmits a communication start request command with the score correction ON, the score = 520, and the number of credits = 22 to the S units. In response to this, the S-series stores the points and the credits corrected to 520 and 22, respectively.

  In this way, even when it is determined that the S units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason why the subtraction cancel process is performed is that the S unit side that receives the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction. Not necessarily, there is a possibility that the subtraction was rejected on the S side. When the subtraction is rejected on the S-side as described above, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, the disadvantage that the score and the remaining number of credits become negative values occurs. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when the power supply to the CU side is cut off, the subtraction instruction is rejected because the remaining number of points is insufficient on the S side, but the subtraction is performed. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the points on the stand side and the remaining number of credits become negative values.

  FIG. 80 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of the occurrence of power failure in the CU shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 80, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 71 is executed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 81 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the power supply to the CU side shown in FIG. 79 is lost. Also in the control of FIG. 81, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 71 is executed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a recovery process when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the arrival of the clear request will be described. Here, an example of a sequence in which the return button is pressed on the CU side and no winning has occurred is illustrated.

  In the sequence of FIG. 82, when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of points is 500 and the number of credits is 0. In FIG. 82, similarly to the processing of FIG. 52, the CU transmits to the S units a command including data with a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and without a clear request as operation instructions to the S units. In response to this, the S machines control the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state) in which the bet number cannot be set. After that, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. Then, after the wait time has passed, the S-units have SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of points = 500, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 0, and the number of additions as operation responses. A response of c = 0, subtraction number c = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON is transmitted to the CU.

  After that, the CU updates the number of points to 500 and the number of credits to 0, and then transmits to the S units an operation command command of clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID. However, if the command does not reach the S unit, the S unit detects the disconnection and puts it in the game prohibited state at the stage where the command is not received for 4 seconds after the last response is transmitted. .

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 31, when there is no response from the S units due to the non-arrival of the command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is made even after the second retransmission. Is not returned, a communication error (communication interruption) is detected, and 5 seconds after that, the reconnection sequence is started.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the S unit execute the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and transmit / receive the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG. 43.

  In S units, the recovery data is SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of previous additions p = 0, the number of previous subtractions p = 0, the number of previous additions c = 0, the number of previous subtractions c = 0, the current number. As the number, the current number of points = 500, the number of current additions p = 0, the number of current subtractions p = 0, the number of current credits = 0, the number of current additions c = 0, the number of current subtractions c = 0 are stored, and as a recovery response Send to CU.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is one ahead of the SQN on the S side, so it is determined that the clear request has not arrived, and the recovery data sent in the recovery response is sent. Based on this, the backup value is corrected. Specifically, the number of points is 500 (current number of points p) +0 (current number of additions p) -0 (current number of subtractions p) = 500, the number of additions p is 0, and the number of subtractions p is 0. On the other hand, the number of credits = 0 (current number of points c) +0 (current number of additions c) -0 (current number of subtractions c) = 0, the number of additions c total = 0, and the number of subtractions c total = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a recovery process in the case where the power supply cutoff occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the clear request arrives will be described. Here, a sequence will be exemplified in which the game is not newly started on the S-side and no winning has occurred.

  In the sequence of FIG. 83, the number of points = 500 and the number of credits = 0 when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed. In FIG. 83, similarly to the processing of FIG. 52, the CU transmits, to the S units, a command including data with a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and without a clear request as operation instructions to the S units. In response to this, the S machines control the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibited state) in which the bet number cannot be set. After that, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. Then, after the wait time has passed, the S-units have SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of points = 500, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 0, and the number of additions as operation responses. A response of c = 0, subtraction number c = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON is transmitted to the CU.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 1, and transmits to the S units a command including a clear request, ON during clear display, SQN = n + N + 1, and C-ID as operation instructions.

  In response to this operation instruction, the S units clear the points and credits to 0 according to the clear request to set points = 0 and credit = 0, and also clear SQN to 0 and set SQN = 0. , CU, SQN = 0, C-ID, score = 0, addition number p = 0, subtraction number p = 0, credit number = 0, addition number c = 0, subtraction number c = 0 Send to. If this response does not reach the CU and the CU cuts off the power before performing the operation response process according to the response, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 32, in S units, if the command is not received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected and the state is changed to the unconnected state.

  Next, when the power is cut off in the CU and the system is activated, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S similarly to the process of FIG. The platform will do it.

  In S units, the recovery data is SQN = 0, the number of previous additions is p = 0, the number of previous subtractions is p = 0, the number of previous additions is c = 0, the number of previous subtractions is c = 0, and the current number is The current number of points = 0, the current number of additions p = 0, the current number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 0, the current number of additions c = 0, and the current number of subtractions c = 0 are stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  Since the SQN on the S unit side is 0, the CU determines that the clear request has arrived at the CU side and that the clear processing is being executed at the CU side, and based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response, the backup value The process of correcting is performed. Specifically, the number of points = 500 (backup value of CU) +0 (current addition number p) -0 (current subtraction number p) = 500, addition number p total = 0 (current addition number p), subtraction number p total It is corrected to = 0 (current subtraction number p). On the other hand, the number of credits = 0 (backup value of CU) +0 (current addition number c) -0 (current subtraction number c) = 0, the total number of additions c = 0 (current addition number c), the total number of subtractions c = 0 ( Correct to the current subtraction number c).

  As described above, the S-unit backs up the data such as the number of additions transmitted to the CU immediately before the communication disabled state even when the communication disabled state occurs. Then, the S units transmit the recovery data including the data transmitted to the CU immediately before the occurrence of the incommunicable state and the data such as the addition number newly generated after the transmission to the CU during the recovery process. The recovery data includes the SQN of the data transmitted to the CU immediately before the occurrence of the incommunicable state. The CU compares the SQN with the SQN stored in the CU before the CU receives the data (immediately transmitted update information) transmitted by the S units to the CU immediately before the communication-disabled state occurs. It becomes possible for the CU to judge whether or not the communication incompatibility has occurred.

  In addition, if the game data further changes between the communication disabled state and the game prohibited state (disconnection detection (play stop)), the S unit further stores the stored value based on the changed data. To update.

  FIG. 84 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the power supply to the CU side shown in FIG. 82 is lost. Also in the control of FIG. 84, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 71 is executed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 85 shows the control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery at the time of the occurrence of power failure in the CU shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 85, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 71 is executed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a transition of screens displayed on the CU side and the S side corresponding to the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 45 is inserted. In FIG. 86, the screen view on the left side of “CU” is the screen view of the display unit 312 of the CU. On the other hand, the screen view on the right side of the “S” is the screen view of the display unit 51 of the S unit. Referring to FIG. 86, in the state where the card is not inserted, the operation instruction command without an operation request is transmitted from the CU to the S units in the standby state, the operation response is in the standby state, and the response with the score = 0. It will be returned from the S unit to the CU.

  During the transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] on the upper left of FIG. 86, “none” is displayed in the column of “Card type” on the display 312 of the CU. "0 point" is displayed in the column of the title of "Points". Also, on the display units 51 of S units, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] on the upper right of FIG. 86, "0 points" and "card balance" title fields are displayed in the "Title" title field. "0 yen" is displayed on the screen, and "0 point" is displayed on the credit field. Note that the display 312 and the display 51 display various data indicating the game state of the S units at the present time. For example, in FIG. 86, the number of starts, the number of times of BB, the number of times of RT, the number of highest consecutive chan are displayed, and the number of times of start between BBs is displayed as a bar graph.

  The number of starts is the number of times the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are started, that is, the number of games. The BB count is the number of times a BB prize has been generated. The RT count is the number of times the RT (Replay Time) is reached. The number of highest consecutive chan is the maximum number of times that a BB prize has occurred consecutively within a predetermined number of games since the end of BB. The BB start count is the number of games between a certain BB and the next BB.

  On the display unit 312 on the CU side, a set value amount display portion (“lending point amount setting” in FIG. 86) showing the number of loan amounts to be deducted from the prepaid balance by one lending operation, The amount display section (“card balance” in FIG. 86), the replay point display section (“Replay point” in FIG. 86), the medal count display section (“Saving medal” in FIG. 86), and the lending rate A display unit (“rental point” in FIG. 86) is provided.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is composed of a touch panel, and display items of “unit information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed at the upper left of each display screen, and one of them is selected. By touching the touch panel, the display screen is changed to the touched display screen. In FIG. 86, a screen is displayed in a state where "pedestal information" is selected.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “lending”, “replay”, and “call” at the lower part of each display screen, and the player can select one of these display sections. A command can be input to the CU by selecting or by touching. For example, if you touch "Return", the inserted card will be returned, and if you touch "Lend", points will be lent in exchange for the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card.

  Further, by touching "replay", it is possible to perform replay using the points or accumulated medals of the inserted card (membership card). If you touch "Call", a notification for calling the staff at the game hall is given.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command without an operation request to the S units as an operation instruction during the card insertion process. In response to this, the S units detect that the card insertion process has started on the CU side. After the transmission and reception of this operation instruction command, an inquiry is made to the upper-level server (for example, the hall management computer 1). In this inquiring state, the display 312 on the CU side displays “inquiring” as shown in the second [card balance inquiring screen] from the top, and the display on the S side. In the device 51, as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiry about card balance)] from the top, the server displays an arrow from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen and queries the server for the inserted card. The picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  Upon receiving the above-mentioned operation instruction, the S units return a response of holding point = 0 and credit = 0 to the CU while waiting as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is collated by inquiring to the server and the point (= 5000) and the balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are specified, the card is held as an operation instruction. Inside, the command of the number of addition requests = 5000 and the card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the S units. The balance is fixed at this stage. On the other hand, the score is fixed after waiting for an operation response from S units. Upon receiving this command, the S units detect that the card balance and the points are specified on the CU side, and thereafter, based on the pseudo ball detection by the pseudo ball unit for addition 120, as described above, the addition is performed. An operation response (point score = 5000, addition number = 5000) corresponding to the request number = 5000 is returned to the CU, and the addition display is in progress. Note that, in this figure, the operation response corresponding to the addition request number = 5000 is represented by one for convenience. At the stage of receiving this operation response, the CU determines the score = 5000, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, as shown in the third [rental screen] from the top, “5000 points” is displayed in the display box of the points and the arrow pointing toward the gaming machine. A display is made, and it is displayed to the player that the 5000 points are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, in S units, the display 51 displays an arrow from the IC toward the score display section and the card balance display section, as shown in the third [normal screen (rental)] from the top. As a result, a display is being made (addition is being displayed) accompanying the lending. Then, "5000 points" is displayed on the score display section and "7000 yen" is displayed on the card balance display section.

  After that, a response including the score = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the S units to the CU. In the CU, when a few seconds have passed after starting the moving display of the score indicating that the addition display is in progress, the addition display is terminated and “member” indicating the type of the inserted card and “ The display is switched to a state where "5000 shots" is displayed on the display 312. On the other hand, in the S units, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2 to 3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the holding points as the addition display, and the movement display of the holding points by the display unit 51 is ended.

  In this way, the display of the start of the operation process such as inquiring or displaying the addition is started at the same timing with the CU and the S unit, while the end of the display of the operation process is completed from the CU to the S unit. It is possible to end the S side at its own timing without transmitting a command or the like, and there is no restriction on the end timing at the CU side. As a result, a unique display unique to the S side can be performed.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a control process in the case where a player divides and transfers a score to another person during the game to share the score. The flowcharts shown in FIG. 87 and FIGS. 88 and 89 to be described later show the control in which the player can divide and transfer the score to another person to share the score while continuing the game. It should be noted that, in this flowchart, the description of the process in which the S units move the pseudo balls 124 for the divided transfer in response to the request for the divided transfer is omitted. Further, the division sharing of the points described below is performed by the same control even when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine described later.

  Referring to FIG. 87, first, card A as a membership card with a score of 5000 is inserted into the CU. When this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card will be returned to the player at the end of the game even if the gaming value (points, medals and prepaid balance) of the membership card becomes zero. There must be.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU sends a command including the addition request number = 5000 for adding “5000”, which is the point of the card A, on the S side to the S side. In response to this, in the S units, the pseudo ball 124 is moved to update the score = 5000, and then a response including the score = 5000 is transmitted to the CU as an operation response. After that, the game is started on S machines, and when the number of points decreases to 4000 as the game is executed, 1000 points are transferred to another person to share points (1000 points sharing When the designation operation of (point) is performed, thereafter, the CU and the S unit are in the state of dividing points.

  For the card B in which the points to be dividedly transferred (shared points) are recorded to another person, the stock card stocked in the card stock section in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 to compensate and the points to the card B are given. Although it is written and ejected from the CU, in order to eject the card B, the card A already inserted in the card reader / writer 327 must be ejected first. At that time, if all the points (= 4000) at the present time are written in the card A (member card owned by the player) and discharged, the points become 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. Disappear.

  Therefore, in order to make it possible to divide points (shared points) while playing a game, the card A is ejected from the CU in the state of “points = 0”, and the points corresponding to the points are CU. Control so that it is left as collateral information. Instead of directly recording the card points on the card, the host server may store the card points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the number of points = 0 are transmitted to the host server, the points stored in association with the card number received by the host server are searched, and the Update your score to 0. After that, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (points = 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (points = 0) in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 for compensation. At that time, the number of points is subtracted as the game continues on the S machines, and the number of points is 3,800. Then, in order to write 1000 as a point to be dividedly transferred (point sharing) to the card B, a command including an operation request (operation instruction) with the subtraction request number = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In S units, in response, the pseudo ball 124 is moved / detected by 1000 points, 1000 is subtracted from the current score 3800 to make the score = 2800, and the motion response including the score = 2800 is set. Send to CU. In response to this, the CU backs up and stores the data of the score = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “points = 1000” on the card B by the card reader / writer 327 and returns (discharges) the card B. When the player hands this discharged card B to another person, the points can be dividedly transferred (shared points) to another person. In addition, instead of directly recording the points on the card on the card, if the points are stored in the host server in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (point transfer) A card to which 1000 points, which is a shared point, is transmitted to the higher-level server, the point number = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the higher-level server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing). It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by point sharing. After that, the CU ejects the card B.

  After ejecting the card B, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A, which is the member card of the player ejected first, and displays a message prompting the insertion of the card A on the display 312 (see FIG. 95). Then, the player who sees it inserts the card A into the CU. At that point, the score is 2750. When the card A is inserted into the CU, whether the CU is the same as the inserted card A and the card A which is once ejected in accordance with the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers are the same). Whether or not) is determined, and if they do not match, the card A is ejected, while if they match, the process of dividing points (sharing points) is finished, and a message to that effect is displayed on the display 312 ( See FIG. 96).

  When the card is returned after the game is finished, the inserted card A is written as a point and the card is ejected from the CU.

  FIG. 88 shows a control operation when a player inserts a visitor card B in which 5,000 points are recorded into a CU and performs divided transfer of points (shared points) while playing a game. There is. In this case, since the card B inserted first is a visitor card that does not necessarily have to be returned to the player, the score inserted to the visitor card B inserted earlier is divided. The points are shared by ejecting the visitors card B and transferring the visitor card B to another person.

  First, the visitor card B (points = 5000) is inserted into the CU, and all 5000 request points recorded on the inserted card B are added as points. (Operation instruction) is transmitted from the CU to the S units.

  In response to this, the S units move and detect the pseudo balls 124 for 5000 points, store the holding point = 5000, and return an operation response including the holding point = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, the game can be played on S units and the game is in progress.

  Then, after the points are used in the game and the points become 4000, the player specifies the points sharing (1000 points) in which 1000 points are divided and transferred to another person. From this stage, it is in the state of dividing points. At this stage, the points are further used for the game, and the points become 3800. Then, an operation request including the subtraction request number = 1000 for subtracting 1000 points for dividing transfer (point sharing) is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response to this, the S units move and detect the pseudo balls 124 for 1000 points and subtract 1000 from the current holding points 3800 to set the holding points = 2800, and the operation response including the holding points = 2800 is CU. Reply to. In response to this, the CU backs up and stores the data of the score = 2800. Then, "Point = 1000" is written in the card B held in the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged).

  At this stage, the process of dividing and transferring points (sharing points) is completed. Even after that, if the player continues the game on S units and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process returns to the card return process shown in FIG. 52, and the card is stocked in the CU. The stock card that is present is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and the data of the point corresponding to the point at that time is recorded on the stock card and ejected.

  In addition, instead of directly recording the points on the card on the card, if the points are stored in the host server in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (point transfer) 1000 points, which is a shared point, is sent to the upper server, the stored points are searched in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the points are corresponded to the number of points received from the CU. The value (= 1000 points) is updated, and the fact that the card is a dividedly transferred card (shared points) and 1000 points are points generated by point sharing is stored as a history.

  After that, the CU ejects the card B. Also for the stock card discharged at the end of the game, the card number and the data of the number of points at the time of card discharge are transmitted to the host server, and the number of points = 1000 is associated with the card number received by the host server. In addition to the storage, the history that the owner of the above-mentioned card B has been changed to the owner of this stock card is stored and stored. After that, the CU ejects the stock card.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing another example of divisional transfer of points (point sharing). Differences from the control process shown in FIG. 87 will be mainly described. The flowchart shown in FIG. 89 is the same as that of FIG. 87 in that the card A, which is the player's membership card already inserted, is first returned when the point is divided and transferred (point sharing). However, at the time of return, after securing the necessary points (collateral points of 200 points) necessary to continue the game during the division of the points, the remaining points are recorded on the card A as points. 87 is different from that in FIG. 87.

  Specifically, first, the player operates the display unit 312 including a touch panel to specify share of points, in which 1000 points are divided and transferred. Then, the CU leaves 1000 shared points to be divided and transferred and 200 collateral points described above in the CU, and calculates the remaining points 3800. Specifically, the current score (5000) -collateral point (200) -shared score (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 points, the CU transmits an operation request command including the subtraction request number = 3800 to the S units. In response to this, the S units move and detect the pseudo balls 124 for 3800 points, subtract 3800 from the current holding points 5000, and calculate and store the remaining holding points 1200. Then, an operation response including the score = 1200 and the subtraction number = 3800 is returned to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves collateral points = 200 and shared points = 1000 in the CU, and then writes points = 3800 on the card A held in the card reader / writer 327. Discharge with. In this way, since the points are divided and transferred (point sharing) while continuing the game on S machines, the card A that has been inserted into the CU leaving a collateral point for play (play: 200 points) is returned. To do.

  After that, the CU takes out the stock card (card B with 0 points) stored in the CU to the card reader / writer 327 and replenishes it. In the meantime, the game continues on S machines, and as a result, the number of additions = 10 and the number of subtractions = 60 occur. As a result, the score is 1200 + 10 (number of additions) -60 (number of subtractions) = 1150.

  Then, in the CU, an operation request command including the subtraction request number = 1000 is transmitted to S units in order to transfer the shared 1000 points in a divided manner (share points).

  In response to this, in S units, after moving and detecting the pseudo balls 124 for 1000 points, the subtraction request number 1000 is subtracted from the current holding point 1150 to calculate the remaining holding point = 150, and the holding point = The response of the operation response including 150 and the subtraction number = 1000 is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU receives it, writes “points = 1000” on the card B, and returns (discards) it. The player can divide the points (share points) by giving the ejected card B to another person.

  After the card B is ejected, the CU displays on the display device 312 a message prompting the player to re-insert the membership card A of the player ejected earlier. The player who sees it inserts the previously ejected card A (points = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues on S machines, and as a result, the number of additions = 10 and the number of subtractions = 85. Therefore, the number of points when the card A is reinserted is 150 + 10−85 = 75.

  When the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A once ejected in accordance with the score sharing process (for example, both card numbers are If they do not match, the card A is ejected, while if they match, the CU adds the score recorded on the card A = 3800 to the S unit. Therefore, an operation request command including the number of addition requests = 3800 is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, the S units move and detect the pseudo balls 124 for 3800 points to calculate the number of points = 75 + 3800 = 3875, store them as the current points, and the points = 3875 and the number of additions. = 3800 is transmitted to the CU.

  In addition, instead of directly recording the points on the card on the card, if the points are stored in the host server in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (point transfer) A card to which 1000 points, which is a shared point, is transmitted to the higher-level server, the point number = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the higher-level server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing). It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by point sharing. After that, the CU ejects the card B.

90 to 107 are screen diagrams displayed by the display unit 312 of the CU.
First, based on FIGS. 90 to 96, a display screen displayed on the display unit 312 when sharing points as shown in FIG. 87 will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 90, the player selects and designates point sharing from a plurality of menus displayed by the player touching the display item (icon) of the “menu” displayed in the upper left half of the screen. The displayed state is the display screen for sharing points, which is shown in FIG. 90. The share of points (divided transfer of points) can be either divided transfer from the player's owned points or divided transfer from the saved medals. For that purpose, first, a message "Select a point sharing source" is displayed, and a display item (icon) showing a score to be selected and a display item (icon) showing a saved medal are displayed.

  On the display screen in the right half of FIG. 90, the state of the card currently inserted is displayed. In FIG. 90, a membership card is inserted, and the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, a score of 0 points, a credit of 0 points, a saved medal of 500 points, and a current score of 10000 points. It is shown.

  Further, as the CU state, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending the points from the card balance is 500 yen, and 25 points corresponding to the 500 yen is the number of payouts. Further, it is shown that the player can insert a banknote into the CU and reload the card balance of the inserted card, which is in a “payable” state.

  The player touch-operates either "score" or "saving medal" on the left half of the screen to select and input the score sharing source. Here, a case is shown in which "score" is selected.

  When the player selects "score", the screen shown in FIG. 91 is displayed next. The message "Please select the number of points to share" is displayed on the left half of the screen, and the points to be selected for sharing points are 100 points, 200 points, 300 points, 4000 points, 500 points, 700 points, 1000 points, Nine kinds of 1500 points and 2000 points are displayed. The player touches one of the nine types to select and input. Here, a case where "1000 points" is selected and input will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs "1000 points", then the screen shown in FIG. 92 is displayed. In the screen shown in Fig. 92, the message "Points will be divided according to the above items. Are you sure?" Is displayed, and the score of your own card will be 9000 as the details of the shared points. It is displayed that the shared card to be dividedly transferred (shared points) has 1000 points. Then, the display item (icon) of "starting point sharing" and the display item (icon) of "cancel" are displayed. The player touches any of these display items to select and input. If you select "Cancel", point sharing will be canceled. On the other hand, if “start sharing point” is selected and input, the point sharing process as shown in the specification of the number of shared points is started.

  When the player selects and inputs "start sharing points", the screen shown in FIG. 93 is displayed next. In the screen shown in FIG. 93, a message "Your own card will be ejected" is displayed, and a point sharing processing status image showing the progress of point sharing processing is displayed. This point sharing processing status image has three types of processing order 1, 2, and 3. In the first processing, the card of the player (player) is ejected, as the second processing, the shared card is ejected, and the third. Reinsertion of my card ejected as a process is displayed. Then, in the "Status" column, "Processing" and "Waiting" are displayed from the top, which indicates that the first process is currently being processed. Then, an image in which one's own card is ejected is shown by a broken line from the first process.

  In the right half screen of FIG. 93, 10,000 points, which are the points currently held on the S units, are displayed in a blinking manner.

  When the ejection of one's own card is completed, the screen shown in FIG. 94 is displayed next. In FIG. 94, in the “Status” column, it is indicated that the ejection of one's own card as the first processing is “completed” and the ejection of the shared card as the second processing is in process. . The state in which the shared card is ejected from the second process is indicated by an arrow. When the discharge of the shared card is completed, the screen shown in FIG. 95 is displayed next.

  In the screen shown in FIG. 95, one's card has been ejected as the first process, and the shared card has been ejected as the second process. At this point, one's own card is being reinserted. Has been shown to be. Then, an image for inserting your own card is displayed by an arrow at the location of the third processing.

  When the player reinserts his or her card into the CU, the screen shown in FIG. 96 is displayed next. In FIG. 96, the message “Point sharing is completed” is displayed, and it is indicated that all of the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing have been completed as the point sharing processing status. Then, since the sharing of points for 1000 points has been completed, it is displayed that the points currently on the S units are 10,000-1000 = 9000, which is 9000 points.

  Next, FIGS. 97 to 103 are diagrams of display screens by the display 312 when the control process of the wagon service shown in FIG. 49 is executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 97, the display screen of FIG. 97 shows a state in which the player has touched and selected the display item (icon) of the “wagon service” displayed in the upper left part of the screen. First of all, the message "Please select the type to order" is displayed, and the wagon menu is "5 standard menu items", "30 drink items", "10 food items", "20 sweets items". There are four types of menus, "goods", and an icon for "order status confirmation".

  On the right half screen of FIG. 97, 1000 points are displayed as the points currently held in S units. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 points, taking into consideration that the current number of points is 1000 points. For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, the screen shown in FIG. 98 is displayed next. In FIG. 98, the message "Please select the product to order" is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown. The number of points required when ordering each menu is It is displayed. The player touches and selects an item to be ordered from the displayed menu in consideration of the fact that the current score is 1000 points. An equilateral triangle icon and an inverted triangle icon are displayed on the right side of the left screen where various menus are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled downward and the upper part of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the player touches the inverted triangular icon shown in FIG. 98, the screen is scrolled up and the lower part of the screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 98, the player selects the coffee menu that requires 25 points, and then touches the “add item” icon displayed in the title column of “order item details” in FIG. Returning to the display screen of the wagon menu, the menu of "10 kinds of foods" in FIG. 97 is selected, and a menu of "foods" is displayed. The menu is selected, and further, the icon of “additional product” displayed in the title column of “ordered product details” of FIG. 99 is touched to return to the display screen of the wagon menu of FIG. 97 again. A case will be described in which the icon of "20 items of sweets" is selected and input, and the player selects "ice" which requires 50 points from the display screen of sweets.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 99 is then displayed, and the details of the ordered products that have been selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the name of the ordered product, the number of points consumed, and the quantity of the ordered product are displayed. In the case of FIG. 99, one hamburger with 25 points of consumption is ordered, one piece of coffee with 15 points of consumption is ordered, and one piece of ice with 10 points of consumption is ordered. Then, it is displayed that the total consumed points is 50 points. Furthermore, an “add” icon is displayed in the quantity column of the ordered product details, and the player touches and inputs this additional icon to add “1” to the quantity for each touch. It Also, on the right side of the quantity, a "delete" icon is displayed corresponding to each order prize. The player can delete the order of the corresponding product by touch-inputting this icon. For example, touching the top “Delete” will delete the hamburger order, touching the second “Delete” will delete the coffee order, and touching the third “Delete” the ice cream. The order is deleted.

  Furthermore, an icon of "additional product" is shown below the ordered product specification, and when the player touches it, the player returns to the display screen of the wagon menu of FIG. It becomes possible to select an ordered product and place an additional order.

  Further, an icon of "Cancel" is shown below the ordered item description in FIG. 99, and the player touches this icon to cancel all the ordered items ordered up to the present time.

  Furthermore, an “order” icon is displayed below the ordered item description, and the player touches this icon to execute the order processing of the wagon service as shown in the ordered item description. Become.

  When the player touches the "delete" icon corresponding to the order of "ice" on the display screen of FIG. 99, the screen shown in FIG. 100 is displayed. In FIG. 100, the state where the order of “ice” has been canceled is shown.

  On the other hand, when the player touch-operates the “order” icon in FIG. 99, the screen shown in FIG. 101 is displayed. On the display screen of FIG. 101, the image of the inquiry about the ordered product is displayed. An arrow is displayed to indicate that transmission / reception is being performed between 50 points, which is the total number of points consumed, and 1000 points, which is the number of points currently being consumed by S units, and indicates that communication is in progress. To display the arrow indicating that the communication is in progress, specifically, referring to FIG. 102, first, the arrow is displayed in the direction from the consumption points “50” to the point “1000” on the S unit. The word “Inquiry” is displayed.

  After this display is made, an arrow is displayed in the direction from the "1000" points of S units to the "50" points of consumption points, and the character "Inquiry" is displayed. Then, both of these displays are repeated a plurality of times for display. After that display, the screen of FIG. 103 is displayed next. On the screen of Fig. 103, the message "The number of points you have consumed has been deducted from the points you have received for the ordered product" is displayed, and the ordered product has been received with the message that the ordered product has been received. Is displayed and the total consumption score is “50”. Then, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that, as a result of the consumption of 50 points, the current number of points on the S units is "950".

  FIGS. 104 and 105 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion processing shown in FIG. 45, which are the third display screens from the top among the display screens of the display unit 312 on the CU side shown in FIG. 86. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 104, on the left half of the screen, game machine information showing the same contents as the display screen on the CU side of FIG. 86 is shown although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen of FIG. 104, there is displayed that 1000 points, which are the holding points of the card inserted in the CU, are all moving to the S side from the CU to the S side.

  Then, when the point movement is completed, the display screen shown in FIG. 105 is displayed next, and the message “Point movement completed!” Is displayed on the right side of the screen and the point column becomes 0 points. 1000 points are displayed as the points on the S units, and “1000” is displayed blinking.

  106 and 107 are display screens showing clear display in the card return processing shown in FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 106, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current number of points on S units is 1000, and “1000” is displayed in blinking. Then, a state in which the score is being moved from the S units is displayed in the score display field, and the characters "moving the score" are displayed.

  Then, when the movement of the holding points is completed, the display screen is switched to the one shown in FIG. 107, and the state where the holding points on the S side are 0 points is displayed and 1000 points are displayed as the holding points. Then, “1000” is displayed blinking.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the number of points is managed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide the management function on the S unit side, and the cost of the S unit is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed. In particular, the S unit has a short replacement cycle in the amusement hall in order to be able to provide a more interesting game as soon as possible, and tends to be replaced early in a few months if it is one year or earlier. . In addition, as new machines are being developed one after another that quickly incorporate the rapidly changing tastes of players, the cycle of machine replacement in the amusement hall tends to be faster.

  On the other hand, the CU is rarely replaced from the viewpoint of taste, and in general, the equipment is replaced according to the failure, and even if the CU is replaced due to the failure, the CU will be replaced after the appropriate repair. It is used. And if no failure occurs, replacement will not be performed for several years.

  For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the S units are introduced can be reduced by allowing the CU side to have the holding point management function instead of the S unit side and suppressing the cost of the S units.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an entire system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key for security and a unique ID (also referred to as SID). Key management server 800 and upper server 801, upper server 801, main controller 323, main controller 323 and CU communication controller 80, CU communication controller 80 and S unit communication controller 82, payout controller 31 and main control board 116 and the main control board 116 and the key management server 803 mutually authenticate each other using the authentication information, and mutually determine whether or not the partner device is proper. Then, they communicate with each other on the condition that an authentication result that they are proper has been obtained. Distribution of authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  The SID of the CU communication control unit 80 and the authentication key are transmitted from the key management server 800 of FIG. 108 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 108, the key management server 800 stores the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 and the authentication key in association with each SID of the main control unit 323. The card unit maker stores the SID of the main control unit 323 in the EEPROM 808 as described above at the manufacturing stage of the card unit 3, and stores the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 corresponding to the SID of the main control unit 323, that is, already stored in the ROM 809. The SID of the CU communication control unit 80 and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 are transmitted to the key management server 800 together with the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the EEPROM 808. Then, the key management server 800 receives it and stores the transmitted SID of the CU communication control unit 80 and the authentication key in association with the transmitted SID of the main control unit 323. In this way, in the key management server 800, a database of the authentication information of the pair, which includes the SID of the main control unit 323, the SID of the corresponding CU communication control unit 80, and the authentication key that is the common key, is constructed.

  Thus, the SID of the main control unit 323, which is itself authentication information, is transmitted to the key management server 800 and specifies the SID and authentication key of the corresponding CU communication control unit 80 in the key management server 800. It is also used as the authentication information specifying information.

  When the power of the card unit 3 is first turned on after the card unit 3 is installed in the game hall, the main control unit 323 locks the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the EEPROM 808 via the host server 801. It is transmitted to the management server 800. The key management server 800 searches the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 and the authentication key stored in association with the received SID of the main control unit 323, and the SID and authentication of the searched CU communication control unit 80. The key and the key are returned to the main control unit 323 via the upper server 801. The main control unit 323 receives this and stores the received SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 in the EEPROM 808. As a result, the same (paired) SID as the SID of the CU communication controller 808 stored in the ROM 809 of the CU communication controller 80 is stored in the EEPROM 808 and the same (paired) as the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. The authentication key is stored in the EEPROM 808.

  Between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the EEPROM 808 is used to determine whether or not the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the ROM 809 is correct. CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the CU communication control unit 80 is proper by performing the serial ID authentication, and uses the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the EEPROM 813 to read the EEPROM 808. BB serial ID authentication is performed to determine whether the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the main control unit 323 is correct and to determine whether the main control unit 323 is correct. Furthermore, whether the authentication key common to the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is stored is determined by the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. Device authentication is performed by making a determination.

  Next, the reason why the SID of the CU communication controller 80, which is a part of the authentication information, and the authentication key are distributed to the main controller 323 is the key management server 800 will be described.

  For example, referring to FIG. 7 described above, similarly to storing the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 in the ROM 809 at the time of manufacturing the chip, the main control unit 323 also stores the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 in the ROM 804 at the time of manufacturing the chip. When stored, the memory chip in which the SID of the same CU communication control unit 80 is stored must be mounted on both the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and in the mounting process of the memory chips, respectively. Since a pair of memory chips must be mounted, the mounting process becomes complicated.

  Therefore, for example, one of the authentication information of the pair, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID of the main control unit 323, and the authentication key is stored in the CU communication control unit 80, and the card unit 3 is manufactured. At the stage when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the game hall, one of the authentication information stored in the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted to the main control unit 323. A method of storing the transmitted authentication information, that is, the SID of the main control unit 323, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, and the authentication key by the EEPROM 808 can be considered.

  However, in the case of this method, since the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, there is a risk of leakage of the authentication information during that time, which causes a security problem. In particular, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, as described above, the communication interface specifications are disclosed, and the authentication information is transmitted according to the published communication interface specifications. As a result, there is an inconvenience that the risk of leakage of the authentication information increases. Moreover, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 are devices located in a local area as compared with, for example, the upper server 801 and the key management server 800, and the number thereof is also larger than that of the upper server 801 and the key management server 800. Therefore, there is a possibility that a person who attempts fraud may easily access and intercept (eavesdrop) the authentication information.

  Furthermore, when the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, the following inconvenience occurs. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 is replaced with an illegally manufactured CU communication control unit 80, then the CU communication control unit 80 transmits authentication information to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 stores the authentication information. If an illegal act of causing the CU communication is performed, it is not determined that there is any abnormality in the mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Can not be found. In other words, in the case of the method of supplying the authentication information from one side performing mutual authentication to the other side performing mutual authentication, one side performing mutual authentication is replaced with an unauthorized one and then the authentication information is supplied to thereby carry out fraudulent acts. There is a security hole that allows forgiveness.

  In order to prevent the above inconvenience, a download method is adopted in which the authentication information stored in the upper server 801 is downloaded and stored in the main control unit 323.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM of the payout control unit 17, the SID of the payout control unit 17 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is stored by the ROM writer or the like at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine. And the authentication key are written in the EEPROM of the payout control unit 17, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured.

  In this state, when the power is turned on for the first time after the S stand 2S is installed in the game arcade, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 116 is output from the I / O port of the main control board 116. It is transmitted to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in association with the SID of each main control board in a plurality of S units. The key management server 803 searches the SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 116, and obtains the SID and the authentication key of the searched payout control unit. It returns to the main control board 116. The main control board 116 stores the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in the EEPROM.

  Further, in the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 31 in the P units, which will be described later, the authentication information stored in the key management server 803 is also stored in the same manner as described above. A download method of downloading and storing in the main control board 16 is adopted.

  Specifically, although not shown in the drawing, at the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM of the payout control unit 31, the SID of the payout control unit 31 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is stored by the ROM writer or the like when manufacturing P units. Of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the payout control section 31, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board by a ROM writer or the like when manufacturing the slot machine.

  In this state, when the power is turned on for the first time after the P units are installed in the game arcade, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board is transferred from the I / O port of the main control board to the key management server. Send to 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in association with the SID of each main control board in the plurality of P units. In the key management server 803, the SID and the authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board are searched, and the SID and the authentication key of the searched payout control unit are searched for. Reply to control board. The main control board stores the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in the EEPROM.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a modification of the embodiment described in FIGS. 15 and 46 will be described. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the control mode for storing the game history data of each of the CU side and the S side shown in FIG. Here, differences from FIG. 15 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 15, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided on the S stand 2S, but in the modification shown in FIG. 109, the hall management computer 1 The game history data is cleared based on the clear command transmitted from CU3 to CU3. It is necessary to clear the game history data for each gaming machine installed in the gaming hall before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data by broadcasting the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3, instead of operating the RAM clear switch installed for each S unit.

  From the hall management computer 1, the staff at the amusement hall operates the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 causes the hall management computer 1 to reach a predetermined time before the business start time. A clear command signal is distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the storage of the S history game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the function of the clear processing unit provided in the game history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of this S game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared). Further, by the function of the clear processing unit, a clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the S stand 2S.

  Upon receiving the clear command signal, the game history data management unit 291 erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 by the function of the clear processing unit, and also the S history game history data. The oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days in the storage unit is erased, and the remaining stored data for 9 days is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old days. As a result, the newest storage area (same-day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data will be stored in this empty area (current day storage area).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 109, after the player has left the seat, the CU 3 side determines the identity of the player who left the seat and the player who will play the next game. The C-ID, which is the player identification information of the player who left the seat, is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Then, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play the game again on the S table 2S that has left his / her seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID and the current player included in the inserted card information are read. The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether the two match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 of the CU 3 to the game history data management unit 291 of the S unit 2S, while when it is determined that the two do not match. , A difference command is sent.

  When the same command is received, the game history data management unit 291 receives the same command and stores the C-ID and the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit into the current player game history data storage unit. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when the difference command is received, control is performed to erase the backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  Further, when the S unit 2S receives the card return notification from the game history data management unit 291 of the CU 3, A as the C-ID and the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Is stored in the backup data storage unit, and the C-ID and the game history data in the current player game history data storage unit are deleted, so that the storage data in the current player game history data storage unit is stored in the backup data storage unit. Control to shift and store.

  Note that, also in FIG. 109, as in the case of FIG. 15 described above, the identity of the player is confirmed and stored in the current player game history data only when the C-ID of the membership card is read instead of the visitor card. The game history is taken over and totaled. In addition, this FIG. 109 is also applicable to the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (P unit) described later.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the control of the insertion process in the modification shown in FIG. The control shown in FIG. 110 is obtained by modifying a part of the control shown in FIG. 46, and the same step numbers are given to the same control steps. Here, the difference will be mainly described. Also in FIG. 110, the solid arrow indicates the flow of control, and the double-dashed line arrow indicates the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 110, each step of S31, S32, S34 to S37, S50, and S51 is executed by the CU, and S units execute S52, S40, S42, S43, and S45.

  If it is determined in S31 that the card is not suspended, the control proceeds to S50, and the C-IDs of the card inserted this time and the card inserted last time are compared to determine whether they match. Next, in S51, control is performed to transmit a command based on the determination result to the S units. Specifically, the same command is transmitted to the S units when the determination result is a match, and the different command is transmitted to the S units when the determination result is a mismatch.

  In S, whether or not the transmitted command is a match command is determined in S52, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage unit) is set to the current area (provided that the command matches). Control for returning to the current player game history data storage section) and resuming updating of the game history data is performed (S52).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 110, the control of S44 shown in FIG. 46 is not executed.

  In this modified example, instead of sending the same command as described above, the game history data a stored in the current area (current player game history data storage section) of the data storage section 392 is sent to the gaming machine (S 2S). You may send it. In the gaming machine (S unit 2S) that has received the game history data a, the received game history data a is stored in the current area (current player game history data storage section), and the game history data a is taken over to create a new game. Add and update history data. In this case, the backup area (backup data storage unit) in the gaming machine (S unit 2S) becomes unnecessary. Further, FIG. 110 is also applicable to the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (P unit) described below.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. With reference to FIG. 111, the pachinko machine 2 to which the card unit 3 is electrically connected has a pachinko ball, which is an example of a game medium, enclosed therein, and the player operates the hitting ball operation handle 25. The hitting ball firing motor 28 (see FIG. 112) is driven to drive the enclosed balls one by one into the game area 27 on the front surface of the game board 26 so that a game can be played. The card unit 3 has the same function as the card unit 3 shown in FIG. 1, and the same or corresponding parts in the figure are designated by the same reference numerals. Further, here, a pachinko game machine is described as an example of a game machine in place of the slot machine, so that “points” are described as “gaming balls” and “saving medals” are described as “savings balls”. . Further, in the following, the pachinko gaming machine is also referred to as a P machine.

  As with the S game machines, the P machine machines can be played with the credits drawn from the game balls (points), and are controlled so that the balls cannot be fired when the credits reach 0. As in the case of S units, game balls (points) are acquired by inserting the card into the CU and then operating the lending button, which causes a portion of the "balance" recorded on the card to be withdrawn. It For example, one lending operation causes a "balance" equivalent to 500 yen to be withdrawn and converted into 125 "gaming balls."

  The "gaming ball" cannot be used directly for games, but can be used when seeking wagon service. By operating the credit button, a part of the points is withdrawn and converted into "credits". For example, 125 credit points are deducted by one credit operation, and the credit points are converted to the same credit.

  The player can shoot balls within the range of "credit". Since 125 credits are given by one operation of the credit button, 125 bullets can be played. When a prize is generated, credits of points corresponding to the type of the prize are added. If a foul ball that does not reach the game area is generated during the game, 1 credit is added. Similar to the case of S credits, the credit has a predetermined upper limit (for example, the upper limit = 125 in the present embodiment), and therefore the credit is not updated beyond the upper limit. Therefore, for example, when a prize that exceeds the upper limit occurs, after the credit is updated to the upper limit, the credit amount exceeding the upper limit is converted into a score and the score is updated. .

  "Credits" cannot be used for wagon services. Therefore, there is no possibility that the "credit" that can be used for the game will run out by requesting the wagon service.

  At the end of the game, by operating the credit settlement button, "credits" are converted back into points. In the present embodiment, one credit is converted into one credit. However, a predetermined number of “credits” may be deducted as a commission when performing the reverse conversion.

  At the end of the game, by operating the card return button, the acquired points are written in a card so that the points can be specified. At this time, the points may be recorded directly on the card, or the points may be managed by the hall management computer using the ID of the card.

  When the returned card is inserted again into the card unit (which may be the same as or different from the CU at the end of the game), the "points" recorded on the card are read and read. “Points” are displayed on the CU. If the “score” read at this time is equal to or more than the minimum credit point deduction (for example, 125 points), the “score point” is deducted without deducting the “balance” from the card. The credit required for the game can be secured by performing the withdrawal operation of "" (credit button ON).

  However, the "score" is valid only on the day when the game is acquired, and on the next day, the "score" is managed as a "ball" in the game hall. Therefore, even if the player visits the game hall the next day and inserts the card into the card unit 3, the score is displayed as 0. In the case of playing a game using the "payment ball", first, a re-playing operation for a storage ball (replay button ON) is required. When you operate the replay button, a part of the "ball" is converted into points. For example, one re-ball operation causes 125 points of "savings" to be withdrawn and converted into 25 "points".

  Similarly to the S unit, the P unit is displayed on the display unit of the P unit and the CU on condition that the pseudo ball is moved / detected when the condition for updating the game balls (points) is satisfied. The game balls (points) are updated and displayed. Similarly to the S unit, when the condition for updating the number of credits is satisfied, the P unit does not require the credits displayed on the P unit and the CU display without the condition of moving or detecting the pseudo balls. Update display.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 111 is a so-called first-class pachinko machine, and although not shown in the drawings, a starting opening (1) and a starting opening through which a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can win. (2) is provided, and a variable display device is provided for performing variable display based on the detection signal of the winning prize balls that have won a prize in each of the starting openings, and the display result of the variable display device is specified in advance. There is provided a variable winning ball device (also referred to as a special winning opening) or the like, which is opened when a combination of the identification information (for example, a grid) is opened. The starting opening (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed into a first state that is advantageous to the player (for example, an open state) and a second state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a closed state).

  When the variable winning ball device is opened, it becomes a big hit state. In addition, the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (matching), so that the probability variation big hit state is Occurrence occurs, and after that, the probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the big hit is improved after the end of the big hit state. There are two big winning openings, a big winning opening (1) and a big winning opening (2). For example, when a big hit is generated based on a winning on the starting opening (1), the big winning opening (1) is in the first state, and when a big hit is generated based on a winning on the starting opening (2). (2) becomes the first state. Further, the game area 2 is provided with four normal winning openings (1) to (4).

  When a prize is won at the special winning opening (1) or the big winning opening (2), 15 points are added to the number of game balls. When a winning is made to the starting opening (1) or the starting opening (2), 10 points are added to the number of game balls. When a winning occurs in any of the normal winning openings (1) to (4), the number of game balls is increased by 3 points.

  The pachinko balls that are hit in the game area 27 are collected in any of the winning ports or are collected in the out port 145 (see FIG. 112) without winning. The pachinko balls that have won the winning opening and the pachinko balls that have been collected in the out opening 145 are returned again to the hitting ball firing position through the collection path inside the pachinko machine 2. When the player operates the hit ball operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hit ball firing position is again hit into the game area 27.

  A display 54, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57 are provided below the game area 27 of the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays various display screens to the player, like the display of the slot machine 2S. The jog dial 57 is used by the player to selectively specify various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 by rotating the player. When the player turns the jog dial 57, the items to be selected among various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially displayed, and the jog dial 57 is turned. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item to be selected by the player, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed. Two vertically long transparent windows W0 and W1 are formed below the display 54. A part of the addition pseudo-ball unit 120 is visibly provided inside one of the transparent windows W0 and the other is transparent. Inside the transparent window, a part of the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 is provided so as to be visible.

  FIG. 112 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2. Here, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type pachinko ball will be mainly described.

  The gaming board holding frame 95 of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a rotating lever 100 for mounting the gaming board. By rotating the rotating lever 100, the gaming board 26 can be attached and detached. The game board 26 is provided with the already described large winning openings (1) and (2), starting openings (1) and (2), and normal winning openings (1) to (4), and corresponds to the respective winning openings. A winning ball detector (not shown) for detecting winning balls is provided. The detection signal of the winning ball detector is transmitted to the main control board 16 described later. All the winning balls detected by the winning ball detector are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and flow down through the winning ball downflow path 147. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 45 merges with the winning ball flowing down the winning ball downflow path 147 and flows down the merging passage path 702. A merging passage detection switch 232 is provided on the merging passage 702, and a ball flowing down the merging passage 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, a foul ball that has been fired toward the game area but has not reached the game area is detected by the foul ball detection switch 233 after being discharged from the foul ball return port 150. When a foul ball occurs, the game ball subtracted by the ball firing is returned to the player (1 is added). After that, the foul ball enters the merge passage path 702. The pachinko balls that flow down the confluence passage 702 are guided to the ball collection gutter 189.

  The pachinko balls guided to the ball collection gutter 89 are pumped by the pumping device 190. The lifting device 190 includes a lifting screw that is rotated by the lifting motor 40, and the pachinko balls are lifted by rotating the lifting screw. The back of the lifting device 190 is provided with polishing members 200a and 200b (200b is not visible in the drawing) for polishing the pachinko balls in contact with the pachinko balls in the process of lifting. The surface is polished while being processed.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) of the lifting device 190, and a ball raising switch (upper) 41a is provided on the ball discharging side (upper side). These ball raising switch (upper) 41a and ball raising switch (lower) 41b detect the pachinko balls to be pumped. The pachinko balls that have been lifted by the lifting device 190 and detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a are guided to the firing ball guiding path 153 and supplied from the driven-in ball outlet 49 to the ball feeding device (not shown). The ball feeding device has a function of feeding one next pachinko ball to the ball-launching position each time the player operates the ball hitting operation handle 25 and hits one pachinko ball. The pachinko balls fed by the ball feeding device are detected by a firing detection switch (not shown), and the firing detection signal is input to the payout controller 17 as described later. The number of game balls is decremented by 1 each time a pachinko ball is detected by the launch detection switch.

  Further, game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a, 42b are provided in the middle of the pachinko ball circulation path (see FIG. 114) to detect whether or not the number of pachinko balls in the circulation path is a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces). .

  Next, referring to FIG. 113, in the pachinko machine 2, a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 205 and a glass door 206 are provided on a frame-shaped outer frame 204 so as to be openable and closable with a left side edge thereof as a swing center. Has been.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 206a and 206b are provided near the edge of the front frame 205 on the side opposite to the swing center. The engagement protrusions 206a and 206b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 207a and 207b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 206a and 206b of the outer frame 204. By pressing the open front frame 205 against the outer frame 204, the engagement protrusions 206a and 206b move over the engagement receiving pieces 207a and 207b, and when the engagement protrusions 206a and 206b are moved over, the engagement protrusions 206a and 206b are moved downward by the biasing force of the spring. It moves and becomes locked.

  A front frame opening solenoid 211 is provided on the rear surface side of the front frame 205, and the front frame opening solenoid 211 is excited to resist a biasing force of a spring, thereby forming a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 206a and 206b. Is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement protrusions 206a and 206b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 207a and 207b to enter the unlocked state, and the front frame 5 is opened.

  Further, the front frame 205 is also provided with an engaging projection 208 for the glass door 206, and an engaging hole 209 is provided in a portion of the glass door 206 facing the engaging projection 208. The engagement protrusion 208 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and by pressing the open glass door 206 against the front frame 205, the engagement protrusion 208 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 209. By overcoming, the engaging protrusion 208 is pushed down by the urging force of the spring, and the engaging protrusion 208 and the engaging hole 209 are engaged with each other to be in a locked state. In this state, by energizing the glass door opening solenoid 210 provided on the back surface of the front frame 205, the engagement protrusion 208 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 208 and the engagement hole 209 are pulled. The engagement with and is released and the lock is released, and the glass door 206 is opened.

  A front frame closing detector 213 is provided at a position in contact with the front frame 205 in an upper portion of the outer frame 204, and it is detected that the front frame 205 is pressed against the outer frame 204 and is in a locked state. Further, a glass door closing detector 212 is provided at a portion of the upper portion of the front frame 205 that is in contact with the glass door 206, and the fact that the glass door 206 is pressed by the front frame 205 and is in a locked state is the glass door. It is detected by the closure detector 212.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main controller 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 is a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (functioning as a work area of the CPU). Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal integrity with peripheral devices, etc. The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a connection portion 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection portion 420 to the card unit 3 side. These connecting portions 330 and 420 are composed of, for example, connectors. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 420 and the connection wiring.

  When the CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, it sends an error display command to the display control unit 797 and displays an error on the display 312. And a control for lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 sends an error display command to the display control unit 797 to cause an error to the display unit 312. The display is displayed, an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and control is performed to transmit a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  The currency discriminator 344 described above discriminates the authenticity and type of the bill, and the discrimination result signal is input to the main controller 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the infrared rays emitted from the remote controller possessed by the attendant of the game arcade, the received light signal is input to the main controller 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the record information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 writes the information on the inserted card to the card reader / writer 327. When the data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data in the inserted card.

  The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327, and when it determines that the card is an improper card (counterfeit card or the like), the display control unit 797 displays an error display command. Is executed to cause the display 312 to display an error, an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a control signal for notifying the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred is executed. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the main control unit 323 to the display control unit 797. The display controller 797 receives the output display data and controls the display 312 to display the display data. When the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323 via the display control unit 797.

  When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main controller 323. When the player operates the call button 798, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the credit button 421, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the credit settlement button 422, the operation signal is input to the main controller 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 has a main control board 16 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control section 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control section 34, a launch section 39, and a rendering section 50. Is provided.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323, and the CU communication control unit 80 and the P communication control unit 81 provided in the pachinko machine 2 are connected via a connector 330 and a connector 420. It is electrically connected. Further, the P communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 are configured by a one-chip LSI 799. Then, various commands are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P communication control unit 81, and the various commands are transmitted from the P communication control unit 81 to the payout control unit 17.

  The commands include addition requests p, c, subtraction requests p, c, game permission / prohibition requests, addition request ball numbers p, c, and subtraction request ball numbers p, c. These commands are addition requests p, c, subtraction requests p, c, game permission / prohibition requests, addition request numbers p, c, and subtraction request numbers p, c of the commands in the S units described above. Is a command corresponding to each of.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P communication control unit 81, the number of game balls, the number of additions p and c, the number of subtraction p and c, the starting mouth winning information, the number of symbol determinations, the big hit information, Various responses of error information are transmitted.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 16. The gaming machine control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (functioning as a work area of the CPU). Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal integrity with peripheral devices, etc.

  The payout control unit 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (functioning as a work area of the CPU). Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal integrity with peripheral devices, etc. Note that the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and the P communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799 may be integrated into one chip.

  In addition, for the payout control unit 17, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120, the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121, the merging path detection switch 232, the foul ball detection switch 233, the glass door opening solenoid 210, the front frame opening solenoid 211, and the glass. The door closing detector 212 and the front frame closing detector 213 are provided in an electrically connected state.

  The configurations of the addition pseudo ball unit 120 and the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 are as described with reference to FIG. However, the pseudo ball 124 in the addition pseudo ball unit 120 and the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 applied to the pachinko gaming machine is a model of a pachinko ball. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the pachinko balls move from top to bottom from the two vertically long transparent windows W0 and W1 provided on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine. Instead of a pachinko ball, a game medal-shaped object similar to that shown in FIG. 8 may be used.

  From the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, a connection confirmation signal, a winning detection signal, a winning opening winning information, error information, the number of times of symbol determination, big hit information, and maker-specific big hit information.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control section 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control section 17. Therefore, the payout control unit 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting opening. The start-up winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won in either the start-up opening (1) or the start-up opening (2). On the main control board 16, a prize winning ball detector (not shown) corresponding to each of the big winning openings (1) and (2), the starting openings (1) and (2), and the normal winning openings (1) to (4). The detection signal is input from. On the main control board 16, the number of balls to be awarded according to the occurrence of winning is stored for each winning opening. For example, there are 15 prizes per win at the special winning openings (1) and (2), 5 per win at the starting openings (1) and (2), and 10 per win at the normal winning openings (1) to (4). Award balls are supported. The main control board 16 specifies the number of balls to be given based on the stored and input detection signal, and the winning detection signal or the winning opening to the starting opening (1) (2) that can specify the specified number of balls. In this case, the starting mouth winning information is transmitted to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17, which has received the winning detection signal or the starting mouth winning information, performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the “credit number” and the “addition number c”. . The "credit number" here is the value of the "credit number counter" described later, and the "addition number c" is the value of the "credit addition number counter" described later.

  The error information is information for notifying the payout control unit 17 of an error when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing the game control. Specific examples of the error include, for example, a timing sensor error in which a magnet is brought close to the game area 27 to guide the game ball to the winning port, a radio wave sensor error in which an illegal radio wave is transmitted to illegally turn on the prize ball detection switch, and a variable prize is awarded. There is an erroneous winning error in which a detection signal is output from a 10-count switch that detects a winning ball of a variable winning ball device when the ball device (attacker) is closed. When the CPU of the main control board 16 detects such an error or non-connection due to the connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls lighting or blinking of a call lamp provided on the curtain board, and at the same time the I / O port of the main control board 16 is controlled. (Not shown) outputs an abnormality notification signal for notifying the hall management computer 1 that an abnormality has occurred.

  The number of times of symbol determination is the information of the symbol determined as the display result of the variable display device with respect to the winning in the starting opening (1) or the starting opening (2).

  The big hit information is information indicating that a big hit has occurred, and its details include common big hit information indicating a big hit common to each maker and maker-specific big hit information indicating a maker-specific big hit. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each game machine maker, such as a 15-round jackpot, etc., and if a probability variation occurs with the jackpot, it includes probability variation information and is associated with the jackpot. When a time saving state (a control state that shortens the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time saving information is included. The maker-specific jackpot is a jackpot state adopted only by a certain game machine maker, such as a sudden change (sudden change).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout controller 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the addition number has been accepted.

  An out-ball detection signal is input from the merging path detection switch 232 to the payout controller 17. The payout control unit 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 233 adds and updates the credit amount.

  The payout controller 17 controls the excitation of the glass door opening solenoid 210, so that the glass door 206 can be unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG. 113. The payout controller 17 controls the excitation of the front frame opening solenoid 211, whereby the front frame 205 is unlocked and can be opened as described with reference to FIG. 113.

  As described with reference to FIG. 113, by pressing the glass door 206 against the front frame 205 to close it, a glass door closing detection signal is output from the glass door closing detector 212 and input to the payout controller 17. As described with reference to FIG. 113, by pressing the front frame 205 against the outer frame 204 to close it, a front frame close detection signal is output from the front frame close detector 213 and input to the payout controller 17.

  The CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3 and the P unit control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and the CU communication control unit 80 adds to the payout control unit 17 via the P unit control unit 81. Various commands of request p, c, subtraction request p, c, game permission / prohibition request, addition request ball number p, c, subtraction request ball number p, c are transmitted.

  The addition request p (game ball) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when the game balls are lent out from the prepaid balance or replayed out. The payout control unit 17 receives the addition request p (gaming ball) command. While driving 120, the number of game balls and the number of additions p (game ball) are added and updated. The subtraction request p (gaming ball) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when the game balls are dividedly transferred (ball sharing processing) or a wagon service is performed, and the payout control unit 17 having received the command causes the subtraction pseudo ball. The unit 121 is driven, the number of game balls is subtracted and updated, and the number of subtractions p (game ball) is added and updated. The payout control unit 17 updates the score display on the display 51 based on the updated number of game balls, and also transmits the updated addition number p (game ball) and subtraction number p (game ball) to the CU. To do. The CU waits for the reception of this data and updates the display of the number of game balls. As a result, the display of the number of game balls on the CU side as well as on the P unit side is updated based on the detection of the pseudo balls.

  The addition request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the game balls are deducted into credits, and the payout control unit 31 receives and updates the credit number. The subtraction request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the credit settlement is performed, and the payout control unit 31 receiving the command subtracts and updates the credit number.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command for requesting the payout control unit 17 to permit the game or a command for prohibiting the game.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P unit control unit 81, the number of game balls, the number of credits, the number of additions (game balls, credits), the number of subtractions (game balls, credits), starting mouth winning information, Various responses such as the number of times of symbol determination, big hit information, and error information are transmitted. The number of game balls is calculated by the payout control unit 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, a start mouth winning information, an out ball detection signal, and a foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. It is the total number of game balls played at the moment.

  The addition number p (game ball) is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls on the CU side. The number of additions (credits) is the number to be added to the number of credits on the CU side. From the main control board 16 to the payout controller 17, the winning detection signal, the starting mouth winning information, and the foul ball detection signal are input. When the condition for adding credits based on the detection of those starting winnings and other winnings is established, the current credit number is added and updated. However, when the credit upper limit value (for example, 125 in the case of P units) is exceeded, since the excess amount is added to the number of game balls, the addition condition for adding the number of game balls is satisfied. To do. In this case, the pseudo ball 124 for addition is moved / detected, the game ball number counter is added and updated based on the detection of the pseudo ball 124, and the addition ball number counter is also updated. .

  Furthermore, even when the number p of requested addition balls is transmitted from the CU side, the addition condition for adding the number of game balls is established, and the pseudo ball unit 121 for addition moves and detects the pseudo ball 124, When the gaming ball number counter is added and updated based on the detection of the pseudo ball 124, the added ball number counter is added and updated.

  The value of the added ball number counter is transmitted to the CU as the added number p as an operation response command as in the case of S units. The CU receives the added number p and adds the number of game balls.

  The subtraction number p (game ball) is the number of balls to be subtracted from the number of game balls on the CU side. The subtraction number c (credit) is a number to be subtracted from the credit number on the CU side. A launch detection signal is input from the game ball control unit 34 to the payout control unit 17. When the subtraction condition for subtracting the credit number based on the firing detection signal is satisfied, the payout control unit 17 adds the subtraction number c (credit) without driving the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121. On the other hand, when the subtraction request ball number p is transmitted from the CU side due to a request of the wagon service or the like, the subtraction condition for subtracting the game ball number is satisfied, but in this case, the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 simulates The ball is moved / detected, and the subtraction number p (gaming ball) is added based on the detection of the pseudo ball.

  The subtraction number (gaming ball, credit) is transmitted to the CU as an operation response command as in the case of S units. The CU receives the subtraction number (game ball, credit) and subtracts the game ball number or the credit number.

  Each response of the starting opening winning information, the number of times of symbol determination, the big hit information, and the error information is a response that specifies the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17.

  A launch motor 38, a touch ring 35, a single-shot launch switch 36, and a launch motor origin sensor 37 are provided in a launch unit 38 of the game ball control unit. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hit ball operation handle 25 and outputting a signal thereof (touch ring input signal). When the touch ring input signal is input, the firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 28. The single-shot launch switch 36 is for the player to perform an operation (single-shot launch operation) for driving the pachinko balls into the game area 27 one by one, and when the single-shot launch operation is performed, the single-shot launch switch 36 is operated. A single shot switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 28 and outputs the detection signal, and the origin is detected and the signal is output every time the firing motor 28 makes one rotation.

  The signal of the touch ring and the detection signal of the single shot switch are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control board 31. In addition, a launch detection signal indicating that a pachinko ball is launched and a launch motor origin sensor detection signal are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17, which has received the launch detection signal, updates the subtraction number c (credit) by 1 and updates the gaming ball number by 1 in response to the detection of one shot ball. Note that the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are not driven in the case of launch detection.

  A discharge control signal and a discharge permission signal are output from the payout control unit 17 to the discharge control board 31. The firing control board 31 having received it outputs a signal for exciting the firing motor 28. As a result, the pachinko balls are in a state of being shot and ejected to the game area 27.

  As described with reference to FIG. 112, the lifting unit 39 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with the lifting motor 40, the doffing switch (upper) 41a, and the doffing switch (lower) 41b. ing. Further, the lifting unit 39 is provided with a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b). The game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 1 and 2 are switches for detecting whether the total number (for example, 50) of the pachinko balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 is excessive or insufficient.

  A delivery motor excitation output signal for exciting the delivery motor 40 is transmitted from the delivery control unit 17 to the delivery unit 39. On the other hand, a signal for lifting detection (pass / full) based on the detection signals of the doffing switch (upper) 41a and the doffing switch (lower) 41b is transmitted from the lifting unit 39 to the payout control unit 17. , 50 supply detection signals as the detection signals of the game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and the game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b) are input.

  The production unit 50 includes a display production control board 53, a display power supply board 51, a display power relay board 52, a display 54, a display ROM board 55, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. It is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Then, by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the display ROM substrate 55, the image data is read out, the display data is transmitted to the display 54, and the display screen is displayed on the display 54. Do. In addition, the button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 54. The display screen is output and a display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 is displayed on the display unit 54.

  The display effect control board 53 is supplied with power of a predetermined voltage from the display power board 51 via the display power relay board 52.

  The display control command is transmitted from the payout controller 17 to the display effect control board 53. The display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit operation command, and a test command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 2 such as the number of big hits and the number of probability changes, and the card unit operation command is a command by the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect unit 50.

  As a command from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after the transmission of the previous command. Then, the display control board 53 for a display detects the line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received even after the fixed time exceeding 300 ms has elapsed after the command was received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though it has exceeded 300 ms since the last command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times in a row, The effect control board 53 detects the time-out, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 54 to display the lighting of the call lamp and the error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, main ones of various data stored on the CU side and the P unit side and their transmission / reception modes will be described. However, the various data stored on the CU side and the P unit side and the transmission / reception mode thereof are the same as those on the CU side and the S unit side described above.

  In the present embodiment, the CU side manages the current number of game balls and credits by calculating fluctuations in the number of game balls and credits on the P-side. Although the current number of game balls and the number of credits are calculated and stored also on the P machine side, when the number of credits on the P machine side becomes 0, the P machine itself quickly stops the ball-hitting. It is a side-effect used only to provide control. Since the CU side mainly manages the number of game balls and the number of credits, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls and the number of credits on the P machine side, and the cost of the P machine is increased accordingly. It can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, the P machine has a shorter replacement cycle in the game hall than the CU, and the replacement is performed early. For this reason, the CU side has a main management function relating to the number of game balls and the number of credits on the P machine side to suppress the cost on the P machine side, thereby reducing the running cost of the game hall in which the enclosed game machine is introduced. There is an advantage that you can.

  FIG. 115 shows the storage data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and the storage data of the RAM mounted in the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side. First, when the P unit (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) are installed in the game hall and electrically connected for the first time, the payout controller 17 on the P unit side The main control board 16 sends a main chip ID, the main chip ID is sent to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17 itself is sent to the CU side.

  The CU side stores the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU side and the P unit side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P unit side, and the P unit side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P unit side. After that, when the power is turned on, these three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P unit side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data is compared with the already stored data to determine whether or not the same P units as the previous one are connected. As for the connection time data, new connection time data when communication between the CU side and the P-side is started each time the power is turned on is transmitted from the CU side to the P-side, and the new connection time data is transmitted. Will be stored on the P side.

  Also, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented and updated by "1" each time the operation instruction and the operation response are transmitted on the CU side and the P unit side, and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P unit side. It This SQN is a communication number for confirming whether or not the number is updated every time data is transmitted and received between the CU and the P unit to confirm whether the communication is properly performed. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication numbers.

  Current ball related information (counting ball related information) and current credit number related information (counting credit number related information) are transmitted from the P side to the CU side. Hereinafter, the present ball related information and the present credit number related information are collectively referred to as present ball / credit related information. This current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM.

  Specifically, when a pachinko ball hit in the game area 27 wins and the additional number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the additional number c ( (Credit) is counted, and the value of the credit credit addition number counter (addition number c (credit)) is transmitted from the P-side to the CU side. Further, if a pachinko ball is shot in the game area 27 and the shot ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch, the credit subtraction counter counts the shot ball as the subtraction number c (credits) based on the detection signal. , The value of the credit subtraction number counter (subtraction number c) is transmitted from the P-side to the CU side.

  When the value of the credit addition number counter exceeds the upper limit value 125, the excess amount is added as a score, so the addition pseudo ball unit 120 is driven and the pseudo ball is moved / detected. Then, the added ball number counter and the game ball number counter are added and updated.

  Further, a pachinko ball is won in the starting opening (1) or the starting opening (2), and the starting opening (1) winning signal or the starting opening (2) winning signal is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. In this case, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of winnings by the starting opening 1 winning number counter or the starting opening 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P-side to the CU side. Further, when such a start winning occurs, the current credit amount is considered based on the occurrence of the winning prize, and for the game balls exceeding the upper limit of the credit amount, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 is driven and the pseudo balls are added. The added ball number counter and the game ball number counter are added and updated based on the movement / detection of 124. In the payout control unit 17, the number of game balls at the present time is counted by the game ball number counter based on the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball number counter and the count value of the addition ball number counter And the count value of the subtraction ball number counter are transmitted from the P machine side to the CU side.

  Further, in the payout control unit 17, the credit number counter counts the current credit number based on the credit addition number counter and the credit subtraction number counter, and the count value of the credit number counter and the count value of the credit addition number counter are compared with each other. The count value of the credit subtraction counter is transmitted from the P-side to the CU side.

  The addition ball number counter is incremented according to the addition request ball number p (gaming ball) even when the addition request ball number p (gaming ball) is input from the CU side. Similarly, the subtraction ball number counter is incremented according to the subtraction request ball number p (gaming ball) even when the subtraction request ball number p (gaming ball) is input from the CU side. The credit addition number counter is incremented according to the addition requesting ball number c (credit) even when the addition requesting ball number c (credit) is input from the CU side. Similarly, the credit subtraction number counter is incremented according to the subtraction requesting ball number c (credit) even when the subtraction requesting ball number c (credit) is input from the CU side.

  The CU sends the number of requested balls to be added (gaming balls, credits) or the number of requested balls to be deducted (gaming balls, credits), and then from the S side, the number of added balls counter, the number of subtracted balls counter, the number of credits added counter, and the credit subtraction After waiting for the update result of the number counter to be transmitted, a request for addition or subtraction of the number of game balls and the number of credits is confirmed.

  On the P side, the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, the credit added number counter, the credit subtracted number counter, the starting opening (1) winning counter, the starting opening (2) winning counter, the gaming ball counter and the credit counting counter. Each time the value of is sent to the CU side, these count values are stored (rewritten) as backup data in the previous ball / credit related information storage area, and then the number of added balls counter and the number of subtracted balls as current ball / credit related information are stored. The values of the counter, the credit addition number counter, the credit subtraction number counter, the starting opening 1 winning number counter, and the starting opening 2 winning number counter are cleared to zero. In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball / credit related information (previously transmitted current ball / credit related information), the added number (gaming ball, credit) which is the current ball / credit related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before. , Subtraction number (gaming ball, credit), starting opening 1 winning number, and starting opening 2 winning number data are stored as backup data. This backup data is not only the value of each counter this time at the time of the next transmission when the current ball / credit related information is not transmitted from the P unit side to the CU side, but also the value of each previous counter not transmitted. Is also to be able to send.

  On the CU side, in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM, the total addition number p (game balls, total addition number), total subtraction number p (game ball, total reduction number), total addition number c (credit, total addition number) ), Total subtraction number c (credits, cumulative subtraction number), starting opening (1) total winning number (starting opening (1) total number of times), starting opening (2) total winning number (starting opening (2) total number of times), The number of game balls and the number of credits are stored.

  Based on the added numbers p and c transmitted from the P side, the total added numbers p and c, the number of game balls and the number of credits are updated. Further, the total subtraction number p, c, the number of game balls, and the credit number are updated based on the subtraction number p, c transmitted from the P side. Further, the starting mouth (1) total winning number is updated based on the value of the starting port 1 winning number counter transmitted from the P units, and the value of the starting port 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side is updated. Based on this, the total number of winning openings (2) is updated. In this way, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls and the number of credits based on the current ball / credit related information transmitted from P units one by one. Similarly, the CU updates the total addition number p, c, the total subtraction number p, c, the starting openings (1), (2) the total winning number based on the current ball / credit related information transmitted from P units one by one. This makes it possible to manage the latest information.

  In addition to the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, the credit added number counter, and the credit subtracted number counter, the CU counts the game ball number counter and the credit number counter (the number of game balls and credits). (Also called number or game ball / credit total number information) is received, but the number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the value of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the credit number is It is updated based on the values of the credit addition number counter and the credit subtraction number counter, and the count values of the game ball number counter and the credit number counter sent from the P machine side are not used. Therefore, even if the number of game balls and the number of credits sent from the P unit side do not match the number of game balls and the number of credits managed on the CU side, the number of game balls and the number of credits on the CU side are It is not updated with the number of game balls and the number of credits sent from the P machine side.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the CU further has a storage area for storing the accumulated coins and a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 114) of the CU responds to an input requesting the use of the accumulated coins (for example, a push input of a replay button (also referred to as a replay button) 319 (see FIG. 114) provided in the CU). Then, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing the balls. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 114) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation of deducting the value from the gaming value owned by the player (for example, the prepaid balance or the number of accumulated coins) and used for the game, the number of balls deducted from the game ball The addition requesting ball number p (gaming ball) for adding to the number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P side. On the P side, in response to this, the pseudo ball 124 is moved, and on the condition of the detection, the game ball number counter and the added ball number counter are added and updated. The value of the added ball number counter after the addition update is transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for the reception of the data and confirms the addition request.

  On the other hand, when an operation to perform a so-called wagon service order, such as withdrawing the gaming value owned by the player (here, the number of gaming balls) and exchanging it for drinks, etc., the gaming value owned by the player The subtraction requesting ball number p (gaming ball) of is transmitted from the CU side to the P side. On the P side, in response to this, the pseudo ball 124 is moved, and on the condition of the detection, the game ball number counter is decremented and updated, and the deduction ball number counter is additionally updated. The value of the subtraction ball number counter after the addition update is transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for the reception of the data and confirms the subtraction request.

  FIG. 116 is a block diagram showing a part of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 related to addition and subtraction of the number of game balls. In FIG. 116, the card unit 3 is provided with a display 312 and a main controller 323, and the pachinko machine 2 has a display 54, a payout controller 17, an addition pseudo ball unit 120, a subtraction pseudo ball unit 121, and A main control board 16 is provided. The configurations of the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are as described with reference to FIGS. However, as the pseudo ball 124, a model imitating a pachinko ball is used.

  When the player deducts the balance, inserts a card in which the game balls are recorded (with the game ball), performs a replay operation of the stored balls, pays the credit, etc., the main control unit 323 sends the game balls to the payout control unit 31. A request for addition is sent. Further, when the player makes a wagon service request or a request to divide and transfer the game balls by operating the touch panel on the screen, and the game balls are deducted into credits, the main controller 323 sends the game balls to the payout controller 31. The subtraction request is transmitted.

  On the other hand, on the pachinko gaming machine 2 side, when a winning (including a starting winning) is detected, the fact is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout controller 31. When there is an addition request p from the main control unit 323, or when a winning that exceeds the upper limit of the current credit number is detected, an addition condition for adding the number of game balls is satisfied. In this case, the addition pseudo ball unit 120 is driven, and the number of game balls is updated on the condition that the pseudo balls are moved and detected. When there is a subtraction request p from the main control unit 323, a subtraction condition for subtracting the number of game balls is generated. However, in this case, the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 is driven, and the number of game balls is updated on the condition that the pseudo balls are moved and detected.

  When the addition condition of the game balls is satisfied, the payout control unit 31 sets the addition target value according to the cause. The addition target value is the number of detected pseudo balls 124. In the present embodiment, as in the case of S units, the planned number of updated game balls and the addition target value have a one-to-one correspondence.

  When the addition condition of the number of game balls is satisfied, the payout control unit 17 sets the addition target value corresponding to the score to be added according to the satisfied addition condition, and the rotation of the addition pseudo ball unit 120. When the body 123 is rotated and the pseudo balls 124 are detected, the game ball number counter and the addition ball number counter are incremented (+1), and when the same number of the pseudo balls 124 as the addition target value is detected, the game ball number counter and the addition are performed. After the ball number counter is incremented, the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped.

  When the subtraction condition for the number of game balls is satisfied, the payout control unit 31 sets a subtraction target value corresponding to the score to be subtracted according to the satisfied subtraction condition, and the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121. The rotating body 123 is rotated, the subtraction ball number counter is incremented each time the pseudo ball 124 is detected, the game ball number counter is decremented, and when the same number of the pseudo balls 124 as the subtraction target value is detected, the subtraction ball number counter Is incremented to decrement the game ball number counter, and then the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped.

  The count value of the game ball number counter is displayed on the P displays 54. As a result, the score display on the display units 54 of the P units is updated on the basis that the same number of pseudo ball movements as the planned number of game ball updates is detected.

  The payout control unit 31 adds and updates the credit number counter by the addition of the credit addition number counter when the credit addition number counter is added and updated, and updates the credit subtraction number counter by the credit subtraction number counter when the credit subtraction number counter is added and updated. Subtract and update only the addition amount of. The count value of the credit number counter is displayed on the P displays 54.

  Further, the count values of the P addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number counter are the addition ball number p and the subtraction ball number p, and the count values of the credit addition number counter and the credit subtraction number counter are the addition number c and the subtraction number c. , Are transmitted to the main control unit 323 of the CU at fixed time intervals. The main control unit 323 calculates and stores the total number of game balls at the current stage, and the total number of game balls at the current stage is displayed on the display unit 312 of the CU. As a result, the number of game balls displayed on the display unit 312 on the CU side is also updated based on the detection of the same number of pseudo ball movements as the planned number of game ball update. Similarly, the current credit amount is displayed on the display unit 312 of the CU.

  Next, the adding operation of the payout controller 17 will be described in more detail. First, the operation of the payout control unit 31 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 2 is turned on is the same as the operation described with reference to FIG. 9, so the description thereof will not be repeated here.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 117, an addition process of the payout control unit 17 when the addition condition of the game ball is satisfied will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the addition process of the payout control unit 17 when the addition condition of the game balls is satisfied. In FIG. 117, the payout control unit 17 waits until the addition condition of the game ball is satisfied in step S60, and when the addition condition of the game ball is satisfied, the addition target value is set in step S61 and the pseudo ball unit 120 is set. The drive pattern for rotationally driving the rotating body 123 (see FIG. 8) is set.

  In addition, the condition for adding game balls is that when a card in which the number of game balls is recorded is inserted into the CU, when a withdrawal operation of the balance is detected by the CU, when an operation of re-playing the accumulated coins is detected by the CU, This is established when an operation of converting credits into game balls (credit settlement operation) is detected, and when credits are given in excess of the upper limit of the number of credits (when a prize is generated).

  If the condition for adding game balls is not satisfied, it is determined in step S60A whether or not the condition for adding the number of credits is satisfied. The conditions determined here are the occurrence of winning and the occurrence of foul balls.

  In step S60A, if the condition for adding to the number of credits is not satisfied, NO is determined and it is determined again whether or not the condition for adding game balls in step S60 is satisfied.

  On the other hand, if any of the credit addition conditions is satisfied, it is determined in step S60A that "the credit is added". In this case, in step S60B, it is determined whether the total of the current value of the credit number counter and the credit number (addition target value) given by the establishment of the credit addition condition exceeds 125, which is the upper limit of the credit number counter. Determine. When it exceeds, in order to convert the surplus into a game ball and add it to the game ball counter, the surplus is set as the addition target value. For example, when the value of the credit number counter is 115 and 15 points are awarded, the addition target value is set to 5.

  On the other hand, if the total of the current credit number counter and the value to be added does not exceed the upper limit of 125, only the addition of credits is sufficient, so the process returns to step S60 again, and the condition for adding game balls is satisfied. Determine whether or not When the credit addition condition is satisfied, the credit is updated by another credit addition process (not shown).

  In step S60C, the payout control unit 31 sets the addition target value to a value obtained by subtracting 125, which is the upper limit of the credit number, from the sum of the credit number counter and the addition target value, and sets the credit addition number counter value from the upper limit of 125. A value obtained by subtracting the credit number counter value is set, and the credit number counter is set to 125 which is the upper limit.

  The target value to be added is set based on the content of the addition request (withdrawal from the card balance, insertion of a card on which game balls are recorded, replaying of stored balls, credit settlement), the relationship between the type of prize and the credit counter. .

  Further, the drive pattern of the addition pseudo ball unit 120 differs depending on the type of addition condition for adding the number of game balls. The payout control unit 31 stores drive pattern data for each addition condition. For example, when the credit counter exceeds the upper limit when a prize is generated, drive pattern data for rotating the rotating body 123 at a constant speed until the pseudo balls 124 exceeding the upper limit are detected is selected. Alternatively, when the balance is withdrawn based on the lending operation, the rotating body 123 is rotated at a constant speed until a predetermined unit number (for example, 125) of pseudo ball movements is detected, and then temporarily stopped. The drive pattern data is selected such that the rotating body 123 is rotated until the predetermined unit number of pseudo balls 124 move again after a predetermined period until the addition target value (125 pieces) is reached.

  Next, the payout control unit 17 supplies the drive pulse φP to the addition pseudo ball unit 120 at a predetermined cycle based on the set drive pattern to rotate the rotating body 123. In step S63, the payout controller 17 determines whether or not the pseudo ball 124 is detected based on the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131. When the pseudo ball 124 is not detected in step S63, the process returns to step S62, and when the pseudo ball 124 is detected, it is determined in step S64 whether or not it is the second or subsequent detection.

  When it is determined in step S64 that the detection is the second or later detection, it is determined in step S65 whether the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range. If it is determined in step S65 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is not within the specified range, there is a possibility that the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 has failed or an illegal act has been performed. Therefore, an error occurs in step S66. Perform processing. The error processing includes stopping the game, displaying the occurrence of an abnormality, and reporting the occurrence of an abnormality.

  If it is determined in step S65 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range, the added ball number counter and the game ball number counter are incremented (+1) in step S67.

  Next, in step S671, it is determined whether or not the addition condition of the game ball determined to be established in S60 is credit settlement. If it is not the credit settlement, the process proceeds to step S68. In the case of credit settlement, in order to subtract credits in conjunction with addition of game balls, in step S672, the credit subtraction number counter is incremented (+1) and the credit number counter is decremented (-1).

  If it is determined in step S64 that it is not the second or subsequent detection, it is the first detection, and therefore step S65 is not executed and the addition ball number counter and the game ball number counter are incremented (+1) in step S67.

  In step S68, it is determined whether or not the addition target value is detected, that is, whether or not the count value of the addition ball number counter reaches the addition target value, and if the addition target value is not detected, the process returns to step S62. When the addition target value is detected, the output of the drive pulse φP is stopped in step S69 to stop the rotation of the rotating body 123 of the addition pseudo ball unit 120.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the payout control unit 17.
The subtraction process of the payout control unit 17 is the same as the subtraction process described in FIG. 11. That is, referring to FIG. 11, the subtraction condition of S20 is satisfied when the subtraction request number p is transmitted from the CU based on the wagon service request or the split sharing request for the number of game balls. However, the holding point subtraction number counter and the holding point number counter of FIG. 11 become a subtraction ball number counter and a game ball number counter, respectively. As described above, when a game ball is fired, the credit deduction number counter is incremented without driving the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121.

  The values of the addition ball number counter, the subtraction ball number counter, the credit addition number counter, and the credit subtraction number counter updated by the processing shown in FIGS. 117 and 118 or the processing similar to FIGS. It is included and transmitted to the CU. In response to this, the CU updates the number of game balls and the number of credits, and also updates the display of the number of game balls and the number of credits. On the other hand, the P unit displays the number of game balls and the number of credits based on the number of game balls counter and the number of credits updated by the process shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, or the process similar to FIGS. 10 and 11. Update.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, a specific example of the drive pattern in the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 will be described.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 of the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121 at the time of the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit, and FIG. 119 (b) is the request for the wagon service. 4 is a time chart showing the waveform of the signal φS1 in FIG. In FIG. 119 (a), when the player performs a withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit, the payout control unit 17 supplies the driving pulse φP to the addition pseudo ball unit 120, and the rotating body 123 is rotated. It When the tip of the pseudo ball 124 reaches the front of the optical sensor 131, the signal φS1 is raised from the “L” level to the “H” level, and when the rear end of the pseudo ball 124 passes the front of the optical sensor 131, the signal φS1 becomes “ The level is lowered from the "H" level to the "L" level. The payout control unit 31 determines that one pseudo ball 124 has passed when the rising edge and the falling edge of the signal φS1 are detected.

  The drive pattern corresponding to the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit is that the rotating body 123 is rotated at a constant speed until a predetermined unit number A (for example, 5) of pseudo ball movement is detected, and then temporarily stopped, The driving pattern is such that the rotating body 123 is rotated until the pseudo balls 124 of the predetermined unit number A again move after the predetermined period T1 until the credit number 125 is reached.

  119 (a), the payout control unit 17 cyclically moves the pseudo ball 124 at a predetermined speed in accordance with the addition request c (credit) and counts the number of positive pulses appearing in the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131. Then, when the count number of the positive pulses reaches A, the circulation movement of the pseudo balls 124 is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo balls 124 wait for a predetermined time T1. After that, the operation of circulatingly moving the pseudo balls 124 is repeated until the count number reaches A. In the present embodiment, since the number of credits given by one lending operation is 125, the above operation is repeated 25 times in total.

  FIG. 119 (b) shows a case where a request for a wagon service is detected. The payout control unit 17 sets the addition target value to B (where B is a positive integer) according to the type of the wagon service request. After that, the payout control unit 31 circulates the pseudo ball 124 at a rotation speed different from that at the time of the operation of withdrawing from the game ball to the credit of FIG. 119 (a), and the number of positive pulses appearing in the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131. Is counted, and when the number of positive pulse counts reaches B, the circulating movement of the pseudo ball 124 is stopped.

  Note that the number of subtraction of the number of game balls at the time of one withdrawal operation from game balls to credits is 125 in the case of P units. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b), the rotation speed of the rotating body 123 at the time of requesting the wagon service is made faster than that at the time of the operation of withdrawing from the game ball to the credit. In this case, the pulse width of the positive pulse of the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 in the request for the wagon service is smaller than that during the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit. Further, when one positive pulse is detected, a predetermined number of game balls of 2 or more may be subtracted.

  In this way, by changing the moving mode of the pseudo ball 124 when subtracting the game ball, the pseudo ball 124 is different depending on whether the game ball is deducted from credits or the wagon service is requested. Only by visually recognizing the movement mode of (1), it is possible to specify the factor that the number of game balls is updated. Although two cases are illustrated here as comparative examples of the addition condition, it is desirable to control so that the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 is different under each of the other subtraction conditions.

  Further, it is desirable to control the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 in the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 to be different for each addition condition. Accordingly, for example, it is desirable to similarly control the addition condition such as the stored coin replay setting only by observing the movement of the pseudo ball 124 in the addition pseudo ball unit 120. It is possible to specify whether or not the number of game balls has been added based on the stored coin replay setting.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a desirable control in the case where the condition for updating the game ball is satisfied and the condition for updating another game ball is satisfied while the pseudo ball 124 is being moved will be described.

  For example, when a withdrawal operation from a game ball to a credit is performed while moving the pseudo ball 124 based on the generation of a request for a wagon service, as shown in FIG. Continue the pseudo ball movement / detection corresponding to point B based on the request. When it is all completed, after waiting for a predetermined time T2, the subtraction process of the pseudo ball movement / detection based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit is performed by the method shown in FIG. 119 (a). That is, the processing based on the wagon service request is prioritized over the processing based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit. This priority order may be reversed. In other words, if the dummy ball movement based on the generation of the request for the wagon service is not completed at the time when the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit is detected, the wagon service request is performed after the subtraction processing based on the ball rental operation. The movement of the pseudo ball 124 based on the occurrence of the above may be continuously executed.

  When the wagon service is requested during the withdrawal from the game ball to the credit, the subtraction process based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit is immediately interrupted as shown in FIG. After waiting, subtraction processing of point B is performed based on the request of the wagon service. When the subtraction process of the point B is completed, after waiting for a predetermined time T2, the subtraction process of withdrawing from the interrupted game ball to the credit is restarted. As a result, the processing based on the request of the wagon service is prioritized over the processing based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit. In FIG. 120 (b), the A-a point is subtracted at the time of the operation of deducting from the first game ball to the credit, and the point a is subtracted at the time of the operation of deducting from the game ball to the credit after restart. It is shown. However, a is a positive integer smaller than A.

  In any case, in the present embodiment, when the two subtraction conditions are both satisfied, whether the process based on the satisfaction of one subtraction condition is executed or the process based on the satisfaction of the other subtraction condition is executed. There is one feature in that it is possible to distinguish whether or not they are doing. That is, in the example of FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b), the pause period T2 is provided when switching the pseudo ball movement based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit and the pseudo ball movement based on the generation of the wagon service request. This makes it possible to distinguish that each is a pseudo ball movement based on the satisfaction of another subtraction condition.

In addition, here, as a comparative example of the subtraction condition, the case where it is based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit and the case where it is based on the generation of the request for the wagon service are illustrated, but the other subtraction conditions are similarly set to one condition. It is desirable to provide a pause period between the end of the pseudo ball movement based on the establishment and the start of the pseudo ball movement based on the establishment of the other condition. Further, it is desirable to control not only the subtraction condition but also the addition condition such as the re-play of the stored coins.
<When pseudo ball units are provided on both CU and S units>
FIG. 121 is an example in which the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are provided on both the CU and the P units. In such a configuration, when the factor for updating the number of game balls occurs on the CU side, the dummy balls 124 are moved by the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 on the CU side, while the factor for updating the number of game balls is set. When P occurs on the P side, it is conceivable that the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 on the P side move the pseudo balls 124.

  In that case, as compared with the case where the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are provided only on the P side as shown in FIG. 116, in the case of withdrawing the balance, re-playing the stored balls, inserting a card in which game balls are recorded, and paying the credit. The addition pseudo ball unit 120 on the CU side operates, and the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction on the CU side operates during the wagon service, the game ball division transfer, and the credit button operation. Then, in these cases, the CU side can update the game ball number display according to the pseudo ball detection on the local side without waiting for an operation response indicating the update of the game ball number from the P units, and the game is played. Communication control for updating the number of balls can be simplified. On the other hand, in the case of P machines, the balance is deducted, the re-playing of coins and the insertion of the card in which the points are recorded, the credit card settlement, the wagon service and the point split transfer, and the credit button operation are simulated on the CU side. The game ball number display is updated after waiting for the addition request and the subtraction request transmitted from the CU side based on the ball detection. On the P machine side, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 is driven in consideration of the relationship with the number of credits when a winning occurs.

In the case of the configuration of FIG. 121, when the update factor of the number of game balls on the CU side occurs, the number of game balls is updated on condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected by the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 on the CU side. On the other hand, when an update factor of the number of game balls occurs on the P machine side, the number of game balls is updated on condition that the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 on the P machine side detect the pseudo ball 124. Similar to the configuration of FIG. 116, the display of the number of game balls will be performed based on the detection of the pseudo balls.
<When the pseudo ball unit is provided only on the CU>
Alternatively, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 and the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121 may be provided only on the CU side and not on the P side. In the case of such a configuration, the CU, when an update factor of the number of game balls occurs on the CU side, that is, a lending operation for withdrawing the balance of the card, a replaying operation of the stored coins, and a card insertion in which the number of game balls is recorded. When an operation for requesting a wagon service, a credit button operation, or a credit settlement occurs, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 or the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121 is operated according to the type of addition or subtraction. Subsequently, the CU updates the memory of the number of game balls according to the detection / movement of the pseudo ball 124 and updates the number of game balls displayed on the display 312. Furthermore, the operation instruction command of the addition request or the subtraction request is transmitted to the P units.

  Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the P units add and update the game ball number counter in response to the addition request, and subtractly update the game ball number counter in response to the subtraction request. Further, the display of the number of game balls on the display 51 is updated according to the value of the updated number of game balls. However, the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number counter are not updated. This is because the number of game balls has already been updated on the CU side in response to the addition request and the subtraction request.

  On the other hand, in the P unit, when the factor of updating the number of game balls occurs on the P unit side, that is, when a winning that exceeds the upper limit of the credit number counter occurs, the number of additional coins counter is additionally updated. However, at this point, the game ball number counter related to the game ball number display is not updated. Then, the P units transmit an operation response (addition number p) including the value of the addition ball number counter that has been added and updated to the CU.

  In response to this operation response, the CU activates the addition pseudo ball unit 120, adds and updates the memory of the number of game balls according to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124, and reflects the update result on the display 312. . Further, the CU sets the addition request p in response to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124 and transmits the addition request p to the P units by the operation instruction command. Receiving it, the P machines finally update the game ball number counter and reflect the updated result on the display 51.

  By controlling as described above, even if the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are provided only on the CU side, both the CU and the P units are subject to the movement / detection of the pseudo balls 124 and the number of game balls. The display can be updated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is detected when converting the points to be added, which have occurred beyond the upper limit point of the credit, into points and adding points. Since the display of the points is updated under the condition, the points can be updated by simulating the action corresponding to the discharge of the value object like the game which is not the points type.

  Also, when converting a card balance or medals (balls), which is an example of a game value, into game balls, when adding and updating points (game balls) based on the occurrence of winnings, when a credit settlement operation is performed. In addition, since the display of the points is updated on the condition that the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is detected, by performing the operation corresponding to the discharge of the value object like the game that is not the points type, The points can be updated.

  Further, when subtracting the score for sharing the score, when subtracting the score based on the request of the wagon service, and when converting the score to the credit, the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is detected. Since the display of the points is updated on the condition that the game ball is updated, the operation corresponding to the collection of the value object is simulated in the non-points-type game. You can

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the movement of the pseudo ball 124, and since the movement of the pseudo ball 124 and the update of the holding point are completely linked, There is no discrepancy between the movement and the state of the updated display of the score, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo balls 124 are repeatedly rotationally moved by rotationally driving the rotating body 123 in which the predetermined number of pseudo balls 124 are arranged, and the predetermined number of pseudo balls 124 are repeatedly used. Therefore, cost reduction can be achieved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the time interval at which the pseudo balls 124 are detected is outside the reference range, a predetermined error process is executed. Therefore, for example, the pseudo balls 124 in the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are Irrespective of the movement, by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal output from the pseudo ball unit to the game machine or CU, it is possible to prevent as much as possible an illegal act such as illegally adding and updating the score.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the rotating body 123 in the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 is moved to a predetermined initial position, and when the condition for moving the pseudo ball 124 is satisfied, the rotating body is moved from that position. Since 123 is started, the time until the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is detected after the power is turned on can be made constant.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the drive pattern for rotationally driving the rotating body 123 is different depending on each of a plurality of types of factors that move the pseudo ball 124, it is possible to visually recognize the movement pattern of the pseudo ball 124. Is the pseudo ball 124 moving based on such a factor (game ball to credit conversion operation, replay operation, point sharing operation, wagon service request, prize generation, credit button operation, credit settlement operation, etc.) Can be specified.

  Further, even when two factors out of a plurality of factors that move the pseudo balls 124 overlap, a predetermined pause period is provided between the end of one process and the start of the other process. Therefore, the control corresponding to one process and the control corresponding to the other process can be distinguished.

Next, modified examples and characteristic points of the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) The rotating body 123 of the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 may be a single disk member having an arrangement portion for arranging predetermined objects such as balls at predetermined intervals on the outer circumference. Further, the predetermined object may be detachably attached to the rotating body, or may be integrally formed with the rotating body.

  (2) In the present embodiment, the movement of the pseudo balls is made visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the actual movement of the pseudo ball is reflected in the display of subtraction update or addition update of the score, and the display of the update of the score and the movement of the pseudo ball There is no discrepancy between them.

  However, in order to prevent the player from seeing the movement of the dummy ball, a window such as a slit provided on the front surface of the gaming machine in the present embodiment may not be provided. Alternatively, a shutter may be provided in the window portion to switch between a visible state and a non-visible state. Further, the switching operation can be performed by the manager of the game arcade and the switching operation part is provided inside the game machine so that the game player cannot, or the shutter is released by a command signal from the management device carried by the manager. May be opened and closed.

  (3) The pseudo ball unit may be provided in addition to two for addition and subtraction, or a plurality of pseudo ball units may be provided according to the score point update condition. For example, a pseudo ball unit may be provided for each of withdrawal from the balance, display of card points, wagon service, winning (when the credit upper limit is exceeded), credit button operation, and credit settlement operation.

  (4) The pseudo ball unit is not limited to the structure in which the predetermined object is moved by the rotation of the rotating body 123. For example, a circulation passage for circulatingly moving a predetermined object is formed in the pseudo ball unit, and a sensor for detecting the predetermined object is provided at a predetermined position of the circulation passage. A predetermined number of predetermined objects are enclosed in such a pseudo ball unit. In this case, it is possible to realize the movement of the predetermined object by dropping the predetermined object from the upper side to the lower side and then sending the predetermined object upward by a lifting mechanism such as a screw. Alternatively, it is conceivable to provide a feeding mechanism that feeds a predetermined object in one direction at a predetermined position in the circulation passage with one row of the predetermined object enclosed in the circulation passage.

  (5) The pseudo balls may be moved only in the case of one of addition and subtraction. That is, only one of the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition and the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction in the present embodiment may be provided.

  (6) In the present embodiment, the update display of credits does not require the movement / detection of the pseudo balls. However, the update display of credits may also be conditioned on the movement / detection of the pseudo balls. In this case, the gaming machine may be provided with a pseudo ball unit for credit different from the one for the points (game balls).

  (7) Further, the circulation passage may not be provided in a unit called a pseudo ball unit, but may be provided in the gaming machine like a circulation path for P shooting balls. Alternatively, in the case of P units, a contact portion that communicates with the circulation path for the pseudo ball is provided in a part of the circulation path for the launch ball, and the connection portion is opened and closed to capture the launch ball as the pseudo ball. You may do it. For example, a pseudo ball full tank sensor for detecting whether or not the pseudo ball in the circulation path for the pseudo ball is full is provided, and the contact portion is opened until the full tank is detected, and the full tank is detected. The payout control unit 17 or the main control board may execute the control of closing the communication unit at the specified stage.

  (8) In addition, a discharge / insertion unit capable of discharging / injecting the pseudo balls may be provided at a predetermined position of the circulation path, if necessary.

  (9) When the condition for adding points is satisfied, the gaming machine selects, from the plurality of pseudo balls in the circulation path, the number of pseudo balls corresponding to the number of points to be added from the predetermined first position in the circulation path. While moving to the second location, in consideration of the relationship with the number of credits, the stored points are added and updated, and a response command for adding points is transmitted to the CU. The CU may add and update the stored points.

  (10) When the score subtraction condition is satisfied, the gaming machine selects, from among the plurality of pseudo balls in the circulation path, the number of pseudo balls corresponding to the number of points to be subtracted, in the second position in the circulation path. From the above to the first location, and in consideration of the relationship with the number of credits, the stored points are subtracted and updated, and a response command for subtracting the points is transmitted to the CU. The CU may subtract and update the stored points.

  (11) Even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the pseudo ball may be moved from the first position to the second position, as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the pseudo ball may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the pseudo ball may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  (12) Further, if a plurality of movement paths for moving a predetermined object are provided between the first location and the second location, the update is performed when the addition condition or the subtraction condition is satisfied once. If the number of points to be updated is large (for example, the number of payouts based on winnings is large, the number of subtractions based on the conversion from points to credits is large, or the bet amount is the MAX value), The pseudo balls corresponding to the number of updates of can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable operation in which the pseudo ball continues to move endlessly even though the update display of the score is completed.

  (13) Further, if the first portion and the second portion are arranged so as to have a relation between the upper portion and the lower portion in the vertical direction, a predetermined object is moved from the first portion to the second portion. It can be naturally dropped by its own weight, and the movement mechanism of the pseudo ball can be simplified. In this case, the pseudo balls are allowed to flow down from the first location to the first location for both the addition update and the subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the pseudo balls may be made to flow down from the first location to the first location only in one of the case of adding and updating the number of points. Alternatively, a downflow route for addition update of holding points and a downflow route for subtraction updating of holding points may be separately provided, and a perspective window for addition update visual recognition and a perspective window for subtraction update visual recognition may be respectively provided. Good.

  (14) In particular, when a game ball is used as the predetermined object, the predetermined object can be circulated more smoothly than when a medal is used as the predetermined object because its shape is spherical. As the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball that is commonly used in game stores. In this case, for example, when the number of game machines is S, if the number of pachinko balls corresponding to the value of one medal (point value = 1) of the slot machine corresponds to 5, the number of points is updated. In this case, the pachinko balls having 5 times the renewal score will be moved between the first location and the second location. In addition, the pachinko balls visually recognized through the see-through window provided between the first location and the second location are "showing balls" exclusively for showing the player that the points are being updated. Will function as.

  (15) In addition, in the above example, it has been described that the slot machine is adopted while the score point system is adopted, and the score point is updated in association with the movement of the predetermined object in the predetermined direction. Instead of a predetermined object such as a medal or a game ball, a dedicated object (for example, a spherical object made of a material different from that of a general pachinko ball) is used to update the points in synchronization with the movement of the predetermined object. Good.

  (16) The pseudo ball unit may be an addition / subtraction unit that is used for both, instead of being divided into two for addition and one for subtraction. In this case, it is sufficient to provide the pseudo ball unit on either the CU or the game machine. Of course, only one of the CU and the gaming machine is provided with an addition / subtraction unit, the other is not provided with a pseudo ball unit, the other is provided with an addition / subtraction unit, and the other is for addition and subtraction. Any of the above two pseudo ball units may be adopted.

  (17) When a dual-purpose addition / subtraction unit is used as the pseudo ball unit, the moving direction of the pseudo ball may be different between when the points are added and when the points are added. Accordingly, by confirming the moving direction of the pseudo ball, it is possible to specify whether the point is point addition or point subtraction. Alternatively, the moving direction of the pseudo balls may be the same, and the moving speed may be different.

  (18) When a dual-purpose addition / subtraction unit is used as the pseudo ball unit, a control method becomes a problem when both the point addition condition and the point subtraction condition are satisfied. In such a case, for example, one may be processed first and the other may be processed thereafter. In that case, it is desirable to provide a certain pause period between the end of one process and the start of the other process so that one process can be distinguished from the other process.

  (19) When the addition condition and the subtraction condition of the holding points are both satisfied, the difference between the addition point due to the satisfaction of the addition condition and the subtraction point due to the satisfaction of the subtraction condition is calculated, and the pseudo ball is moved by the pseudo ball unit by that calculation point. You may allow it. In this case, when the pseudo ball unit for addition and the pseudo ball unit for subtraction are provided, it is sufficient to operate only one of them. On the other hand, when the dual-purpose addition / subtraction unit is adopted, the number of movements of the pseudo balls can be reduced.

  (20) In the present embodiment, one pseudo ball is moved with respect to one point, but a plurality of pseudo balls may be moved with respect to one point. Alternatively, one pseudo ball may be moved with respect to a plurality of points, or a plurality of pseudo balls may be moved with respect to a plurality of points n1 by n2 (n1 ≠ n2).

  (21) Among the conditions for operating the pseudo ball unit, the conditions that occur on the CU side are the withdrawal of the remaining amount, the insertion of the card with the score recorded, the replaying operation of the accumulated coins, the request for the wagon service, and the score. Requests for division, etc. are applicable. In the above embodiment, when these conditions are satisfied, the operation instruction command is transmitted from the CU side. However, all the operation signals regarding the establishment of these conditions may be input to the payout control unit on the gaming machine side including the pseudo ball unit. In such a case, an addition request or a subtraction request transmitted from the CU to the gaming machine. Can be eliminated.

  (22) In the present embodiment, when the number of points is updated by a predetermined number, the number of points is displayed on the condition that the pseudo ball unit detects the movement of the pseudo ball corresponding to the predetermined point. Only fixed points were updated. However, instead of this, the display of the holding points may be promptly updated by the predetermined points when the first dummy ball is detected by the pseudo ball unit in order to update the holding points by the predetermined points. .

  (23) In the present embodiment, the number-of-points counter and the number-of-points-addition / subtraction number counter are updated each time movement of a pseudo ball is detected in the pseudo ball unit, and the pseudo ball unit is still in operation. Also, at the timing when it is possible to send back an operation response, the value of the point addition / subtraction number counter updated up to that point is transmitted to the CU as an operation response. Then, the value of the point addition / subtraction number counter is once cleared to 0, and then the value of the point addition / subtraction number counter is updated again based on the pseudo ball detected by the operation of the pseudo ball unit. The values of these counters are transmitted at the transmission timing of the operation response of. As a result, the update display of the score is gradually performed (every time the operation response arrives at the CU). However, instead of such control, the value of the point addition / subtraction counter is continuously updated without clearing to 0 and the value is maintained until the movement of all the pseudo balls scheduled in the pseudo ball unit is completed. It is also possible to refrain from transmitting it as an operation response and to transmit to the CU an operation response that reflects the value of the point addition / subtraction number counter when all the dummy balls have been moved.

  (24) The operation instruction command transmitted from the CU side to the gaming machine side includes bit data indicating the types of addition request and subtraction request. However, instead of including such bit data in the command of the operation instruction, the detection signal of the conversion operation from the holding point to the credit, the detection signal of the replay operation, or the card in which the holding point is recorded is inserted. A signal indicating that, and further, a signal indicating that an operation for dividing and sharing points can be performed may be input from the CU to the gaming machine. Alternatively, those operation signals may be simply relayed by the CU and directly input to the gaming machine.

  (25) Each unit is controlled so that the rotation direction of the pseudo ball of the addition pseudo ball unit and the rotation direction of the pseudo ball of the subtraction pseudo ball unit are opposite to each other, and each is related to addition and subtraction. You may make it easy to understand that it is a thing.

  (26) A cumulative storage means (counter) for cumulatively storing the movement detection number of the pseudo balls may be provided in the CU or the gaming machine. Further, the CU or the gaming machine may be provided with a comparison / determination means for comparing and judging the number of points calculated based on the storage of the cumulative storage means and the actual number of points. Further, the CU or the gaming machine may be provided with an informing means for informing the determination result of the comparison / determination means (display on the display or generation of an informing sound). By providing such a comparison / determination means, it may be possible to detect whether or not there is an illegality in which the points are illegally added and updated without moving the pseudo ball. It should be noted that each of the above means may be provided in a management device (such as a hall management computer) that is communicatively connected to the CU or gaming machine.

  (27) In the next game in which replays occur on S machines, the bet number is automatically set. However, even if the cancel operation or the operation to decrease the BET number is performed, the bet number cannot be accepted. May be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that a profit different from the re-game is given to the player by performing the cancel operation or the like when the re-play occurs.

  (28) When a divisional transfer of points (point sharing) is performed, a subtraction request is transmitted from the CU, but at this time also, the pseudo ball is moved by the pseudo ball unit for subtraction and a pseudo ball is detected. The score may be subtracted on the condition that it is performed.

  (29) In the embodiment, each time the cancel button is operated once, the currently set bet number is decreased by one, while the cancel button is pressed and held (holding it for a predetermined time or longer). All of the bets currently set by will be cancelled. However, instead of this, by operating the cancel button, all of the currently set bet numbers are canceled, while pressing the 1-sheet BET switch in the state of 3 BET, the 3 BET is reduced to 1 BET. You may do it. Alternatively, in addition to the cancel button for canceling all the currently set bet numbers, a bet number decrease button for reducing the set bet number by one may be provided.

  (30) In this embodiment, when the game value is converted into points, the movement means starts the movement of the predetermined object, and the movement detection means performs a predetermined number of times corresponding to the point conversion amount. It includes a movement control means for stopping the movement of the predetermined object by the movement means when the movement of the predetermined object is detected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the points to be added by the second score adding means exceed the difference between the upper limit point and the second score stored in the second score storing means. A movement control means for starting the movement of the predetermined object by the movement means, and stopping the movement of the predetermined object by the movement means when the movement of the predetermined object is detected a number of times corresponding to the excess points. including.

(31) The above-described embodiments disclose inventions having the following configurations.
A gaming system comprising a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and a gaming device (card unit 3) communicatively connected to the slot machine,
The slot machine is
A first control means (main control board 116) for controlling the slot machine;
A second control means (LSI 117) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means is
Error determination means (CPU of the main control board 116) for determining an error that occurs during control of the slot machine;
An abnormality notification control means (CPU of the main control board 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify an abnormality when the error determination means determines that an error has occurred,
The second control means is
Communicatively connected to the gaming device (connected by connectors 330 and 220),
An abnormality determining means (authentication sequence in FIG. 35) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
Output means for outputting abnormality notification information for notifying that an abnormality has occurred to the gaming device when the abnormality determination means has determined an abnormality of the first control means (abnormality of the main control board 116 is detected. The payout control unit 31 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 from the S-unit communication control unit 82),
The gaming system, wherein the gaming device performs control to notify an abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  With such a configuration, the abnormality of the first control unit itself having the control function of notifying the abnormality when an error occurs during the control of the slot machine is determined by the second control unit, and the first abnormality is determined. The occurrence of an abnormality in the control means itself is output from the first control means to the gaming device, and in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming device, the first control having an abnormality notification control function when an abnormality occurs Even if there is an abnormality in the means itself, the abnormality notification control can be performed well.

  (31) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 31 and directly output the information to the S-unit or Although it is transmitted to the CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.) and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (32) Although the authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. 34 to 42 are controls of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80, the control of the authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. It may be performed by the payout control unit 31 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 of the slot machine 2S, and further, other gaming devices (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange) installed in the game hall. Device).

  Further, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 42 may be performed, for example, between an island computer connected to the hall management computer 1 and a computer of a slot machine, and a main control unit and a communication control unit are provided. In the Z counter, the communication control unit may be connected to the prize management device and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Further, for example, a communication control unit connected to the medal saving device may be provided in the card unit, and the business electronic message sequence shown in FIG. 42 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit. .

  (33) The BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 37 is an authentication using two types of SIDs, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit. ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, it is authenticated that the same SIDs are stored.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, the number of points is displayed by the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of points is displayed by the display 51 on the S side. When the number of points is displayed by the display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of points can be displayed by applying the CU according to the present embodiment to an S unit without a display unit. On the other hand, when the score display unit is provided on the S side, the display control may be performed on the CU side.

  (35) Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the S side. When the display control is performed on the S side, by receiving the information of the score to be displayed from the CU side, the score display unit can display the score managed by the CU. It will be possible. In addition, when the display control is performed on the S side in this way, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the score with a high decorative (dramatic) value. When the display control is performed on the S unit side, the display of the score is based on the value of the score counter stored in the S unit itself, instead of receiving the information on the score to be displayed from the CU side. It may be controlled.

  (36) In the above-described embodiment, the CU sends a command to the S unit and the S unit responds to the CU and sends a response back to the CU. Conversely, the S unit sends a command to the CU. However, the communication form may be such that the CU responds to it and sends a response back to the S units.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control unit 31 is transmitted to the S-unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted from the S-unit communication control unit 82 to the CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the S-unit communication control unit 82, and the S-unit communication control unit 82 transmits the response (operation response) to the payout control unit 31.

  In this case, the payout control unit 31 retransmits the command shown in FIG. That is, the payout control unit 31 resends the command to the S-unit communication control unit 82 when the response cannot be received from the S-unit communication control unit 82 for one second after the command is transmitted. Further, the payout control unit 31 also executes the transmission of the communication state request and the retry of confirmation of the communication state shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b). That is, the payout control unit 31 transmits an operation instruction to the S-unit communication control unit 82, then transmits a communication state request, and confirms the communication state based on the communication state response returned from the S-unit communication control unit 82. . When it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, the communication instruction is transmitted again, and then the communication state request is transmitted to retry the confirmation of the communication state.

  (37) Further, in the above-described embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and the S units at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms), but instead, the CU is communicated when the need for communication arises. Alternatively, data may be transmitted from one of the S units to the other for communication.

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, an operation response including a refusal signal not complying with a request such as addition refusal ON, subtraction refusal ON, and clear refusal ON is returned from the S unit to the CU, and the CU side Then, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the S-unit returning an operation response of rejection ON, the operation response including the addition / subtraction number and the point data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU. Then, it may be determined whether or not the returned data (addition / subtraction number, score, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and thereby it may be determined whether or not the request is rejected.

  (39) In the above embodiment, the case where the play stop state is shown when the power cut in the CU or the communication cut between the CU and the S unit is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, it may be controlled so that the game can be continued on the S side. In that case, the addition / subtraction number data generated in association with the game continued from the occurrence of the communication interruption to the restoration of the abnormalities and the activation is cumulatively stored on the S side, and at the time of activation. The backup value of the data on the CU side may be corrected by transmitting the data and the data of the points to the CU.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, when the command from the CU has not been transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the S unit determines that the communication has been interrupted by the process of FIG. 32. However, the communication disconnection may be determined by the following method.

  A connection detector that detects whether or not the slot machine 2S and the card unit 3 are electrically connected is provided in the slot machine 2S. With reference to FIG. 4, CU communication control unit 80 and payout control unit 31 are connected by a signal line as described above, but a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from card unit 3 is supplied in addition to the signal line. A connection detection signal line input to the slot machine 2S side is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 31 are made of the same cable, and the cable is disconnected or the connectors 330 and 220 are disconnected, and further the card unit 3 is used. When the power is cut off, the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0V, so the connection detector detects it and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 220, and the power-off of the card unit 3 have occurred due to the input of the detection signal.

  (41) In the process of FIG. 43, the S units are programmed so that when the communication start request (correction request) including the correction ON is received, the S units cannot reject the correction request. However, in some cases, even if a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received, the S unit may have a serious error that cannot correct the holding point or the like. In consideration of such a serious error state, the CU side checks the content of the operation response transmitted from the S unit after transmitting the communication start request (correction request) including the correction ON, and the S unit side It may be determined whether or not the points and the like have been corrected correctly, and if not corrected, control to shift to the error state may be performed.

  That is, when the CU determines that it cannot add points such as points in the slot machine (for example, S units) even after receiving the communication start request (correction request) including the correction ON in FIG. 43, the CU determines in advance. Error control means for performing control to shift to the specified error state.

  As the control for shifting to the error state, for example, a serious error notification is given by the display 312, and a notice that a serious error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 so that the hall management computer 1 gives an error notice. It is conceivable that the person in charge will go to work and encourage the staff to artificially respond.

(42) On the S side, the number of additions may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided on the S side as counters for counting the number of additions. First, the counter A counts the number of additions. When the transmission timing of the added number comes, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. After that, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of additions is counted by the counter B. When the transmission timing of the added number comes, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. After that, while the value of the counter B is maintained, the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the number of additions is counted by the counter A. Hereinafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used to count the number of subtractions on the S side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting the external output information.

  (43) The S units may not send the two pieces of information of the addition number and the subtraction number to the CU, but may send one piece of information after addition / subtraction of the addition number and the subtraction number to the CU. In other words, such information also constitutes "update information capable of specifying the amount of change".

  (44) The communication method is not limited to the above command-response method. The S units may transmit the holding point-related information such as the holding points to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the S units may not transmit the point-related information at a predetermined time interval, but may transmit the point-related information to the CU each time a predetermined amount of information is obtained. For example, in the case of addition, it is conceivable that the addition number is transmitted to the CU each time one or two or more predetermined number of additions occur.

  (45) In this embodiment, two counters, that is, an addition number counter and a subtraction number counter are provided on the S side. However, instead of these two counters, it is possible to use one addition / subtraction counter for performing addition by increasing the number of points (occurrence of a prize, etc.) and subtracting by decreasing the number of points (setting of the bet number, etc.). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the S units to the CU.

(46) This embodiment includes the following configurations.
The game device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the slot machine, and then reestablishes a communication connection with the slot machine before receiving a response to the command. In case of shifting to, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the score has arrived at the slot machine based on the data transmitted from the slot machine in the process of reestablishing the communication connection. When the arrival determining means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the holding points has arrived, the command transmitting means cancels the instruction for subtracting the holding points by the command. Command for transmitting to the slot machine, and the sub-point updating means instructs the subtraction of the points. When the command to cancel the instruction to subtract the points is received, the points are already subtracted based on the command to subtract the points and the points are subtracted due to lack of points. In either case, the points corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction are added to the points stored in the auxiliary point storage means.

  (47) In the present embodiment, by operating the return button 322, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU. However, the CU may be configured so that a signal requesting the end of the game can be input from the management computer or the like.

(48) The CU and the S unit may be connected not by wire connection but by wireless communication.
(49) By providing the function of the payout control unit 31 on the main control board 116, the payout control unit 31 may not be provided on the slot machine 2S.

  (50) The payout controller 31 controls the game to be stopped when the point counter stored on the slot machine 2S side becomes 0. However, the payout control unit 31 may execute the control when the point count counter reaches a predetermined value other than 0. For example, the player is allowed to previously input the predetermined value by using a predetermined operation switch of the slot machine. The payout control unit 31 sets the game prohibition state at the stage when the point count counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. As a result, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of points reaches the number designated in advance.

  (51) In the above-described embodiment, the production unit 50 is provided on the side of the slot machine 2S and various displays are displayed by the display unit 51. However, in the slot machine 2S that does not include the production unit 50. It may be. In that case, even if a command including operation instructions such as the above-described card insertion processing ON, addition display ON, calculation display ON, clear display ON, etc. is sent to the S unit 2S, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display unit 312 on the CU side displays.

  (52) In the saving medal sharing process shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the stock card stocked in the CU is used as the card B discharged for divided transfer (sharing medal sharing) to another person. Instead, insert the card B to be transferred to another person into the card insertion / ejection slot 309 from the outside of the CU, and record the ejected medal for divided transfer (shared medal) on the inserted card B and eject it. You may do it. In that case, on the display screen of the sharing process status shown in FIGS. 93 to 96, the sharing process is performed between the own card discharging process which is the first process and the shared card discharging process which is the second process. The card insertion process will be added.

  (53) In the saving medal sharing process shown in FIG. 88, the visitor card B is first inserted to start the game, but instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. You may start the game. In that case, the transfer card B used for sharing medals is taken out from the card stock section in the CU, discharged in association with the shared points, and associated with the score at the end of the game to the player. The card to be returned may also be taken out from the card stock section in the CU and discharged. Further, after the game is started by inserting bills, the score taken at that point may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock unit at the stage when the score is generated due to the occurrence of a prize. In that case, when the score varies with the game, the score associated with the card is similarly varied. Then, when the operation of sharing the medals is performed, the number of points associated with the card is changed to the number of points for sharing, the card is ejected as a transfer card, and again taken out from the card stock section. The card may be associated with the remainder obtained by subtracting the shared points from the points.

  (54) In the above-described embodiment, when the CU restarts the connection sequence, it is determined that the connection sequence is to be restarted in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 44), and the communication disconnection request is sent by itself to disconnect the communication. 43 and not the SQN transmitted from the S units when it is determined that the connection sequence is restarted after the connection is completed, or when the SQN backed up by the CU does not match the SQN transmitted from the S unit. Execute the connection sequence of time. However, in addition to or instead of any of them, a signal indicating that the communication connection has been disconnected from the S units during the game (when not in standby) with the restart of the connection sequence (for example, recovery data). May be transmitted to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 43 based on the signal.

  (55) In the split point transfer (save medal sharing) processing shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the split transfer is performed on condition that it is determined that the current point is more than a predetermined number of points than the split transfer. (Shared medals) may be allowed. In the case of FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, for example, the split transfer (shared medals) is allowed on the condition that it is determined that the current score is 200 points or more more than the split points. In the case of FIG. 89, the split transfer (shared medals) is performed on condition that it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral point (= 200) from the current score is 100 points or more than the split point. Tolerate.

  (56) In the process of divided transfer of points (shared medals) shown in FIGS. 87 and 89, the number of points in the game is changed to the number of points in the game B until the card B is ejected after the card A is ejected. When the number of stored medals to be written and transferred is insufficient, the point sharing is canceled and the card B is controlled not to be ejected.

  (57) In the above-described embodiment, the units of the saved medals and the points are the same, but the unit is not limited to this, and the units may be different. For example, if the number of points “1” is converted into a stored medal, it may be “10”.

  (58) In FIG. 88, when the return operation at the end of the game is performed, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section is taken out, and the stock card is discharged in association with the score. However, instead, a staff member of the amusement hall may bring a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / ejection slot 309, associate the points, and eject the card. .

  (59) In the above embodiment, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown, but the types of cards are not limited to this, and for example, only one type of visitor card may be used.

  (60) Instead of manually clearing the RAM by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 7, a clock function may be provided to automatically output the RAM clear signal at the business start time of the game hall. The game history data is cleared by the automatically output RAM clear signal as described above.

  (61) In the embodiment described above, in the game history data recovery processing, control is performed to match the data on the CU side, but since these game history data are information managed by the S machines, Basically, regardless of whether they match or not, the game history data on the CU side may be controlled to be updated based on the game history data held on the S side. However, the total number of points, the cumulative total of additions, and the cumulative total of subtractions are matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (62) In the above-described embodiment, the shift to the trial hit mode is performed by inserting the test card into the CU, but instead of or in addition to this, a shift command from the upper server 801 or a game hall Control may be performed so that the shift to the trial hit mode is performed by a remote control operation by a store clerk. The shift to the trial hit mode by such remote control operation can be performed by the remote control operation while waiting for the customer. As the trial hit mode, two types may be provided: a first trial hit mode used as a non-business visitor event at a game hall and a second trial hit mode for operation confirmation by a staff member or the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no more points (or points) in the trial hit mode, the CU side sends a points addition command (or points addition command) to S units (or S units). It is possible to play by adding points (or adding points) by, but without sending the points addition command (or points addition command) from the CU side, in S units (or S units) You may control so that a game can be continued even if there are no points (or the number of points).

  (63) The above-mentioned C-ID is composed of fixed code data that does not change. Instead, the C-ID read from the card is dynamically changed according to the read time. It may be an ID code. Then, when the card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the reading time, and the player based on both the reading time and the C-ID data. May be specified. For example, when the CU reads the C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, the C-ID is encrypted by T in the card, ET (C-ID), and the ET (C-ID) and T And are output as a pair. The CU decrypts the ET (C-ID) with T to DT (ET (C-ID)) to extract the C-ID.

  (64) In the above-described embodiment, the player is identified based on the C-ID and it is determined whether or not the same player is playing the game. However, instead of or in addition to this, it is determined. Then, a biometric information reading unit for reading biometric information such as a fingerprint or vein of the player is provided on the CU or S stand, and the identity of the player is determined based on the biometric information reading unit read by the biometric information reading unit. Biometrics authentication may be adopted.

  (65) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, with the return of the card, the data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the backup data storage unit. However, instead of switching the current player game history data storage unit to the backup data storage unit and switching the backup data storage unit to the current player game history data storage unit as the card is returned. May be controlled as follows. In that case, the storage data of the switched current player game history data storage unit is displayed by the display unit 51.

  (66) In the above-described embodiment, the C-ID match determination is performed on the S side, but the match determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of the S unit 2S is transmitted to the CU side, and the CU side receiving the C-ID is the C-ID recorded in the inserted card. Is read, and the coincidence between the read C-ID and the C-ID transmitted from the S unit is determined. Then, when the CU 3 determines that the C-IDs do not match, the clear command is transmitted to the S unit 2S. The S unit 2S that has received the clear command erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the C-IDs match in the CU 3, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is restored to the current player game history data storage unit for the S stand 2S, and Command information for taking over the game history data and performing addition update of the new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the S unit 2S. This command information may be code data such as takeover command information, but backup game history data for taking over, that is, game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of the S unit 2S is stored on the CU side. Alternatively, the backed-up game history data may be transmitted to the S unit 2S as takeover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in S units becomes unnecessary.

  (67) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the C-ID identity is determined on the CU side has been described, but this identity determination may be performed on the S side. That is, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

It is possible to play with points, a game medium is launched in the game area to play games, and a communication unit that communicates with the gaming device that adds points using the gaming value owned by the player is provided, and the prize is awarded. A slot machine in which points are added according to the occurrence of
Specific means for specifying the amount of change in the number of points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means for storing the score,
Holding point updating means for updating the holding points stored in the holding point storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the holding points stored in the holding point storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device,
A player specific information storage means for storing player specific information for specifying a player who plays a game;
When the player is connected to the game device and communication is started, the player identification information read by the player identification information reading unit and the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage unit are the same. The same determination means for determining whether or not the player of
A slot machine provided with the same determination result transmission control means for controlling the transmission of the determination result by the same determination means from the communication section to the gaming apparatus.

  (68) In the above-described embodiment, the operation instruction and the operation response are transmitted / received by including the C-ID. If a different C-ID is transmitted from the S unit to the CU during the transmission / reception, it may be determined that an error has occurred, and the CU side may be controlled not to update the addition number and the subtraction number. When controlled in this way, there is a risk that the C-ID may become temporarily erroneous data due to noise during transmission and reception of commands and responses. In that case, for example, if the C-ID included in the operation response received on the CU side is different from the C-ID transmitted as a command, the CU side determines that it is an error and transmits it. The addition / subtraction update control is not executed based on the addition number and the subtraction number included in the operation response. As a result, when the C-ID that is not distorted due to noise is transmitted from the S side in the next transmission and reception of the command and response, the operation response is obtained even though it is determined that the C-ID matches and is normal. The total number of points stored in the CU and the total number of points stored in the CU are inconsistent. In the above-described embodiment, in such a case, the number of points stored in the CU is different. The command for correction is sent to the S units, and the number of points stored in the S units is rewritten to the number stored on the CU side. As a result, the score of S units is rewritten to the previous old score updated based on the previous response in which the C-ID goes wrong due to noise, and the correct score is rewritten to the incorrect score. Occasionally, it will happen.

  In order to eliminate such an inconvenience, even if the C-ID included in the response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, the determination is not made only by one response, but several times (for example, twice). ) It is desirable to perform control so that it is determined to be abnormal only when the C-ID in the response subsequently becomes different from the C-ID on the CU side. The following two methods can be considered as specific methods for realizing this.

  As a first method, if the C-ID included in the first response is inconsistent with the C-ID on the CU side, the SQN is not updated and added to the S unit when the next command is transmitted. Send. Then, in the S units, as described based on FIG. 57, it is determined that the response has not reached the CU, and the transmission data is added to the addition number and the like last time, and the added number and the like are added next time. It controls to send to the CU as a response. In the CU, if the C-ID included in the next response matches the C-ID on the CU side, it is determined to be appropriate, and based on the number of additions to which the previously transmitted data is added, etc. Control the number of updates. As a result, it becomes possible to update to the correct score. On the other hand, if the C-ID included in the next response is also different from the C-ID on the CU side, the CU is determined to be abnormal because the C-ID is different twice consecutively, and the Instead of updating the score based on the number of additions and the number of subtractions included in the response, a predetermined error processing control may be performed thereafter.

  As a second method, the CU side separately adds and updates while the C-IDs do not match, and when the correct C-ID is received, the separately added and updated data is used as the total number of points or the like. Batch addition update.

The configuration of the modified example described above is summarized as follows.
The gaming device is
A score storage means for storing the score,
A game device side identification information storage means for recording predetermined identification information;
A gaming machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the gaming machine side identification information storage means to the slot machine,
The slot machine is
Specific means for specifying the amount of change in the number of points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmitting means for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device,
Slot machine side identification information storage means for storing the identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming device side identification information transmission control means,
Slot machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the slot machine side identification information storage means,
The gaming device,
Information receiving means for receiving the update information,
A point update means for updating the point stored in the main point storage means based on the update information;
Matching to determine whether or not the identification information transmitted under the control of the slot machine side identification information transmission control means and the identification information stored in the game device side identification information storage means are matched. Determination means,
The determination result of the matching determination means includes an abnormality determination means for performing an abnormality determination when it is determined that there is no matching for a predetermined number of times in succession,
The point update means,
When an abnormality determination is made by the abnormality determination means, updating of the holding points corresponding to the total amount of changes in the holding points in the slot machine during the period when the matching determination means determines that there is a mismatch Not done,
When it is determined that the matching determination means is normal based on the identification information transmitted before the abnormality determination means performs the abnormality determination, the matching determination means determines that there is a mismatch. The score is updated based on the total amount of change in the score in the slot machine during the different period.

  According to such a configuration, even if the identification information that is temporarily erroneous due to noise or the like is received even though the proper identification information is transmitted, the gaming device is erroneously determined to be abnormal and the update information is updated. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by not updating the score based on the score.

  (69) In the above-described embodiments, the operation button icon such as the re-count button displayed on the display 312 is touch-operated to re-count the game history data in the trial hit mode. Instead of or in addition to this, it may be controlled to detect the opening of the front door 2b and re-count the game history data in the trial hit mode again.

  (70) The contents of the above embodiment can be applied not only to slot machines but also to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

  Here, a pachinko gaming machine type gaming machine is a player-owned valuable value (a prepaid balance or the number of accumulated coins) that is received by a recording medium (card) and specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium. This is a gaming machine that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming, and that launches a gaming medium to a gaming area to play a game.

  In other words, with a pachinko machine type game machine, it is possible to play with points, and the game medium is launched in the game area to play the game, thereby increasing the value of the game owned by the player. It is a gaming machine that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points by using points and that adds points according to the occurrence of a prize.

  (71) In the above-described embodiment, the CU determines whether or not the number of points stored in the CU and the number of points sent from the S unit match. If they do not match, the S unit side Although a correction command for adjusting the number of points to the number of points on the CU side is transmitted, it is also possible to add a match / mismatch of C-ID as a criterion for command transmission. For example, even if the number of points stored in the CU and the number of points sent from the S unit do not match, the correction command is not sent by itself, and the C-ID sent from the S unit is When the CU determines that the C-ID stored in the CU does not match, the correction command is transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality occurs such that the C-ID data is corrupted due to some reason such as noise, a correction command can be transmitted to correct the number of points on the S side to a correct value.

  Furthermore, when the CU determines that the C-ID sent from the S units matches the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in which the number of points on the S stand side is changed without the player being replaced, a command for correction can be transmitted to correct the number of points on the S stand side to a correct value. .

  (72) In the above-described embodiment, by operating the RAM clear switch 293, the oldest stored data out of the stored data for 10 days in the S game history data storage unit is erased, and the remaining 9 days. The stored data for one minute is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area on the old day, but the condition for executing the shift control of the S history game data is that it is the time zone before the opening of the game hall. You may add. That is, the shift control of the S history game history data is executed on condition that the RAM clear switch 293 is operated during the predetermined time period before the opening of the game hall.

  (73) In the above-described embodiment, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. In addition to that, S LSIs 117 and the main control board are added. 116 and between the payout control unit 31 and the S-unit communication control unit 82.

  (74) In the modified example described with reference to FIG. 109, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU 3, but instead of or in addition to this, a clear switch is provided to the CU 3. By providing a clear switch, the game history data described above may be cleared. Further, the game history data may be cleared by operating the remote controller. Specifically, when a staff member of the game arcade directs the remote control to the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU3 to perform a clear operation, the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared light) and clears the game history data. To do.

  (75) The command transmission interval of the CU may be changeable. For example, it is conceivable that the transmission interval of the command can be finely changed and set by operating the switch for switching the transmission interval provided in the CU. In this case, a table in which a plurality of types of transmission interval data are stored is provided in advance in the CU, and the transmission interval according to the switch operation is selected from the table. Alternatively, the CU may be able to switch the transmission interval in response to a switching command from the management computer. Note that the transmission interval may be switched, for example, at the time of mutual authentication when communication is started between the CU and the S unit.

  (76) In the present embodiment, "a game can be started by setting a bet number for one game using a gaming value, and a variable display device for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is displayed. A slot machine in which one game is finished by deriving a result, and a prize can be generated according to a combination of symbols derived and displayed on a predetermined pay line as a display result of the variable display device, Before the display result is derived on the variable display device, a pre-determining means for determining whether or not to permit the derivation of a combination of winning symbols for generating the winning on the pay line, and the variable display device. Derivation operation reception means for receiving an operation for deriving a display result, and the variable display device according to the determination result of the pre-determination means and the operation received by the derivation operation reception means. When the combination of the derivation control means for controlling the derivation of the display result and the combination of the winning symbols for generating the winning is accompanied by the awarding of the gaming value, the predetermined amount is obtained on the winning line. Slot machine including a gaming value giving means for giving a gaming value to a player. ”Is disclosed.

  (77) In the slot machine, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is predetermined, and unlike the case of a pachinko game machine, the winnings do not occur continuously in a short period of time, and the winnings are made every game. appear. Further, the bet number is also set to one of 1 to 3, for example. Therefore, as long as the motion response is transmitted at a time interval of 200 ms, the data of the added number normally included in the motion response matches the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination. Similarly, the data of the subtraction number included in the motion response matches any of the bet numbers. For example, if the number of payouts corresponding to a winning combination is any of 3, 5, 10, and 15, the number of additions included in the action response will be one of them. Similarly, if the number of bets that can be set is 1, 2, or 3, the data of the subtraction number included in the motion response is any of 1 to 3.

  Therefore, when the number of additions and the number of subtractions included in the operation response notified to the CU are other than the predetermined values, the CU determines that an error has occurred and notifies the error, or A command instructing to prohibit the game may be sent to the S units.

  Furthermore, since the subtraction number data is generated by the bet number setting when starting one game, and the addition number data is generated by winning when the one game is over, normally, unless a retry or the like occurs, One of the addition number and the subtraction number included in one motion response becomes zero.

  Therefore, when one of the addition number and the subtraction number included in the operation response notified to the CU is not 0, and the operation response is not retry data or the like, the CU determines that an error has occurred. Then, an error notification may be given, or a command instructing to prohibit the game may be sent to the S units.

  Further, in the slot machine 2S, one game regulation time is set as the minimum time required to consume one game, and in the present embodiment, it is 4.1 seconds, for example. Therefore, normally, a plurality of operation responses including the number of additions or the number of subtractions exceeding 0 are not transmitted to the CU. In addition, normally, after an operation response including a subtraction number exceeding 0 is transmitted to the CU, an operation response including a subtraction number exceeding 0 is further transmitted to the CU within one game restriction period. Absent. Similarly, normally, after an operation response including an addition number exceeding 0 is transmitted to the CU, an operation response including an addition number greater than 0 is further transmitted to the CU within one game restriction period. There is no. Therefore, when these events occur, the CU determines that an error has occurred and notifies the error or sends a command to the S unit to instruct the prohibition of the game. Good.

  (78) In the present embodiment, when the winning occurs, the data of the addition number is generated and is transmitted to the CU as an operation response. However, when the replay prize is generated, the score increase number is 0, and the next game is automatically set with the same bet number as that of the game in which the replay prize is generated, without reducing the score. . Therefore, the operation response at the time of the replay winning is “(a) The addition number at the time of the replay winning is 0, and the subtraction number according to the bet number setting in the next game in which the replay winning is generated is also 0”, “( b) The number of additions at the time of winning the replay is the number of bets in the game that generated the replay winning, and the number of subtractions due to the setting of the number of bets in the next game in which the replay winning is generated is the same as that number. ” There are two possible patterns. Further, in any case, the replay prize may be one of the external output information. That is, a replay prize may be added as one of a plurality of types of external output information, and the total number of replay prizes may be stored in the CU. In addition to replay winning prizes, all winning combinations are targeted for external output information, and each time a winning combination is generated by one of the winning combinations, the counter corresponding to the winning combination is updated in S units and the data is included. The operation response may be transmitted to the CU.

  (79) In the slot machine, once the variable display device starts rotating, one game cannot be ended unless the rotation is stopped. Therefore, it is impossible to interrupt the game at an arbitrary timing of the game stop transmitted from the CU side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, when a prohibition request (see FIG. 52) for returning a game card is generated while the variable display device is rotating, the final score is waited for until the end of the game. After confirming it, we decided to accept the return of the game card.

  However, in the case of such a configuration, the game card cannot be returned unless the player performs a stop operation. Therefore, when a game card return operation is detected while the reel is rotating, it is conceivable that the S unit may display a message on the liquid crystal display device or the like, or the CU may display on the display device 312 or the like, for prompting the stop operation. Alternatively, when a prohibition request for returning the game card is generated while the variable display device is rotating, the response to the refusal of the prohibition request is returned from the S unit to the CU to return the card in the game. May not be accepted. Alternatively, the CU may determine whether or not the game is being executed at the stage when the card returning operation is detected, and if the game is being executed, the CU may not accept the card returning operation. It should be noted that whether or not the game is being executed can be determined based on the external output information “reel rotation start” and “reel rotation stop” transmitted from the S units.

  (80) In the slot machine 2S, for example, a lottery effect of whether or not to shift to a certain kind of service game state such as AT is performed on the liquid crystal display device during the game, and after the game is finished, The result of the lottery effect may be displayed after the lottery effect is subsequently executed for a predetermined period. However, when such a continuous lottery effect is performed, there is a possibility that a card return operation will be performed after one game ends and before the result of the lottery effect is displayed. In such a case, the lottery effect may be interrupted, the current score may be fixed, and the card may be returned.

  (81) In the present embodiment, the number of points = 0 is detected on the S side and the bet number operation is disabled. However, the remaining number of points to be detected = 0 is an example. For example, in the gaming state in which only the bet number = 3 is valid, the S units detect that the number of points is less than 3 and control the bet number operation invalid state. Similarly, in the gaming state in which only the bet number = 2 is valid, the S units detect that the number of points is less than 2, and control the bet number operation invalid state. In short, the S table compares the minimum required number of bets and the number of points in the current game state, and when the former is less than the latter, controls the bet number operation invalid state.

  When such a control is performed, the bet number operation invalid state may occur when the remaining number of points is 0, or when it is a fraction such as 1 or 2, for example. When a player performs an operation to end the game, it is necessary to return a game card with a fractional value recorded, which is not very valuable. In particular, when a player does not play a game using a card in the first place and plays a game by exclusively inserting cash into the CU, he or she has to purposely issue a new worthless game card. It is uneconomical. Therefore, when a game using cash is being performed and the player's score at the stage of returning the card is less than a predetermined value, the CU prints a fraction instead of the normal game card. The paper may be printed out.

  (82) The slot machine 2S according to the present embodiment wins the internal lottery in advance, and the winning symbol is generated by stopping the winning symbol by so-called pushing. However, instead of such a slot machine, a slot machine in which the result according to the internal lottery is always stopped and displayed on the variable display device may be used. In this case, it may be a slot machine in which each reel automatically stops after a predetermined time without performing a stop operation, or even if a stop operation button is provided for each reel, at any timing. The slot machine may be such that the result according to the internal lottery is always displayed even if the stop operation is performed.

  In this way, when a slot machine that always displays the results according to the internal lottery is displayed, the number of points to be added is determined based on the presence / absence of the prize and the prize when the internal lottery is executed. . Therefore, for example, when the internal lottery is executed when a reel start operation is detected, the number of points deducted by the bet number setting and the number of points added according to the winning are calculated at the time of the start operation. It will be decided. In such a case, the S-unit may send the addition number according to the winning when the subtraction number associated with the bet number setting is transmitted as the operation response. That is, the data of the number of additions may be transmitted at an earlier stage than the actual winning timing.

  Further, the CU may discharge a predetermined ticket or token capable of specifying the score, instead of discharging (returning) the card in response to the game ending operation.

(83) The variable display device may be configured by a liquid crystal display device instead of the rotating drum.
(84) In the present embodiment, the number of points is displayed by both the display unit 312 provided on the CU side and the display unit 51 provided on the S stand side, but it is possible to display it only on one of them. May be. When the number of points is displayed by the display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of points can be displayed by applying the CU according to the present embodiment to an S unit without a display unit. On the other hand, when displaying the score on the S side, the display control may be performed on the CU side.

  (85) Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the S side. When the display control is performed on the S side, it is possible to display the number of points managed by the CU on the display unit 51 by receiving information on the number of points to be displayed from the CU side. Becomes In addition, when the display control is performed on the S side in this way, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the score with a high decorative (dramatic) value. When the display control is performed on the S unit side, the display of the score is based on the value of the score counter stored in the S unit itself, instead of receiving the information on the score to be displayed from the CU side. It may be controlled.

  (86) In the above-described embodiment, the CU sends a command to the S unit, and the S unit responds to it by sending a response back to the CU. Conversely, the S unit sends a command to the CU. However, the communication form may be such that the CU responds to it and sends a response back to the S units.

  (87) In this embodiment, the CU resends the command a maximum of two times after receiving the command within one second after sending the command, and if no response is received, it is determined that communication is abnormal and the CU is five seconds. The connection sequence is restarted later (see FIG. 31). Therefore, if there is no response within 3 seconds from the transmission of the first command, the connection sequence will be restarted. However, instead of this, a longer time period from the transmission of the first command by the CU to the judgment of communication abnormality, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, 20 seconds) at which multiple games can progress on the S-side. , 30 seconds, etc.). In this case, for example, taking FIG. 56 as an example, after receiving the operation response from the S units, the CU retransmits the command not twice but three times, four times, and before the predetermined time elapses. If there is, it will be repeated. The command retransmission interval in this case may be 200 ms or a long time interval exceeding it, or the command may be retransmitted until a certain time elapses from the start of retransmission and after that. The interval may be changed (for example, the retransmission interval may be lengthened in the latter half of step A). Then, when the resend command finally reaches the S units before the elapse of the predetermined time, an operation response indicating the amount of change in the score for a plurality of games which has been progressing up to that time is transmitted from the S units to the CU. Become.

  (88) In the above-described embodiment, the display area 51a is provided on the side of the slot machine 2S, which displays information about points and the like. However, a display for displaying information about points and the like. The slot machine 2S that does not include the area 51a may be used. In that case, even if a command including operation instructions such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display, etc. is transmitted to the slot machine 2S, in the slot machine 2S, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display unit 312 on the CU side displays.

  (89) In the split point transfer (point sharing) process shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the split transfer is performed on condition that it is determined that the current point is more than a predetermined number of points than the split transfer. (Share points) may be allowed. In the cases of FIGS. 87 and 88, for example, the split transfer (sharing of points) is allowed on the condition that it is determined that the current points are 200 or more more than the points to be split transferred. In the case of FIG. 89, the split transfer (shared points) is performed on condition that it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral point (= 200) from the current score is 100 points or more than the split point. Tolerate.

  (90) If there is a game interruption or card return operation, rather than waiting for the wait time to elapse, on condition that all the spinning reels stop and the display result and the number of points are fixed, S A response of game completion ON may be returned from the table to the CU.

  (91) The S unit further transmits, as the external output information, various kinds of information on the “game table state” shown in FIG. 25, and the CU stores these in the same manner as other external output information. You may do it.

  (92) In the trial hit mode, an arbitrary game state may be selected. For example, as for the S machine, the "big bonus state", the "regular bonus state", the "RT state", the "AT state", and the "regular game state" other than these are stored in advance as the game states in the trial hit mode. Every other time, based on the selection operation of the staff member in the trial hit mode, control is performed to switch to any game state.

  (93) Instead of deleting the game history in the trial hit mode at the end of the trial hit mode, the S unit saves the game history in the trial hit mode in the storage area for the trial hit mode (memory mounted on the S unit). You may leave it.

  (94) In the above embodiment, even when the player leaves the seat during the game, the C-ID of the membership card inserted in CU3 before leaving the seat and the membership card inserted in CU3 after that The game history data of the player is restored by collating with the C-ID. Such restoration of game history data is permitted only when the card inserted before leaving the seat is a membership card, and not permitted when the card inserted before leaving the seat is a visitor card. May be. Alternatively, conversely, even in the case of a visitor card, the game history data may be restored based on the C-ID.

  (95) In the above-described embodiment, when the reel starts rotating, the reel continues to rotate unless the stop operation is detected, and the reel is not automatically stopped. However, a slot machine may be adopted in which the reel rotation is automatically stopped when the stop operation is not detected even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reel rotation. In this case, when the reel is rotating at the stage when the prohibition request command is received from the CU, the S units use the sensor after the time until the reel automatically stops or when the reel is stopped. After the detection, a response of game completion ON is transmitted to the CU as an operation response.

  (96) The S unit may adopt a configuration in which the setting information is transmitted from the S unit to the CU. In this case, the CU may adopt a configuration in which the received setting information is transmitted to an external management device such as the hall management computer 1. This enables the management device to manage the setting information of each S unit.

  As the setting information, for example, a set value of the winning probability set by operating the S setting units can be exemplified. For the S machines, the payout rate of medals is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value when performing the internal lottery. The set value includes, for example, six levels of 1 to 6, and 6 has the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the advantage is gradually decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. With the set values 1 to 6, the winning probability of each winning combination is determined.

  Alternatively, as the setting information, production information can be exemplified. The effect information is, for example, the type of character displayed on the display screen. More specifically, it is the type of character that appears on the display screen during AT.

  The S unit includes this type of setting information in any one of the plurality of types of responses described in the above-described embodiment and transmits it to the CU. For example, when it is included in the recovery response, the setting information is transmitted from the S units to the CU each time the recovery occurs. Alternatively, when it is included in the action response, the repeat setting information is transmitted from the S units to the CU during the game.

  Alternatively, a command requesting the transmission of the setting information and a response electronic message in response thereto may be further provided. In this case, when the S unit receives the command requesting the transmission of the setting information, it will send a response including the setting information to the CU. Further, the CU may be configured to send a command requesting the transmission of the setting information to the S units when receiving the setting information transmission request from the external management device (for example, the hall management computer 1). . As the command at this time, a dedicated command for requesting the setting information may be adopted, but an operation instruction command or the like may be diverted. For example, when the operation instruction command is diverted, data indicating whether or not there is a request for setting information may be added to the operation instruction command.

  (97) The card unit 3 may be incorporated in the S table 2S or the P table. In this case, S or P with a card unit is used.

  The following is a list of operational effects achieved by various means and combinations of various means included in the present embodiment.

(1-1) A slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a game can be played with points and points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a gaming value owned by a player (prepaid balance, number of holdings, or A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) which is added with points by using (savings) and is communicably connected to the slot machine (connecting wiring to the connectors 330 and 220),
The slot machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for slot machine control, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change (number of additions, number of subtractions) of the points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winning,
And an information transmitting unit (payout control unit 31) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of additions and the number of subtractions) capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device,
The gaming device,
A main score storage means (a RAM for storing "the number of scores") for storing the score;
An information receiving unit (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information,
And a holding point updating means (main control unit 323) for updating the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, the slot machine tends to have a shorter replacement cycle in the game hall than that of the gaming machine in order to quickly provide a more interesting game. Therefore, by holding the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming machine side to reduce the cost of the slot machine, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced. is there.

(1-2) The gaming device,
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the point stored in the main point storage means;
An instruction information transmission unit (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing the transmission of the update information to the slot machine,
The slot machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control unit 31) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information,
Each time the information transmitting unit receives the information for instructing the transmission of the update information, the information transmitting unit indicates the amount of change (current point related information) from the last reception of the information to the current reception. Update information is transmitted (values of addition counter and subtraction counter of FIG. 6, FIG. 50).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, the slot machine sequentially transmits to the gaming device update information indicating the amount of change based on the time of the last update information transmission. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-3) The information transmitting means transmits the points (the value of the point counter) stored in the auxiliary point storage means to the gaming device (the value of the point counter of FIG. 6, FIG. 50),
The gaming device,
A determining means (FIG. 6; determining the coincidence of the number of points) for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points held in the sub holding point storage means;
When the determination unit determines that there is an inconsistency, a predetermined inconsistency occurrence process (error notification and recovery process are performed by the display 312, and data of Bit2 of data correction request is "1" (point correction ON) And a communication start request including the data of the number of points stored in the CU is transmitted to the S units, and the storage of the number of points in the S units is corrected to match the number of points of the CU.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the holding point stored on the slot machine side does not match the holding point stored on the game device side. Further, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with it by the processing when the mismatch occurs.

(1-4) The instruction information transmitting means has a holding point stored in the main holding point storage means when the holding point is stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means when the determination means determines that there is a mismatch. Correction information for correcting points (communication start request including point correction ON and number of points) is transmitted to the slot machine,
The instruction information transmitting means transmits the correction information to the slot machine (sends a communication start request including the point correction ON and the number of points to S units),
The slot machine corrects the points stored in the sub-point storage means based on the correction information (payout control unit 31; the points are corrected according to the point correction ON and the points correction). )including.

  According to such a configuration, the number of points stored on the gaming machine side and the number of points stored on the gaming machine side become abnormal due to an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to misconduct or other causes. Even if the stored points do not match, the points stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming device side.

  (1-5) The slot machine determines whether or not there is a remaining number of remaining points required to continue the game based on the number of remaining points stored in the sub-point holding means (payout control) Part 31, FIG. 51).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is not transmitted in time at the time of determination, the number of points stored on the gaming device side and the actual number of points (the number of points stored on the slot machine side) are Even if there is a gap between them, it is possible to make a determination based on the actual score.

(1-6) The instruction information transmitting unit transmits information for instructing a game prohibition to the slot machine (operation instruction in FIG. 54 (prohibition request present)),
When the slot machine receives the information for instructing the game prohibition, the game prohibition means for keeping the game by the point holding (the payout control unit 31 prohibits BET (set bet number)). including.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to control the prohibition of the game by the slot machine on the game device side.

(1-7) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing to set the value of the holding point stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means to the initial value to the slot machine (FIG. 52, 83 operation instruction (with clear request),
In the slot machine, the sub-point storage unit stores the sub-point storage unit based on receiving information for instructing to set the value of the point stored in the sub-point storage unit to an initial value. It includes a score point initialization means (FIG. 52, FIG. 83 (the payout control unit 31 initializes the value of the score point counter to 0)) for setting the score value to the initial value.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to instruct the game device side to initialize the points stored in the slot machine.

(1-8) A game is provided with a connection section (connector 330) for communicatively connecting to a slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can be played with points and points are added according to the occurrence of a prize. A gaming device (card unit 3) for adding points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of possessions, or number of savings),
A point storage means for storing the points (RAM for storing the "number of points");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving from the slot machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in the number of points in accordance with the use in games and the occurrence of prizes,
And a holding point updating unit (main control unit 323) for updating the holding point stored in the holding point storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, the slot machine tends to have a shorter replacement cycle in the game hall than that of the gaming machine in order to quickly provide a more interesting game. Therefore, by holding the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming machine side to reduce the cost of the slot machine, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced. is there.

  (1-9) When a signal requesting the end of the game (operation signal of the return button 322) is input, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is fixed as the holding point at the end of the game. The determining means (main controller 323; FIG. 52) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are fixed on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point fixing function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-10) When a point that has been updated on the side of the slot machine in response to use in a game or occurrence of a prize is received from the slot machine, the received point and the point storage means are Including a determination means for determining the consistency with the stored points (Fig. 5; determination of the number of points match),
When the determination unit determines that there is an inconsistency, a predetermined inconsistency occurrence process (error notification and recovery process are performed by the display 312, and data of Bit2 of data correction request is "1" (point correction ON) And a communication start request including the data of the number of points stored in the CU is transmitted to the S units, and the storage of the number of points in the S units is corrected to match the number of points of the CU.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the holding point stored on the slot machine side does not match the holding point stored on the game device side. Further, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with it by the processing when the mismatch occurs.

  (1-11) The correction information for correcting the holding point stored in the slot machine to the holding point stored in the holding point storage means when the determination means determines that there is a mismatch It includes correction information transmitting means for transmitting to the slot machine (sending point correction ON and number of points).

  According to such a configuration, the number of points stored on the gaming machine side and the number of points stored on the gaming machine side become abnormal due to an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to misconduct or other causes. Even if the stored points do not match, the points stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming device side.

(2-1) A connection unit (connector 220) for communicatively connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, one game can be started by setting the number of bets at the score, and a display result on the variable display device Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed by deriving a game, and points are added according to a prize generated by the display result of the variable display device.
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points (addition number, subtraction number) according to the setting of the number of bets and the occurrence of winning ,
Information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of additions and the number of subtractions) capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device,
A points storage means (points counter) for storing the points;
Information for instructing subtraction of points (operation instruction including request for subtraction in FIG. 49), and use of the gaming value for the points stored in the gaming apparatus side by the gaming apparatus. The information (operation instruction including the addition request request in FIGS. 47 and 48) for instructing the addition of the points, which is transmitted from the gaming device side, is received in association with the addition of the points. Instruction information receiving means (LSI 117),
And a holding point updating means (LSI 117, FIG. 6) for updating the holding points stored in the holding point storage means according to the amount of change and additionally updating according to the information for instructing the addition of the holding points. ,
When the information for instructing the subtraction of the holding points is received, the holding point determination means (FIG. 49) for determining whether or not the holding points of the size for which the information indicates the subtraction are stored in the holding point storage means. Including LSI 117),
The information transmitting means, when the holding point determination means determines that the holding point storage means stores a holding point of a size indicated by the information for subtraction, an acceptance response of the holding point subtraction (FIG. 49; By subtracting a holding point designated to be subtracted by the information from the holding point stored on the gaming apparatus side to the gaming apparatus by transmitting an operation response including subtraction refusal OFF) to the gaming apparatus. (FIG. 49; subtraction of the points is confirmed after the operation response is confirmed).

  According to such a configuration, since the slot machine transmits the amount of change in the number of points, it becomes possible to perform point management on the side of the game device. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as that.

  In particular, the slot machine tends to have a shorter replacement cycle in the game hall than that of the gaming machine in order to quickly provide a more interesting game. Therefore, by holding the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming machine side to reduce the cost of the slot machine, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced. is there.

  In addition, while the point addition on the side of the slot machine is promptly performed in response to the request for addition of points using the game value, when a request for subtraction of points is made, it depends on the game situation immediately after that. Since there is a possibility that the points will be insufficient for the subtraction request, the points are subtracted on the gaming machine side on the condition that the acceptance response is returned in response. As a result, when a request for adding points or a request for subtracting points is generated based on the gaming value, it is possible to quickly and surely perform the processing according to those requests.

  (2-2) When the point update means receives the information for canceling the point subtraction instruction (FIG. 79; communication start request), the point update means corrects the point stored in the point storage means. (Fig. 79).

  With such a configuration, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the subtraction instruction arrives at the slot machine side, the number of points stored on the slot machine side may be less than the subtraction instruction amount due to the progress of the game. At this time, if it is unclear on the gaming device side whether or not the slot machine has rejected the subtraction instruction due to communication failure or the like, if the subtraction is confirmed, the slot machine's score will become negative. Inconvenience occurs. However, at this time, the slot machine corrects the score stored in the score storage means by receiving the information for canceling the score subtraction instruction. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that becomes negative.

  (2-3) Includes game control means for performing game control based on the points stored in the point storage means (FIG. 51; bet number operation invalid state when credit number counter becomes 0).

  According to such a configuration, since the game control in the slot machine is performed based on the points stored in the slot machine itself, compared to the case where the game control is performed based on the points stored in the gaming machine. Thus, the game control can be performed in real time according to the change of the score.

(2-4) The instruction information receiving means receives information for instructing transmission of update information of the holding points from the gaming device (LSI 117),
Each time the information transmitting unit receives the information for instructing the transmission of the update information, the information transmitting unit indicates the amount of change (current point related information) from the last reception of the information to the current reception. Update information is transmitted (FIG. 5; addition number counter and subtraction number counter).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, the slot machine transmits, to the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with reference to the time of the last update information transmission. . Therefore, in the gaming device, it becomes possible to manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

  (2-5) Receiving correction information (correction instruction command) for correcting the score (value of the score counter) stored in the score storage means to the score stored in the gaming device When this is done, it includes point holding means (LSI 117; the number of points is corrected according to the correction instruction command) for correcting the point stored in the point storage means based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, the number of points stored on the gaming machine side and the number of points stored on the gaming machine side become abnormal due to an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to misconduct or other causes. Even if the stored points do not match, the points stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming device side.

  (2-6) The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at a time interval (200 ms) shorter than a predetermined one game regulation time (4.1 s) (FIG. 30).

  With such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at intervals shorter than the one-game restriction time, the amount of change in the score point notified by the update information is sequentially transmitted during one game. . As a result, it becomes possible to notify the gaming device of the amount of change in the number of points in detail.

  (2-7) Includes a remaining number-of-points determination means (LSI 117, FIG. 51) for determining whether or not there is a remaining number of remaining points necessary for continuing the game based on the number of points stored in the auxiliary point storage means. .

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is not transmitted in time at the time of determination, the number of points stored on the gaming device side and the actual number of points (points stored on the slot machine side) Even if there is a gap between them, it is possible to make a determination based on the actual score.

  (2-8) When the information for instructing the game prohibition is received (the operation instruction in FIG. 54 (prohibition request is present)), the game prohibition means (the LSI 117 and the LSI 117 and The main control board 116 controls the bet number operation invalid state, and includes "BET prohibited" in FIG.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to receive a game prohibition instruction from the gaming device side and enter a game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started.

  (2-9) Information for instructing to set the value of the holding point stored in the holding point storage means to the initial value is received from the gaming device (operation instruction in FIGS. 52 and 83 (clear request). Based on what has been done), a score point initialization means for setting the value of the score point stored in the score point storage means to an initial value (FIG. 52, FIG. 83 (the LSI 117 sets the value of the score point counter to 0). Initialization) is included.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to initialize the holding points stored in the slot machine in response to an instruction from the gaming device side.

(2-10) For storing the amount of change identified by the update information transmitted by the information transmitting unit and storing the amount of change identified by the update information transmitted by the information transmitting unit one time ago. Two change amount storage means (FIG. 5; an addition number counter for storing the current addition number, a subtraction number counter for counting the current subtraction number, an area for storing the previous addition number as the previous holding point related information, and a previous subtraction number) Area)
And an arrival determination unit (LSI 117, FIG. 57) for determining arrival of the update information to the gaming device based on predetermined information (SQN) transmitted from the gaming device,
The information transmitting unit, when the arrival determining unit does not determine that the update information has arrived, the update information that can specify the sum of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storing units is used for the game. (FIG. 57).

  With such a configuration, when it is not determined that the update information has arrived, update information capable of specifying the sum of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means is transmitted to the gaming device. Therefore, it becomes possible to collect the information about the points in the gaming device surely and efficiently.

(2-11) The information transmitting unit transmits the update information to the gaming device each time it receives information instructing to transmit update information capable of specifying the amount of change from the gaming device (FIG. 5, FIG. 57, etc.),
Change amount storage means (addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for storing the change amount specified by the update information transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information,
The change amount storage means stores the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying means while the state in which the information instructing the transmission of the update information cannot be received even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Based on this, the stored change amount is updated (FIG. 56),
The information transmitting unit is configured to receive, when a change amount based on the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying unit is stored in the change amount storage unit, when the information for transmitting the update information is received, The update information capable of specifying the change amount stored in the change amount storage means is transmitted (FIG. 56).

  According to such a configuration, even when the communication between the gaming device and the slot machine is interrupted, it is possible to surely collect the information about the points during that period in the gaming device. .

(3-1) A connection unit (connector 220) for communicatively connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, one game can be started by setting the number of bets at the score, and a display result on the variable display device Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed by deriving a game, and points are added according to a prize generated by the display result of the variable display device.
A front member (front door 2b) that covers the front surface of the slot machine in an openable and closable manner,
Lock means for locking the front member in the closed state (front door opening solenoid 110, engagement protrusions 6a, 6b, engagement receiving pieces 7a, 7b),
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points (addition number, subtraction number) according to the setting of the number of bets and the occurrence of winning ,
Information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of additions and the number of subtractions) capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device,
When the information for instructing the unlocking by the lock means transmitted from the gaming device (FIG. 54; front door opening request is present) is received, a new game cannot be started (game prohibited state (number of bets). A game prohibition means (FIG. 54; BET prohibition by the LSI 117 and the main control board 116) for making the operation invalid state),
Release control means (FIG. 54; lock release by LSI 117) for performing control to release the lock by the lock means after the game prohibition means sets the game prohibition state,
When the information for instructing the lock release by the lock means (FIG. 54; front door opening request is present) is received, the release control means performs control for releasing the lock by the lock means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The delay means (FIG. 54; the LSI 117 delays the excitation of the front door opening solenoid 110 until the wait time elapses (or the game ends when the game is in progress)).

  According to such a configuration, the closed state of the front member can be released by an instruction from the gaming device side without affecting the game result.

(3-2) The specifying unit specifies the amount of change even when the holding point changes while the game prohibiting unit is in the game prohibiting state (FIG. 54; S stands for the game prohibiting state). Even if the score changes during the period, the amount of change (the number of additions = 10 in FIG. 54) is specified.),
When the amount of change in the holding points is specified by the specifying unit while the game prohibiting unit is in the game prohibited state, the information transmitting unit provides update information for specifying the amount of change for the game. It is transmitted to the device (operation response with the number of additions = 10 in FIG. 54).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to allow the gaming device to manage the number of points including the amount of change in the points after the game is prohibited.

  (3-3) The predetermined condition is that a predetermined game time (4.1 seconds) or more elapses.

  With such a configuration, even if the game is in progress when the game is prohibited, the blockage of the front member is not released before the end of the game.

  (3-4) The delay means ends the game when information for instructing unlocking by the lock means is received during a game in which symbols are variably displayed on the variable display device. The control for releasing the lock by the lock means is delayed until the game is prohibited (FIG. 54).

  With such a configuration, even if the game is in progress when the game is prohibited, the blockage of the front member is not released before the end of the game.

(4-1) A connection unit (connector 220) for communicatively connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by a player And a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, one game can be started by setting the number of bets at the score, and a display result on the variable display device Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed by deriving a game, and points are added according to a prize generated by the display result of the variable display device.
Specific means (a game control microcomputer, a payout control microcomputer, an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter, for specifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number, external output information) in the game data that changes according to the progress of the game External output information counter),
Information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of additions, the number of subtractions, and external output information) capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device,
From the time when a communication-disabled state occurs in which no signal is transmitted from the gaming device to the time when a recovery process is performed to recover from the communication-disabled state and restore the data consistency with the slot machine. In the meantime, the communication means storage means for storing the change amount of the game data identified by the identifying means (FIGS. 68 to 85; the CU is activated after the operation response transmitted immediately before the power to the CU is cut off). The number of additions, the number of subtractions, the number of points, etc., which are stored as the current number until the recovery processing is performed, and the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, the number of points counter, etc.
The information transmitting means transmits to the gaming device update information capable of specifying the amount of change in the game data stored in the incommunicable storage means due to the restoration process being performed (FIG. 68 to FIG. 68). FIG. 85: Recovery data is transmitted as a recovery response from after the operation response transmitted immediately before the power supply to the CU is transmitted to when the CU is activated and the recovery process is performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the gaming device to accurately manage the game data that also reflects the amount of change in the game data on the slot machine side from the time when communication is lost until the time of recovery. It will be possible.

(4-2) Game prohibition means (FIG. 68 to FIG. 85; play stop due to disconnection detection (betting number operation invalid state or game) to put a game in a prohibited state in which a new game cannot be started when the communication-disabled state occurs. Further includes a prohibited state)),
The communication-disabled time storage means is specified by the specifying means from the time when the communication-disabled state occurs to the time when the game data reaches a state in which the game data cannot be changed after the game prohibited state by the game prohibiting means. The amount of change in the played game data is stored (FIGS. 68 to 85; the addition changed after the play is stopped (betting number operation invalid state or game prohibited state) since the operation response is transmitted immediately before the power supply to the CU is stopped. Memorize numbers, subtraction numbers, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, accurate management of the game data that reflects the amount of change in the game data on the slot machine side from the time when the communication data cannot be changed until the time when the game data cannot change Can be used as a game device.

(4-3) The incommunicable time storage means is stored to back up the previously transmitted change amount, which is the change amount of the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the communication incompetence state occurs. (FIGS. 68 to 85; previous number of times),
The information transmitting means,
The immediately preceding transmitted update information capable of specifying the immediately preceding transmitted change amount is transmitted to the gaming device together with the update information (FIG. 23, FIG. 68 to FIG. 85; the recovery data as the previous number is transmitted as a recovery response),
Communication inability occurrence time determination information (SQN, figure) for enabling the gaming device to determine whether or not the communication inability state has occurred before the gaming device receives the immediately-previously transmitted update information. 23 (b)) to the gaming device.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming device, even if the variation amount of the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the communication-disabled state does not reach the gaming device, it is determined to that effect. Then, it becomes possible to update the game data including the immediately-previously transmitted change amount specified by the immediately-previously-transmitted update information, and the change amount of the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the communication-disabled state occurs. Even when the game arrives, it is possible to manage the game data accurately.

  (4-4) The information transmission means is a communication number for confirming whether or not the number is updated every time data is transmitted / received to / from the gaming device and communication is properly performed. (SQN) is transmitted to the gaming device as the communication inability occurrence time determination information.

  According to such a configuration, the communication number is updated at the gaming device side every time data is transmitted / received, and the communication number is used to confirm whether or not communication is properly performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the variation amount of the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the disabled state has reached the gaming device.

(5-1) Connection part (connector 220) for communicatively connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, one game can be started by setting the number of bets at the score, and a display result on the variable display device Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed by deriving a game, and points are added according to a prize generated by the display result of the variable display device.
A points storage means (points counter) for storing the points;
A remaining score determination means (LSI 117, FIG. 51) for determining the presence or absence of the remaining score required for setting the bet number based on the score stored in the score storage means;
And a game prohibiting means (FIG. 51 to FIG. 54; invalidation of bet number operation by the LSI 117) for setting a game prohibited state in which a new game cannot be started,
The game prohibition means,
When a predetermined information (FIG. 52, FIG. 54; an operation instruction including a prohibition request) is transmitted from the gaming device, a predetermined information-corresponding game prohibition means ((FIG. 52, FIG. 54) which brings the game into the game prohibited state. ,
When the remaining points determination means determines that there is no remaining points required for setting the number of bets, the remaining points correspondence game prohibiting means (FIG. 51) is included.

  According to such a configuration, as a method of setting the game-prohibited state in the point-type slot machine, when the number of points in the slot machine decreases, the slot machine side can determine that fact and set the game-prohibited state. , Because the game is prohibited due to the predetermined information being transmitted from the game device, it is possible to respond to the command from the game device, depending on the reason why it is necessary to enter the game prohibited state. It is possible to cope with both the case where the slot machine itself sets the game prohibited state and the case where the slot machine sets the game prohibited state in response to a command from the game device.

(5-2) A game device for storing and updating points can be connected to the connection section, separately from the point storage means (see FIGS. 4 and 5),
Specific means (a game control microcomputer, a payout control microcomputer, an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in the number of points according to the setting of the number of bets and the occurrence of a prize,
The game device further includes an information transmitting unit (LSI 117) that transmits update information (operation response including the number of additions and the number of subtractions) capable of specifying the amount of change.

  According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform the point management on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine is suppressed as much as possible. be able to.

  In particular, the slot machine tends to have a shorter replacement cycle in the game hall than that of the gaming machine in order to quickly provide a more interesting game. Therefore, by holding the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming machine side to reduce the cost of the slot machine, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced. is there.

  In addition, because the point management is performed on the gaming machine side, when the method of controlling to the game prohibited state by waiting for a command from the gaming machine side when the number of points decreases, It is possible to understand that the number of points has decreased in the gaming device only after the decrease is transmitted to the gaming device, and there is a possibility that the time to control the gaming prohibited state may be delayed by the time lag between them. When the number of points in the slot machine is reduced, the slot machine side discriminates to that effect and puts it in the game prohibited state, so that the inconvenience caused by the time lag can be prevented. Moreover, since the game is prohibited due to the transmission of the predetermined information from the gaming device, the command from the gaming device can be dealt with.

  (5-3) The information transmitting unit can specify the amount of change identified by the identifying unit from the time when the update information is transmitted to the time when the game is prohibited by the point-corresponding game prohibiting unit. The update information is transmitted to the game device (FIG. 51; the number of bets is 3BET after transmitting the first operation response of “point number = 3, addition number = 0, subtraction number = 3”). The operation response of “the number of points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3”, which is the amount of change until the operation is disabled, is further transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, the amount of change in the number of holding points from the time when the last update information is transmitted to the game prohibited state can be grasped on the gaming device side, and the final amount after the game prohibited state is reached. It becomes possible to manage the points on the game device side.

(5-4) A front member (front door 2b) that covers the front of the slot machine so as to be openable and closable,
Locking means for locking the front member in a closed state (front door opening solenoid 110, engaging protrusions 6a, 6b, engaging receiving pieces 7a, 7b),
The predetermined information is information (FIG. 24; game prohibition request of operation request Bit3 = 1, FIG. 54; prohibition request is present) transmitted when instructing unlocking by the locking means.

  With such a configuration, when unlocking and opening the front member, it is possible to enter the game prohibited state in response to a command from the game device.

  (5-5) The predetermined information is information transmitted when the game device is requested to end the game (FIG. 24; game prohibition request with operation request Bit3 = 1; FIG. 52; operation instruction including prohibition request). ).

  With such a configuration, when the signal requesting the end of the game is input, it is possible to set the game prohibited state in response to the command from the game device.

(6-1) According to the present invention, a valuable value (prepaid balance, number of points, or number of medals) owned by a player that receives a recording medium (card) and is specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium is displayed. A gaming unit (card unit 3) that can be used for playing a game is provided with a communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) and a variable display device whose display state can be changed. When the game can be started by setting, and one game is ended by the derived display of the display result of the variable display device, and the display result of the derived display is a predetermined specific display result. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can generate a prize in
Game history data totaling means for totaling the game history data for each player (FIG. 109; the normal mode processing section of the game history data management section 291 and the current player game history data storage section of the display effect control section 292),
A game history data storage unit (FIG. 109; a current player game history data storage unit and a backup data storage unit of the game data storage unit 392) for storing the game history data totaled by the game history data totalization unit;
The game history data storage means retains the storage of the game history data even after the recording medium received in the game device is ejected (FIG. 109; storage of the game history data in the backup data storage unit). Hold),
The game history data totaling means receives the command information (same command) indicating that the player is the same player from the gaming device (FIG. 110; Y is determined in S22), and the game is played. It includes a succession totalizing means (FIG. 110; S12) for accumulating and totalizing new game history data with respect to the game history data stored in the history data storage means.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player is compared with the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player. In order to accumulate and accumulate, the player who was playing the game leaves the seat once and returns again to restart the game, and is determined to be the same player, and the game history data before leaving the seat Therefore, it is possible to cumulatively accumulate the game history data, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

  (6-2) In the slot machine of (6-1) above, when the game is restarted after the recording medium is ejected, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming device (FIG. 110; difference). If a command is transmitted and N is determined in S22), the game history data erasing means (FIG. 110;) for erasing the game history data of the player who was playing the game before ejecting the recording medium. S15) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, since the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the slot machine, the slot machine that received it Since the game history data of the player this time can be accumulated and aggregated with respect to the received game history data, when the player who was playing the game leaves the seat once and returns again to restart the game. , It is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving the seat after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite the same player. The inconvenience of interruption can be prevented.

(6-3) In the slot machine of (6-1) or (6-2) above, the game history data totaling means is:
An in-game data storage unit (FIG. 109; a current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing the game history data of the player in the game,
End data storage means for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game (FIG. 109; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292),
In response to the recording medium being ejected from the gaming device, the game history data stored in the game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as the game history data of the player who has finished the game. (FIG. 109; upon receipt of the card return notification, the storage data of the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and when the command information is received from the gaming device, Data storage switching means (FIG. 109, FIG. 110; S12) for switching the game history data backed up by the end data storage means to a state in which the game data storage means stores the game history data as the game history data of the player in the game. May be configured to include.

  With such a configuration, when it is determined that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is used as the game history data of the player being played by the in-game data storage means. In order to switch to the state to be stored, it is possible to take over the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means in the subsequent games, add and update new game history data therein, and cumulatively store it.

  (6-4) In the slot machine according to any one of the above (6-1) to (6-3), the takeover counting unit accepts a member recording medium issued to a member player to the gaming device. The new game history data is accumulated and aggregated with respect to the game history data of the member stored in the game history data storage means on the condition that it has been done (FIG. 109; in the case of C-ID of membership card). Only the current player game history data is stored and the game history is totaled).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the players determined to be the same on condition that the member recording medium is accepted by the recording medium accepting unit. Since the data is aggregated, the advantage of the inheritance aggregation of the game history data can be limited to the member player, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(7-1) According to the present invention, a communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) capable of playing a game with points and communicating with a gaming device that adds points by using a gaming value owned by a player. , A variable display device whose display state is changeable is provided, the game can be started by setting the bet number for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, whereby one game is This is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a prize can be generated when the display result of the derived display is a predetermined specific display result, and points are added according to the occurrence of the prize. hand,
Specifying means (microcomputer for slot machine control, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in the number of points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A points storage means (points counter) for storing the points;
A score updating means (payout controller 117) for updating the score stored in the score storing means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 50; number of additions, subtraction) for controlling the transmission of the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the points stored in the point storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device. Send a motion response containing the number),
A player specific information storage unit (FIG. 109; a current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) that stores player specific information that specifies a player who plays a game;
At the start of communication with the gaming device, player specific information transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player specific information stored in the player specific information storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device. (FIG. 33, FIG. 43, FIG. 68 to FIG. 85; a recovery response including the C-ID is transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming device is connected to the slot machine and communication is started, a game is performed before the connection with a player who plays a game after connection between the slot machine and the gaming device. The player-specific information stored in the player-specific information storage means is transmitted from the communication unit to the gaming device as the information for determining the identity with the player, and thus the post-connection game is performed. It is possible to determine the identity of the player and the player who was playing the game before the connection, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player despite being different players.

(7-2) In the slot machine according to (7-1), the information transmission control unit transfers the update information and the score stored in the score storage unit from the communication unit to the gaming device. Control is performed periodically (FIG. 30; every 200 ms),
The communication unit determines whether there is a mismatch between the result of the update of the holding point based on the update information by the gaming device and the holding point stored in the holding point storage unit, and the result of the determination. Sometimes the correction information transmitted from the gaming device is received (reception of a correction instruction command),
It further comprises a score correction means (the payout controller 117 corrects the score according to a correction instruction command) for correcting the score stored in the score storage means based on the received correction information. It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the number of points stored on the gaming machine side and the number of points stored on the gaming machine side become abnormal due to an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to misconduct or other causes. Even if the stored points do not match, the points stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming device side.

(8-1) The present invention provides a communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device that enables a player to use valuable value owned by a player, and a variable display device whose display state can be changed. The game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and one game is ended by displaying and displaying the display result of the variable display device. A slot machine game (slot machine 2S) in which a prize can be generated when a predetermined display result is obtained,
Game history data storage means for storing game history data generated by execution of the game on the gaming machine (FIG. 7; this S unit game history data storage section of the display effect control unit 292),
Game history data display means (display 51) for displaying the game history data stored in the game history data storage means,
Game history data erasing means (RAM clear switch 293) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means,
When the game history data is erased by the game history data erasing means, control is performed to transmit a clear command for clearing the history display executed based on the game history data in the gaming device to the gaming device. Clear command transmission control means (FIG. 7; game history data management unit 291 for transmitting clear notification).

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the slot machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the gaming device side clears the history display according to the clear command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history display from being distorted on the side of the slot machine and on the side of the gaming machine.

(8-2) In the slot machine according to (8-1), the game history data storage means is
A today's history data storage unit (today's storage area within the storage area for 10 days) that stores today's game history data,
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today in the storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasing means shifts and stores the storage data of the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and erases the storage data of the today's history data storage unit (1 of the storage areas for 10 days). (Erasing the data of the oldest storage area and shifting the data of each storage area one by one to the old storage area to erase the storage area data of today).

  According to such a configuration, on the slot machine side, today's game history data stored in the today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit that stores the game history data before the previous day. Since the stored data in the today's history data storage unit is erased, today's game history data can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day on the slot machine side, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be effectively used.

  (8-3) In the slot machine of the above (8-1) or (8-2), game data transmission control means (transmission of game data) for controlling transmission of game data generated during a game to the game device. It may be configured to further include a game history data management unit 291).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data can be updated and stored on the gaming machine side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the slot machine, and the game displayed on the gaming machine. The history data can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(9-1) In the present invention, a player receives a recording medium (card) and uses a player's possession of a valuable value prepaid balance, a number of points, or a number of medals, which is specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium. It is equipped with a communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for a game, and a variable display device whose display state can be changed. When the game can be started by doing so, and one game is ended by the derived display of the display result of the variable display device, and the display result of the derived display becomes a predetermined specific display result. It is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can generate a prize,
A normal game data updating means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game in which a notification of a test mode for confirming the operation of the slot machine has not been received from the gaming device (FIG. 8). Including the S unit game history data storage unit of the display control effect control unit 292,
Based on the notification of the test mode received from the game device, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data updating means (FIG. 7, FIG. 109; by the operation of the trial hit mode processing unit). , The game history data is not stored in the P unit game history data storage unit or the S unit game history data storage unit but is stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the normal game data updating means for updating the game history data generated by the player playing the game during the normal game not receiving the notification of the test mode for confirming the operation of the slot machine. Since, is provided, it becomes possible to collect the game history data during the normal game in the slot machine.

  Moreover, based on the notification of the test mode in the slot machine, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data updating means, so that the game is distinguished from the game history data in the test mode in the normal game. It is possible to collect only the game history data in the inside.

  (9-2) In the slot machine described in (9-1) above, test mode data transmission control means (FIGS. 7 and 109) for performing control to transmit the game history data in the test mode to the gaming device. It may be configured to include a game history data management unit 291) that transmits game data in the trial hit mode.

  According to such a configuration, since the game history data in the test mode is displayed by the gaming device, various adjustment work can be performed while watching the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device. It is possible to improve work efficiency.

  (9-3) In the slot machine described in (9-1) or (9-2), in addition to the game history data generated by the player playing the game during the normal game, the test mode is set. It may be configured to include test mode data storage means (FIG. 7, FIG. 109; trial hit game history data storage section of display effect control section 292) for storing the game history data therein.

  According to such a configuration, the slot machine includes the test mode data storage means for storing the game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, so that the game in the normal game is played. It is possible to store the game history data in the test mode separately from the history data.

  (9-4) In the slot machine described in (9-3) above, the data storage means during the test mode performs a predetermined operation (touching an icon of a recount button displayed on the display 312 during the test mode). Based on the fact that the operation has been performed, the stored game history data is once cleared, and then the storage of the game history data in the test mode is restarted (trial hit mode processing based on the reception of the recount notification. The unit clears the memory of the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, based on the fact that the predetermined operation is performed during the test mode, the game history data stored in the test mode data storage means is once cleared, and then the game history during the new test mode. In order to restart the storage of data, for example, various adjustment work is performed based on the game history data in the test mode, and then the operation data after the adjustment is totaled again to newly collect the game history data in the test mode. As described above, it is possible to redo the totalization of the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (9-5) In the slot machine of the above (9-4), the slot machine is in a test mode in which control is performed to display game history data in the test mode stored in the test mode data storage means. It may be configured to include data display control means (a trial hit mode processing unit that controls the display 51 to display the game history data in the trial hit mode).

  According to such a configuration, since the game history data in the test mode is displayed on the slot machine, it is possible to perform various adjustment work by viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed on the slot machine. Becomes

(9-6) In the slot machine according to any one of (9-1) to (9-5), including a score updating means (a score counter) for updating the score used in the game with the game. ,
The score updating means may be configured to update the score so that it does not become a predetermined value or less during the test mode (adds the score based on the reception of the score addition command).

  According to such a configuration, since the score does not fall below the predetermined value during the test mode, it is possible to continue the aggregation of the game history in the test mode regardless of the score.

  (9-7) In the slot machine according to (9-6), the score updating means sets the score to the slot machine at a predetermined value when the score becomes a predetermined value in the test mode. On the basis of receiving a command to increase the value (point addition command) from the gaming device, the points are updated so as not to fall below a predetermined value (number of points added based on the reception of the point addition command). May be added).

  According to such a configuration, when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode, the slot machine receives a command for setting the score over the predetermined value from the gaming device. In order to update the score so that the score does not fall below a predetermined value, for games that have a function to output a command for totaling game history data even after the score has reached a predetermined value in the test mode. A device can be provided.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

2S slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 2 pachinko machine, 3 card unit, 2a main frame, 2b front door, 16,116 main control board, 17,31 payout control section, 51,54 indicator, 51a display area , 110 front door opening solenoid, 112 front door closing detector, 116 main control board, 117 LSI, 120 addition pseudo ball unit, 121 subtraction pseudo ball unit, 124 pseudo ball, 220 connector, 309 card insertion slot, 312 display Device, 319 replay button, 321 lend button, 322 return button, 323 main control unit, 324 external communication unit, 325 gaming machine communication unit, 327
Card reader / writer, 330 connector.

Claims (1)

It is possible to play with a gaming device that can convert the gaming value owned by the player into a first holding point, and a second holding point that is converted from the first holding point to be used for a game, and a prize is generated. A gaming system comprising a gaming machine having a winning determination means for determining the presence or absence of the gaming device, the gaming machine communicatively connected to the gaming device,
Converting means for converting the first holding point into the second holding point;
A first score display means for displaying the first score;
Second holding point storage means for storing the second holding point up to an upper limit point;
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second holding points which are equal to or more than a predetermined point are stored in the second holding point storage means,
A second holding point adding means for adding points corresponding to the winning to the second holding point stored in the second holding point storage means when the winning determination means determines that there is a winning;
Moving means for moving a predetermined object,
Movement detection means for detecting movement of the predetermined object,
The predetermined object is moved by the moving means when the number of points to be added due to the occurrence of the prize exceeds the difference between the upper limit point and the second holding point stored in the second holding point storage means. Movement control means,
A first holding point display update for adding a score according to the excess to the first holding point displayed by the first holding point display means based on the movement of the predetermined object detected by the movement detecting means. And means,
The game system, wherein the moving means stops the predetermined object at a predetermined initial position when supplied with electric power.